Home

SV-Master Series Servo Drive User Manual

1. 9 17 93 i X Alls ee i i l D q e a mT C i al _ z D q U l Ua m m a L 1 il Fig 1 6 Outline dimensions of operation panel box The mounting dimensions of the operation panel box are as shown in Fig 1 7 Sheet thickness 12 2 0mm Fig 1 7 Mounting dimensions of operation panel box 13 1 9 Options 1 9 1 LCD operation panel olv Fig 1 8 LCD operation panel 1 9 2 Braking components see Appendix 2 Chapter 2 Drive Installation 2 1 Removal and installation of drive components 1 Lower cover 2 Operation panel 3 Upper cover 4 Dustproof plate Fig 2 1 Removal and installation of servo drive components taking R4 as an example 1 Removal and installation of lower cover Removal Loosen the fixing bolts of the lower cover with the screwdriver press the snap fits on both sides in direction A make snap fits off with the mid enclosure and then lift the lower cover in direction B Now the lower cover is removed Installation Insert the insertion piece at the top of the lower cover into the upper cover press both sides of the lower cover with both hands in direction A so that the snap fits can enter into the mid enclosure then tighten the fixing bolts of the lower cover with the screwdriver Now
2. COM Fig 3 19 Wiring mode 1 of Multi functional output terminal 2 When the multi functional output terminals Y1 and Y2 use the external power supply the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 20 Warning The inductive load such as relay shall be anti parallel with the fly wheel diode 37 5V COM Fig 3 20 Wiring mode 2 of multi functional output terminal 3 When the digital pulse frequency output DO Y1 terminal used as DO uses the internal 24V power supply of the drive the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 21 24 poy DO Y1 __ 24V 5V Digital frequency meter COM Fig 3 21 Connecting mode 1 of output terminal DO 4 When the digital pulse frequency output DO Y1 terminal used as DO uses the external power supply the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 22 __ 24V _t24V po 4 DO Y1 ans O 4 5V JUL DC Digital frequenc meter COM Fig 3 22 Connecting mode 2 of output terminal DO 38 Wiring for relay output terminals TA TB and TC In the case of drive inductive load e g electromagnetic relay contactor
3. Table 8 1 Fault record table Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code The acceleration time is too short Lengthen the acceleration time The motor parameters are Perform the parameter auto tuning of the incorrect motor When instantaneous stop Stike etrn mods moe Gd asih d i et the start mode 00 as the spee Acceleration happens restart the rotating A f k Er oC1 over current of tracking restart function motor the drive PG fault occurs when it is running Check the PG and its wiring The drive power is too low Adopt the drive with high power class aek Adjust the V F curve setting and the manual V F curve is improper torque increase The deceleration time is too 3 Lengthen the deceleration time short Deceleration There is potential energy load or Use additionally appropriate dynamic Er oC2 over current of _ the load inertial torque is large braking components the drive Encoder fault occurs when PG is eee Check the encoder and its wiring running The drive power is low Adopt the drive with high power class The acceleration deceleration Lengthen the acceleration deceleration time time is too short appropriately Sudden load change or abnormal Check the load Constant speed load Er oC3 over current of the drive Low grid voltage Check the input power supply Encoder fault occurs when PG is running Check the encoder and its wiring The drive powe
4. Pin Signal name Signal description Pin Signal name Signal description 1 GND Ground 9 RZ Pulse command Z 2 VCC 5V power output 10 RZ Pulse command Z Encoder frequency output 3 PZO 11 RB Pulse command B ZO Encoder frequency output 4 PZO 12 RB Pulse command B ZO Encoder frequency output 5 PBO o 13 RA Pulse command A 43 Encoder frequency output 6 PBO 14 RA Pulse command A BO Encoder frequency output 7 PAO 15 NC Empty AO Encoder frequency output 8 PAO AO Shell Shield Shield 3 3 2 Profibus DP communication card EC CMPDP01 fieldbus communication cards is suitable for SVM servo drive its features include Send control commands to the drive e g start stop jog etc Sent frequency reference signal to the drive e Read working status information and actual values from the drive e Modify drive function code settings e Reset the drive fault As shown on the right the front of the communication card with three LED lights a DB9 standard Profibus DP bus connector COM1 a 4 pin common connector COM2 and a terminal resistor key switch Back with a drive connection plug for the communication card plugged into the drive Table 3 4 DB9 communication port pins and Fig 3 28 Profibus DP card Table 3 5 4pin common connector pins 44 functions and functions Pin N
5. Slave Command Data Check code address code Register address Number of bytes read 0x05 0x03 0x01 0x01 0x00 0x01 0xD5 0xB2 Response frame Slave Command Data ane Number of bytes eck code eulshess code BE Vh Register content 0x05 0x03 0x02 0x13 0x88 0x44 0xD2 In the above table the check code is the CRC verification value Please refer to the following text for the computing method of the CRC verification 2 ASCII mode In the ASCII mode the frame header is Ox3A and the frame trail is OxOD 0x0A by default The frame trail can be set by the user as well In this mode except for the frame header and frame trail all the other data bytes are sent in the ASCII code mode The 4 high bytes will be sent first and then the 4 low bytes In the ASCII mode the dada has 7 bytes For A to F their capital letter in the ASCII code will be used The data is verified by the LRC and the verification involves information from slave address to data The checksum is equivalent to the complement of the character sum of all the data in the check The following example shows writing 4000 OxFA0 into the internal register 0201 P02 05 of No 5 slave in the ASCII mode Request frame Frame Slave Command Data Check Frame trail head address code Register address Written content code Character 0 5 0 6 0 2 0 1 0 F A 0 4 3 CR LF ASCII 3A 30 31 30 36 30 32 30 31 30 46 41
6. running running time time S 10 St 10 P13 35 go age The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 10 P13 36 running Stage 10 4 o 6500 0 0 1 20 0 3 running time time Si 11 St 11 P13 37 os Bad The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Si 11 399 Stage 11 P13 38 running ail 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 3 running time time Stage 12 Stage 12 E P13 39 3 The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting S 12 299 Stage 12 P13 40 running BAA 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 i running time time Stage 13 Stage 13 P13 41 p 4 The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 13 St 13 P13 42 running AgS 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 3 running time time S 14 St 14 P13 43 999 AgS The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 14 P13 44 running Stage 14 4 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 3 running time time St 15 St 15 P13 45 999 AgS The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 15 St 15 P13 46 running agan 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 3 running time time Group P15 Communication parameters 0 MODBUS P15 00 Frotocol protocol 1 0 selection selection 1 Reserved Unit place of LED Baud rate selection 0 4800BPS Communic Communica 1 9600BPS biso ation tion 2 19200BPS 3 ai configurati configuratio 3 38400BPS on mn 4 115200BPS 5 125000BPS Tens place of LED Data format 0 1 8 2 N format RTU 104 1 1 8 1 E format RTU 2 1 8 1 O format RTU 3 1 7 2 N format ASCII
7. RTU mode Modbus data frame a gt Slave Command End at least 3 5 Start at least 3 5 B DEE Bheek coud nee bytes of idle time GIES code ytes of idle time ASCII mode Modbus data frame gt Start Slave Command End Check code Ox3A address Lee Data 0x0D frame trail byte Attached Fig 1 1 Modbus protocol format 263 Modbus adopts the Big Endian encoding mode which sends the high bytes first and then sends the low bytes 1 RTU mode In RTU mode the larger value between the function code setting value and the Modbus internal convention value shall be selected as the idle time between frames The minimum idle time value between frames under the Modbus internal convention is as follows the idle time that the frame head and frame trail pass the bus shall not be less than that of 3 5 bytes to define the frame The data verification adopts CRC 16 and the verify checksum includes the whole information The high and low bytes of the checksum can only be sent after their exchanging Please refer to the example after the protocol for the detailed CRC verification Please note At least 3 5 characters of the BUS idle time shall be kept between the frames and it doesn t need to accumulate the start and end idle time In the sample below it is used to read the parameters of the internal register 0101 P01 01 of No 5 slave in the RTU mode Request frame
8. QF _R 3 phase f gt AC powers _S SVM G V supply l dW A 2 ie mO ooo 3 PE B ooo D Nas oo 10 Al1 oO Al2 COM GND Fig 3 1 Simple wiring diagram for main circuit 3 1 Wiring and configuration of main circuit terminals 3 1 1 Types of main circuit input output terminals There are five types of main circuit terminals due to different drive models The detailed descriptions are as follows Terminal type 1 Applicable models SVM 4T0 75 SVM 4T15 R L1 S L2 T L3 DC P B1 B2 DC U T1 WT2 W T3 Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC 380V input terminals DC P B 1 Reserved for external DC reactor connected with copper bus upon delivery P B 1 B2 Reserved for external braking resistor DC DC negative bus output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals Terminal type 2 Applicable models SVM 4T18 5 SVM 4T30 a R L1 S L2 T L3 SES c Pet B2 26 um ve wrs Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC 380V input terminals DC P B 1 Reserved for external DC reactor connected with copper bus upon delivery P B 1 B2 Reserved for external braking resistor 19 DC DC negative bus output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals Terminal type 3 Applicable models SVM 4T37 SVM 4T45 Sv R L1 S L2 T L3
9. soc P B1 B2 uni ve wrs Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC 380V input terminals DC P B 1 Reserved for external DC reactor connected with copper bus upon delivery P B 1 B2 Reserved for external braking resistor DC DC negative bus output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals Terminal type 4 Applicable models SVM 4T55 SVM 4T75 TOP SS BOTTOM c Pe B2 DC ur vir2 w Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC 380V input terminals DC P B 1 Reserved for external DC reactor connected with copper bus upon delivery P B 1 B2 Reserved for external braking resistor DC DC negative bus output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals Terminal type 5 Applicable models SVM 4T90 SVM 4T280 TOP R L1 S L2 m D BOTTOM c e vc U T1 V T2 W T3 Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC 380V input terminals P DC Reserved for external DC reactor connected with copper bus upon delivery P DC Reserved for external braking unit DC DC negative bus output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals CJ Note In the common DC bus application the positive pole and the negative pole of the DC input should be connected to the terminals DC
10. Hundreds place Homing 0 Homing only the first run 1 Homing each run 2 Homing every time power on Reserved Thousands place The origin correction mode 0 Single correction only corrected position signal at the first when there is zero signal 1 Real time correction corrected position signal when there is zero signal Note 1 CWL CCWL represent the left and right limit switch 2 ORGP represent external home switch the external home switch may be external photoelectric switch or proximity switch mounted on the spindle also may be encoder Z pulse mounted on the spindle H01 02 Positioning mode selection 0 2111H 0000H Positioning mode selection parameters description please refer to table 6 20 Table 6 20 Positioning mode selection parameters description Parameter Setting value Description place Unit place 0 Relative This positioning position relative to the position before this Positioning positioning positioning start 231 position mode 4 Absolute This positioning position relative to the position of origin positioning 0 locked in the positioning Continue to position control maintain quasi stopping point Tens place points Positioning lock renee When the position deviation from quasi stopping point is within mode Oe ee i the range set in the H01 42 position control is not performed the positioning range when the position d
11. Stop or fault reset Table 4 4 Useag e of the Multi functional key Multi functional key M key Function Function meaning 0 No function The M key is disabled JOG The M key is used as JOG key In the operation panel running command channel press this key and hold the drive will run in real time JOG mode Release this key it will stop running in JOG mode FWD REV running direction The M key is used as the direction switching key FWD REV In the operation panel running command channel it can be used to switch the output frequency direction on line Command channel switching 1 The M key is used as the running command channel switching key which is enabled only in the stop status The running command channel switching order is as follows Operation panel running command channel LED of M key on gt terminal running command channel LED of M key off serial port running command channel LED of M key flash operation panel running command channel LED of M key on Command channel switching 2 Using the M key as the running command channel switching key which is enabled in both stop and running statuses The switching order is as above Keyboard locking function The M key is used as the multi functional keyboard locking key Now press the M key and press the key three times at the same time to lock the keyboard The locking mode of the keyboard dep
12. 0 1 20 0 0 1 40 0 0 1 60 0 0 1 80 0 0 1 90 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 100 0 101 reference 15 15 P13 16 Simple PLC running mode selection PLC running mode Unit place of LED PLC running mode 0 Stop after single cycle 1 Hold the end value after single cycle 2 Continuous cycle Tens place of LED Start mode 0 Restart from the first section 1 Continue to run from the stage of the stop or fault moment 2 Continue to run from the stage and frequency of the stop or fault moment Hundreds place of LED power down storage 0 No storage 1 Save the stage and frequency at the moment of power down Thousands place of LED Stage time unit selection 0 s 1 min 0000 P13 17 Stage 1 setting Stage 1 setting Unit place of LED 0 Multi stage reference multi speed or multi stage closed loop reference depends on P13 00 1 Digital reference 1 Keyboard AV reference 2 Digital reference 2 Terminal UP DN reference 3 Reserved 4 Al analog reference 5 Terminal PULSE reference 6 Process closed loop PID 7 PLC card or bus reference Reserved Tens place of LED 0 FWD 1 REV 2 Determined by the running command Hundreds place of LED 0 Acceleration deceleration time 1 1 Acceleration deceleration time 000 102 2 2 Accel
13. Drive failure Frequency output Motor encoder feedback sa Fig 7 2 Analog pulse control wiring diagram 244 7 1 3 Whole analog control There are two analog speed control mode normal sampling mode and high speed sampling mode Normal sampling mode you need to set P02 04 to 3 set correctly P10 01 Al analog function selection based on Al port to use The maximum frequency corresponding to analog is determined by the corresponding function code of P10 group Speed loop PI parameters are determined by the P05 group function code Tapping enable switch to the tapping mode by the function code H02 00 set to 1 or by X4 terminal set to No 90 function in tapping mode speed loop PI parameters are determined by H02 03 H02 09 while tapping acceleration deceleration time is determined by the H02 01 and H02 02 High speed sampling mode H02 13 is set to 1 high speed analog sampling in non tapping mode The maximum frequency corresponding to analog is determined by the corresponding function code of P10 group Tapping enable switch to the tapping mode by the function code H02 00 set to 1 or by X4 terminal set to No 90 functions in tapping mode speed loop PI parameters are determined by H02 03 H02 09 while tapping acceleration deceleration time automatically set to 0 the maximum frequency corresponding to analog is determined by H02 10 Reaming is enabled by X7
14. Drive failure Frequency output 4 axis plug lt lt i yi Motor encoder feedback Fig 7 41 Whole pulse control wiring diagram 242 7 1 2 Analog speed pulse position control Analog speed control needs to set P02 04 to 3 set correctly P10 01 Al analog function selection based on Al port to use If rigid tapping pulse position control the X4 terminal function P09 03 is set to 89 H00 00 is set to 1 speed position control switch when X4 terminal is closed the spindle enter pulse reference position control mode set the pulse command input type H00 01 correctly When rigid tapping spindle speed corresponding to the calculated value of the numerator of electronic gear ratio HO0 04 and denominator of electronic gear ratio HO0 05 Increase the proportional gain 1 of position control H00 08 proportional gain 2 of position control HO0 09 can make the position response faster but too fast will cause position control overshoot appropriately increase position command filter time HO0 02 and position command acceleration and deceleration time constant HO0 03 can suppress overshoot 243 Googol CNC system Power supply Controller axis linking interface AXIS4 DB25 male head Forward Speed position xa switch Spindle accurate stop oone TA Drive ready 1 O relay board Quasi stop in place
15. General inspection details 1 Check if the screws of the control terminal are loose If so use the screwdriver to fasten them 2 Check if the main circuit terminals are properly connected and the connection part of copper bus is over heated 3 Check if there are any damage to the power cables and the control cables and check particularly whether there are any wear on the cable sheath 4 Check if the insulating tapes around the power cable lugs are stripped 5 Clean out the dust on the circuit board and the duct It is better to use the dust collector 6 Before testing the grounding insulating performance of the drive please short circuit all the input and output terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P B1 B2 DC and DC of its main circuit terminals first and then conduct the grounding test It is prohibited to conduct the grounding test for a single terminal otherwise the drive may be damaged Please use 500V Mega Ohm Meter in the test 7 To test the insulating performance of the motor please test the motor independently after disconnecting the input terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 of the motor from the drive otherwise the drive may be damaged aa Note 1 The drive has passed the dielectric strength test before delivery Thus you should not conduct the test again improper test may damage the drive 2 Be sure to replace the original components in the drive with the same model and same electric parameters
16. 0 Switch to servo speed control according to the downtime H00 18 1 Switch to the speed control deceleration stop 6 20 Spindle positioning parameters Group H01 Spindle positioning selection parameters description please refer to table 6 18 Table 6 18 Spindle positioning selection parameters description Parameter Setting value Description place 0 Carry Digital carry control set appropriate position reference positioning by H01 10 H01 25 Unit place Indexing control indexing supports continuous indexing of Positioning y i seven different angles H01 10 H01 23 after the completion mode selection 1 Indexing gles of indexing output indexing completion signal spindle hold position locked state 0 single point Single point digital carry control position reference source Tens place Carry from H01 10 HO1 11 multi point digital carry control position Digital carry selection 1 Multi point reference source select appropriate position reference of Cally H01 10 HO1 25 by terminal function 76 77 78 0 Single point Single point carry represents positioning remains locked in the positioning set position after the completion of positioning multiple Hundreds once i positioning said that after completion of positioning and atter place positioning hold time of H01 27 continues to run according to single point 1 Single point Siny mod positioning thousands place of
17. TO Drive in fault T1 Speed control T2 Torque control T3 Position control vvu Fig 6 2 Operation state of drive Unit place of LED BITO RUN STOP When the drive is in stop state the value for the BITO place is 0 otherwise it is 1 BIT1 REV FWD When the drive runs forward the value for the BIT1 place is 0 otherwise it is 1 The corresponding bit will be set to 1 when the condition is met for other bits 130 P01 18 State of digital input terminal Tens Unit 0 FFH 00 BITO State of terminal X2 State of terminal X3 BIT3 BIT1 BIT2 State of terminal X1 State of terminal X4 BITO State of terminal X6 State of terminal X7 BIT3 BIT1 BIT2 State of terminal X5 State of terminal X8 Fig 6 3 State of digital input terminal Displaying the ON OFF state of 8 terminals X1 X8 0 means that the terminal is in OFF state and 1 means that the terminal is in ON state P01 19 Unit State of digital output terminal 0 FH 0 BITO State of terminal Y1 BIT1 State of terminal Y2 BIT2 State of terminal R1 BITS State of terminal R2 Fig 6 4 State of digital output terminal The function code P01 19 can display the state of the output terminals Y1 and Y2 and the relays R1 and R2 When the signal is output the corresponding place of P01 19 will be
18. 258 Symptoms Conditions Possible causes Solutions Transient low voltage compensation is applied when power fault restart and the power supply voltage is too low Check the power fault restart function setting and the input voltage The drive does not The terminal with the coast to stop function is enabled Check the coast to stop terminal The disabling run terminal of the drive is enabled Check the disabling run terminal of the drive The terminal with the external stop function is enabled Check the terminal with the external stop function Under the three wire control The drive work after the run mode the terminal with the Set and close the three wire operation does not key is pressed and _ three wire operation control control terminal work the running LED is function is not closed a Fault alarm occurs Troubleshoot Cancel the virtual terminal function of the The virtual terminal function of 2a host device or set the function properly the host device is set through the host device or modify the improperly P09 16 setting The forward reverse logic of the input terminal is set Check the P09 15 setting improperly When the Since the thyristor or the drive is contactor is not closed when The thyristor or the i started the drive runs with large load i contactor __ Run the drive after the thyristor or the the repor
19. BitO X1 positive negative logic define Bit1 X2positive negative logic define Bit2 X3positive negative logic define Bit3 X4positive negative logic define BitO X5positive negative logic define Bit1 X6positive negative logic define Bit2 X7positive negative logic define Bit3 X8positive negative logic define Fig 6 38 Terminal positive negative logic setting This function code defines the positive negative logic of the input terminal Positive logic enabled when the Xi terminal is connected to the corresponding common end disabled when the terminal is disconnected Negative logic disabled when the Xi terminal is connected to the corresponding common end enabled when the terminal is disconnected When 0 is selected for the BIT it indicates the positive logic When 1 is selected it indicates the negative logic For example If you want to set X1 X4 as positive logic and set X5 X8 as negative logic make the following setting Set the logic state of X4 X1 as 0000 the corresponding hexadecimal value as 0 and then the LED will display 0 at the unit place Set the logic state of X8 X5 as 1111 the corresponding hexadecimal value as 0 and then the LED will display F at the tens place P09 16 Virtual input terminal setting 00 FFH 00 This function code is used to set the enabled state of the host device virtual input terminal For the detailed setting method please refer to the description of P09 1
20. Check the power supply Running command channel switches Check the relevant function code setting of the operation and running command channel Too large DEV Modify the DEV detection value setting The positive negative logic of the control terminals changes Check if the P09 15 setting corresponds with the requirements In the case that there is no stop command the motor stops automatically and the drive run indicator light is on running at zero frequency Fault resets automatically Check the fault auto reset setting and find out the fault causes Simple PLC pause Check PLC pause functional terminal External interrupt Check the external interrupt setting and find out the fault source The set frequency is 0 Check the set frequency The startup frequency is higher than the set frequency Check the startup frequency There is something wrong with the skip frequency setting Check the skip frequency setting The closed loop output is negative when the reverse running is prohibited Check the P14 22 and the P08 18 setting Enable the disabling forward run terminal during forward run process Check the terminal function setting Enable the disabling reverse running terminal during reverse running process Check the terminal function setting The frequency adjustment setting is 0 Check the P02 11 and the P02 12 setting
21. Host l l Function Terminal l Shield cable i Terminal Function l Signal RS485 RS485 Signal 1 Signal RS485 l HI RS485 Signal 1 Signal GND GND i GND Signal GND le Se aa J PE Enclosure I Fig 3 10 RS485 communication wiring 2 Connection of the drive and the host device with RS232 interface r l T r Host i i l RS485 232 converter l RS232 DB9 i i I si i l i i Function Terminal hield cablel Signal Pin No i SVM l 5V power 5V 1 PE Enclosure i l DATATXD TXD LI RXD 2 i I DATARXD RXD l TXD 3 l l i PowerGND GND GND 5 l i j l DTR 4 A Function Terminal Terminal Function DSR 6 l l r RI 9 Signal RS485 RS485 Signal D i l Signal RS485 H I RS485 Signal RTS 7 l i Signal GND GND H 1 GND Signal GND ere Tapa oo hield gable LFE Enclosure E an l Fig 3 11 RS485 RS485 232 RS232 communication wiring 3 Wiring for connecting several drives in the same RS485 system 33 PLC SVM SVM SVM SG RS485 RS485 PE RS485 PE RS485 PE RS485 cable Fig 3 12 Recommended wiring diagram for the communication between PLC and several drives the drives and motors are reliably grounded If normal communication still cannot be realized through the above wiring
22. P97 02 Fault protection and alarm property setting 3 Fault protection and alarm property setting 3 Unit place of LED Action upon temperature sampling disconnection 0 Activate temperature protection upon inverter and rectifier module and stop in the stop mode 1 Activate temperature protection upon inverter and rectifier module and coast to stop 2 Temperature alarm upon inverter and rectifier module and keep running 3 No action to rectifier activate temperature protection upon inverter and stop in the stop mode Tens place of LED Action upon under voltage fault indication 0 No action 1 Action under voltage is regarded as a kind of fault Hundreds place of LED Action upon auto reset interval fault indication 0 No action 1 Action Thousands place of LED Fault lockup function selection 0000 109 0 Prohibited 1 Open without fault output 2 Open with fault output Overload Unit place of LED Overload compensation mode 0 No action 1 Common motor with low speed compensation 2 Variable frequency motor without low speed compensation Tens place of LED Overload pre alarm detection selection Overload 0 Always detect protection R P97 03 protection 1 Detect only at constant speed 1 0001 setting for ator setting Hundreds place of LED Overload pre alarm action selection 0 Alarm and keep runni
23. Unit place Pulse clear mode 0 Clear position pulse command and feedback pulse error 1 Reserved 2 Reserved Tens place Position deviation reset signal selection 0 Pulse mode 1 Level mode No 81 function of multi function terminal can complete pulse clear function H00 08 H00 09 Position control proportional gain 1 1 8000 100 Position control proportional gain 2 1 8000 400 By H00 08 and H00 09 set proportional gain of the position loop regulator The higher the gain the smaller the position lag but too large can cause oscillation the lower the gain the slower the position tracking Generally in the case of no oscillation increase position gain reasonably In pulse following positioning mode H00 08 and H00 09 can be switched by H00 10 in internal position reference positioning mode the acceleration and deceleration process use H00 09 as a position loop gain constant speed and positioning keeping state use H00 08 as position loop gain HO00 10 Position gain 1 and gain 2 switching mode HO00 11 HO00 12 H00 13 H00 14 0 4 0 0 100 10 0 100 10 0 10000 50 0 15 1 Position gain switching torque command level Position gain switching speed command level Position gain switching position deviation level Gain switching smoothing filtering coefficient Position control proportional gain can be switched by H00 10 setting mode 0 Do not switch By default the position loop proportional gain 1 is valid
24. 0 4800bps 1 9600bps 2 19200bps 3 38400bps 4 115200bps 5 125000bps Data format 0 1 8 2 N RTU 1 1 8 1 E RTU 2 1 8 1 O RTU 3 1 7 2 N ASCII 4 1 7 1 E ASCII 5 1 7 1 O ASCII Wiring mode 0 Cable RS485 1 MODEM Need RS232 RS485 conversion Fig 6 72 Setting of communication configuration This function is used for selecting parameters for serial communication port and setting according to LED bits If the hundreds place of the function code is in MODEM mode whenever the drive powers up the initialization operation will be performed once for MODEM via RS485 port on the control board so that the MODEM can automatically response after receiving 3 times of ringing signal of telephone line to realize the remote control line made up from dial up line Note SVM control board provides RS485 port only If the communication port of the external equipment is RS232 the RS232 RS485 conversion equipment shall be added separately P15 02 Local address 0 247 5 This function code is used for marking the address of drive Note 0 is the broadcast address If it is set as the broadcast address it can only receive and execute the broadcast command from the host device and will not respond to the host device 217 When the serial port communication signal disappears for a period of time exceeding the set value of this function code the drive is considered as communication fault Whe
25. 300 of the rated torque of the motor 19 Flux command 0 100 of the rated flux of the motor 20 Reserved 21 Output torque bipolar 300 300 of the rated torque of the motor 22 Output torque current bipolar 300 300 of the rated torque of the motor 23 Torque offset bipolar 300 300 of the rated torque of the motor Negative maximum output frequency 24 Motor rotating speed bipolar maximum output frequency 25 Reserved Reserved Percentage of communication 26 0 4095 card CJ Note 1 When the function corresponding to the AO output is unipolar the indication value corresponding to the minimum output has the minimum absolute value while the indication value corresponding to the maximum output has the maximum absolute value When the function is bipolar the indication value corresponding to the minimum output is the smallest while the indication value corresponding to the maximum output is the biggest 2 When the AO output is current it is suggested that the external equivalent resistance not exceed 4000hm For the AO1 analog output if you need to change the display range or correct the meter error you can adjust the output gains to achieve the goal The analog output zero offset takes 100 as the maximum output 10V or 20mA and adopts the percentage as the unit to set the up and down translation Taking the output voltage as an example the adjustment re
26. 40 3 2 2 Schematic diagram of control board Interface to extension oes 7 J7 Control board J9 zi iB H Interface to drive board o Interface to operation panel Function board Jumper selector AOLAOZATIAI2 1 ATTIRA oe aE Terminals of control circuit NEPE GB 4B GB ab ab GB BB aR BB PP Poo J5 5i EPP EPELE SHE HEH AEE DS Fig 3 26 Schematic diagram of control board 41 3 3 Expansion card interface connection SVM servo drive supports incremental encoder card resolver encoder card SinCos encoder card Profibus DP communication card CANopen communication card AD DA expansion cards programmable multifunction expansion card expansion IO card 3 3 1 Expansion encoder card SVM servo drive supports three kinds of encoder card Incremental PG card EC PGINC Revolver PG card EC PGRLV SinCos PG card EC PGSIN Three cards with the same cable cable installation relationship as shown below where the single board has a 30pin horn socket and its corresponding plug and the other end is divided into two DB15 terminals one terminal X1 for connecting the motor encoders the definition of the three PG card is different another terminal X2 for connecting pulse input and pulse frequency output The definition of three PG cards are the same PT ATT e OEH pir oranaonin
27. CSA of phase cable S mm Min CSA of grounding wire Sp mm Ss16 S 16 lt Ss35 16 35 lt S S 2 CJ Note The input output EMI filter shall be installed as close to the drive as possible 24 3 1 3 Wiring for basic operation 3 phase 380V 50 60Hz Multi function input 1 eit DCL DC reactor External optional part Braking resistor woclewy J DC Multi function input 2 Multi function input 3 Multi function input 4 Multi function input 5 Multi function input 6 Multi function input 7 Multi function input 8 Analog differential input 10V 10V Analog input R L1 i S a4 a mB SVM P24 PLC ooo ooo i a GND x1 AO1A02 xo 0 20mA AO AQ2 x3 0 10V X4 P24 X5 y1 X6 COM x7 x8 COM Y2 10 AIL AI2 0 20mA AI1 A12 m o i 0 10V GND o AI3 rT Al3 Lo _ RS485 FE RS485 Fig 3 3 Basic wiring diagram 1 25 DC voltage current XN meter XN Voltage current signal Frequency meter open collector output m _ 0 24V pulse signal output mL pulse signal outpu Output 2 Bidirectional open collector output TA Programmable relay TB output TC BRA Programmable relay output BRC gt St
28. The definitions for V F curves 1 3 are as the following Constant torque feature Set value 1 50 00Hz Set value 2 60 00Hz Set value 3 50 00Hz N E E RR SSO a A T rrr a Voltage Voltage Voltage vV v v 17 14 17 1 F 17 1 0 7325 50 01525 60 0 1525 50 Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Frequency Hz The definitions for V F curves 5 8 are as the following Degressive torque feature Set 50 00Hz Set 50 00Hz Set 60 00Hz Set 60 00Hz value 5 value 6 value 7 value 8 SBOP a E e O E Voltage Voltage v v BBO e 380 p Voltage Voltage v v i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i l 073 25 50 1 3 25 50 073 30 60 1 3 30 60 Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Frequency Hz The definitions for V F curves 9 12 are as the following Degressive torque feature 166 Set 50 00Hz Set 50 00Hz Set 60 00Hz Set 60 00Hz value 9 value 10 value 11 value 12 yeis eN rie s S SBOP ss FT 380 755 0 ttS Voltage Voltage Voltage v v v 36 1 45 6 f 20 9 24 7 l i 2 5 50 07330 i i i i 0 1325 50 0 73 33 60 Frequency Hz 1 33 0 60 Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Frequency Hz P07 07 0 0 30 0 0 0 P07 08 Motor 1 torque increase cut off point 0 0 50 0 10 0 To compensate the low frequency torque features certain in
29. orque limit 1 valid only for X7 or X8 52 Pulse input terminal of the orque limit 2 valid only for X7 or X8 53 Torque reference pulse input erminal valid only for X7 or X8 54 Zero servo enable terminal 55 Motor 1 and 2 switching erminal 56 Security terminal input 57 Spindle swing 58 PG speed testing input A valid only for X7 59 PG speed testing input B valid only for X8 86 60 Emergency stop 64 71 Reserved 72 Reaming enable 73 75 Reserved 76 Start positioning terminals 1 77 Start positioning terminals 2 78 Start positioning terminals 3 79 Position pulse direction valid only for X7 80 Position pulse input valid only for X8 81 Position deviation counter reset 82 Command pulse inhibit 83 Position loop gain switching terminal 84 Position reference point input terminal valid only for X6 X7 X8 85 Spindle positioning back to zero terminal 86 Spindle indexing terminal 1 87 Spindle indexing terminal 2 88 Spindle indexing terminal 3 89 Servo control switching terminal 90 Tapping enable 91 Negative limit switch valid only for X6 X7 X8 92 Positive limit switch valid only for X6 X7 X8 93 94 Reserved 95 Internal positioning start enable Only the following function No will be shown in the quick menu 0 1 4 6 11 14 15 22 27 29 33 3 5 37 44 0 Two wire control mode 1 1 Two wire control mode 2 FWD REV Runni
30. 0x6505 Current running frequency 0x6506 Output current 0x6507 Output voltage 0x6508 Output power 0x6509 Rotating speed in running Ox650A Line speed in running 0x650B Analog process closed loop feedback 0x650C Bus voltage 0x650D Reserved 0x650E Output torque BITO BIT7 X1 X8 Ox650F Status of digital input output terminal BIT10 BIT13 Y1 Y2 R1 R2 0x6510 Reserved 0x6511 Running frequency after compensation 0x6512 The 1st running fault 0x6513 The 2nd running fault 0x6514 The 3rd the latest one running fault 0x6515 Setting running frequency 0x6516 Setting rotating speed 0x6517 Setting analog process closed loop 0x6518 Setting line speed 0x6519 Alt 0x651A Al2 0x651B Setting length reserved F 0x651C Setting acceleration time 1 0x651D Setting deceleration time 1 Command reference channel the same as function code 0x651E P02 02 0x651F Status word 2 of drive ER Frequency reference channel the same as function code P02 04 276 1 The status parameter does not support the writing operation Register Parameter name Remarks address 0x6521 Accumulating length reserved Motor and mode selection the same as function code 0x6522 P02 00 0x6523 Bus voltage at the 3rd fault 0x6524 Actual current at the 3rd fault 0x6525 Operation frequency at the 3rd fault The bit definition is the same as that 0x6526 Drive operation status at the 3rd fault of the status word 3 0x6527 Al3
31. 1 Torque command When torque is greater than the position gain switching torque command level H00 11 after gain switching smoothing coefficient HO0 14 position loop proportional gain 1 HO0 08 automatically switches to the position loop proportional gain 2 H00 09 2 Speed command When speed is greater than the position gain switching speed command level HO0 12 after gain switching smoothing coefficient HO0 14 position loop proportional gain 1 HO0 08 automatically switches to the position loop proportional gain 2 H00 09 3 Position deviation When position deviation is not greater than the position gain switching deviation level HO0 13 after gain switching smoothing coefficient HO0 14 position loop proportional gain 1 HO0 08 automatically switches to the position loop proportional gain 2 H00 09 4 External terminal switch Position gain can be switched manually via the terminal Select any one of the terminals X1 X8 defined its function as 83 229 HO00 15 Position feedforward gain 0 120 0 100 0 Position controller output limiter 0 100 0 20 0 Set position control feedforward the greater the setting the smaller the position error and the H00 16 corresponding performance is improved but is likely to cause overrun please note If feedforward set is larger will cause speed overrun or running sound larger if increase H00 02 can improve the situation H00 17 Servo shutdown mode 0 1 1
32. 11 Acceleration deceleration time terminal 2 When only one motor motor 1 or motor 2 is controlled the acceleration deceleration time 1 4 can be selected by combining the ON OFF status of the acceleration deceleration terminal 1 amp 2 Table 6 9 Expression of acceleration deceleration time selection p Acceleration or deceleration time Terminal 2 Terminal 1 f selection OFF OFF Acceleration time 1 deceleration time 1 OFF ON Acceleration time 2 deceleration time 2 ON OFF Acceleration time 3 deceleration time 3 ON ON Acceleration time 4 deceleration time 4 If the drive needs to control two motors at the same time the terminal function is selected as 55 i e Motor 1 and 2 switching terminal function and the terminal function is enabled the acceleration deceleration time 1 and 2 refer to those of motor 1 and the acceleration deceleration time 3 and 4 refer to those of motor 2 At this time the acceleration deceleration terminal 1 switches two groups of acceleration deceleration time acceleration deceleration time 1 and 2 for motor 1 and the acceleration deceleration terminal 2 switches two groups of acceleration deceleration time acceleration deceleration time 3 and 4 for motor 2 12 Main set frequency pulse input valid only for X7 or X8 It is only valid for the input terminals X7 or X8 It is used together with P02 04 4 to serve as the reference of the main frequency The relation between
33. After sales service 1 If there are specific requirements for drive installation and trial operation or the working status of the drive is unsatisfactory such as unsatisfactory performance and function please contact your product agent or Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd 2 In case of any abnormality please timely contact your product provider or Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd for help 3 During the warranty period our company will repair any product abnormality incurred due to product manufacturing or design free of charge 4 If the product is out of the warranty period our company will make paid repair according to user s requirement 5 The service charge is calculated by actual costs If there is an agreement the agreement shall prevail Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd Address 5th Floor Block B Unisplendor Information Harbor Langshan Rd Science amp Technology Park Nanshan District Shenzhen 518057 China Tel 86 755 86600500 Fax 86 755 86600562 Website www megmeet drivetech com 294 Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd Drive Warranty Bill Customer company Detailed address Postal Code Contact Tel Fax Machine model Power Machine No Contract No Purchase date Service unit Contact Tel Maintenance personnel Tel Maintenance date Comment on service Good
34. BIT1 Al2 V BIT2 Al3 V BIT3 Terminal status Fig 6 75 Setting of LED display parameter selection when stop This parameter defines the parameters that LED can display when the drive is in stop state When 0 is selected for the BIT bit it indicates that the parameter is not displayed When 1 is selected for the BIT bit it indicates that the parameter is displayed Note When the rotating speed or the line speed is displayed it can be directly changed by pressing or V key no need to switch into the frequency state When 0 is selected for all the P16 02 BIT bits the set frequency will be displayed by default In the stop parameter display state the parameters for display can be switched in turn by pressing the shift key P16 03 Line speed coefficient 0 1 999 9 1 0 This function code is used for correcting the line speed proportion display error and it has no influence on the actual rotating speed P16 04 Rotating speed display coefficient 0 1 999 9 100 0 This function code is used for correcting the rotating speed proportion display error and it has no influence on the actual rotating speed P16 05 Close loop display coefficient 0 1 999 9 100 0 219 This function code is used for correcting the display error between the actual physical parameters voltage flow etc and the reference or feedback parameter voltage current in the PID closed loop control and it has no influence
35. High speed sampling mode mode Group H03 Peeling function parameters H03 00 Peeling Peeling 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 0 122 mode mode Feeding A wheel Feeding 0 PG expansion card wheel P H03 01 speed 1 X8 terminal 1 0 y api speed input B NPH selection 2 Digital set selection Feeding Feeding H03 02 wise wheel 0 0 300 00m min stun 30 00 V speed speed digital in digital set set Peeli Peeli H03 03 Pema eeng 0 60000mm 1mm 1000 J length length Measuring Measuring H03 04 wheel wheel 0 00 650 00mm 0 01mm 0 00 V diameter diameter Peeling Peeling H03 05 wheel wheel 0 00 650 00mm 0 01mm 0 00 V diameter diameter Peeling Peeling heel heel H03 06 Moa whee 0 000 60 000 0 001 5 000 J transmissi transmissio on ratio n ratio Synchrono Synch H03 07 usarea ynenrone 0 0 90 0 0 1 15 0 J s area angle angle Peeling wheel gt Peeling accelerati wheel oe lerati H03 08 decelerati 2 S 4N0 120 0 240 0 J deceleratio A 80 0 itchi switching n ie is point angle point angle Peeling Peeling H03 09 knife knife 0 0 360 0 E V azimuth azimuth i i Peeling Peeling H03 10 length length 0 00 0 99mm 01 00 V trimming trimming i H03 11 Reserved Reserved 0 30000 1 0 y Feeding Feedin 0 01m m H03 12 linear A 9 0 0 300 00m min 0 0 V linear speed in speed Peeling i Peelin 0 01m m H03 13 linear l 9 0 0 300 00m min 0 0 y linear speed in
36. Others Installation method Wall mounted Protection degree IP20 Cooling mode Air cooling with fan control Indoor away from direct sunlight free from dust corrosive gas Operating site y ae aie combustible gas oil mist water vapor water dripping or salt Used at the place lower than 1000m derated at the place Altitude f above 1000m derated 1 for every increase of 100m i 10 C 40 C derated when used in the ambient temperature Environment Ambient temperature p of 40 C 50 C Humidity 5 95 RH non condensing Vibration less than 5 9m s 0 6g Storage temperature 40 C 70 C 1 5 Drive structure 1 Mid enclosure 2 Main control board 3 Upper cover 4 Operation panel 5 Main circuit wiring terminal 6 Lower cover 7 Fanguard 8 Fan 9 Mounting holes for complete unit 10 Bottom enclosure 11 Dustproof plate 12 Nameplate 13 Connector 14 Bottom plate 15 Mid enclosure 16 Control terminal 17 Wiring plate Fig 1 1 Drive structure taking R4 as an example 1 6 Outline mounting dimensions and gross weight of drive There are three types of outlines as shown in Fig 1 2 Fig 1 3 and Fig 1 4 The outline mounting dimensions and gross weight are as shown in Table 1 3 1 Enclosure R2 R4 0 75kW 15 kW 10 Fig 1 2 Outline mounting dimensions for products of 0 75kW 15kW 2 Enclosure R5 R8 18 5kW 110kW Fig 1 3 Outline mounting dimensions
37. P01 37 Counter value of expansion PG1 0 65535 0 The encoder current input pulse number of the expansion PG1 P01 38 Corresponding 0 0 position of PG1 U pulse 0 65535 0 When the expansion PG is selected as the UVW increment this function code displays the initial angle for installing the encoder When it is selected as resolver it displays the initial location of the rotation encoder The value 65535 corresponds to 360 P01 39 Corresponding position of PG1 Z pulse 0 65535 0 Corresponding position of local PG1 Z pulse The value 65535 corresponds to 360 P01 40 Counter value of expansion PG2 0 65535 0 The current encoder input pulse number of the expansion PG2 P01 41 Corresponding position of PG2 Z pulse 0 65535 0 132 Corresponding position of local PG2 Z pulse The value 65535 corresponds to 360 P01 42 Pulse frequency of terminal X7 0 0 100 00kHz 0 0 Indicating the input pulse frequency of terminalX7 P01 43 065536 0 Internal position reference positioning or spindle positioning the reference point corresponding position encoder count P01 44 High level of position reference 0 65536 0 Position control high level of position reference P01 45 Low level of position reference 0 65536 0 Position control low level of position reference P01 46 High level of position feedback 0 65536 0 Position control high level of motor position feedback P01 47 Low level of position feedback 0 655
38. This function is only valid for X8 terminal when H00 01 select terminal pulse reference and pulse form is PLUS SIGN by entering the pulse of this terminal position command reference can be determined 81 Position deviation counter reset The terminal can be set to pulse mode or level mode effective by function code H00 07 When position deviation counter reset signal is active position reference of the position loop is set to the position feedback value 82 Command pulse inhibit Pulse train positioning if the command pulse inhibit terminal is valid pulse input is inhibited position reference remains unchanged if the terminal is invalid pulse as the position reference for normal input 83 Position loop gain switching terminal Position control position loop gain HO0 08 H00 09 switch enabled terminals 84 Position reference point input terminal valid only for X6 X7 X8 Set digital positioning or spindle positioning reference origin 85 Spindle positioning back to zero terminal Spindle positioning back to zero terminal or internal digital set back to zero positioning terminals 86 Spindle indexing terminal 1 87 Spindle indexing terminal 2 88 Spindle indexing terminal 3 Indexing angle when indexing terminal select spindle indexing a total of seven combinations respectively corresponding to indexing angle set by H01 10 H01 23 set Indexing terminals 1 2 3 must be changed simultaneously the delay between each edge is
39. feeding for peeling wheel debugging H03 03 Peeling length 0 60000mm 1000mm H03 04 Measuring wheel diameter 0 00 650 00mm 0mm H03 05 Peeling wheel diameter 0 00 650 00mm 0mm H03 06 Peeling wheel transmission ratio 0 000 60 000 5 000 238 Peeling system basic parameters setting Peeling wheel diameter refers to the distance from blade relevant points to center as the radius the diameter of the circumference obtained by rotating a circle which belongs to the mechanical parameters Peeling wheel acceleration and deceleration switching point range i Peeling wheel diameter Synchronous area angle Cutter Fig 6 83 Peeling set parameters description H03 07 Synchronous area angle 0 0 90 0 15 0 Peeling point as the center within a certain range before and after it known as the synchronization area In the synchronization area cutter speed and feeding speed must be kept fully synchronized the angle the synchronous area corresponded to is synchronous area angle In the process of peeling when cutting long board the point for speed from deceleration to acceleration When cutting short board the point for speed from acceleration to deceleration The angle peeling wheel acceleration deceleration switching point relative to cut point Peeling wheel acceleration deceleration switching point Deceleration area 7 RAS R j Peeling wheel acceleration Acceleration area y g A deceleration switching point Decel
40. motor is rotated to a certain position and then low speed rotation if the current is relatively small and running smoothly indicating that the encoder settings are correct the tuning is successful if reported Er PG1 during the tuning process indicating that the encoder wiring has problems please reconnect encoder the function code P03 26 P03 27 save encoder installation initial angle of the synchronous machine after tuning is successful re tuning if the difference between the two initial angle is less than 5 degrees FFFF represents 360 degrees indicating that tuning is normal 6 If tuning is not normal determining whether the encoder signal has problems if there is a problem please re check the encoder wiring If the incremental encoder when the motor shaft is rotated if the count value of P01 33 is incremented magnetic pole signal state should be 5 1 3 2 6 4 displayed in the P01 33 if the count value is reduced the magnetic pole signal in reverse order If there is 0 or7 shows that magnetic pole signal UVW of the encoder wiring is incorrect If the resolver encoder firstly make sure the number of encoder pole pairs set the number of encoder pole pairs correctly in P04 17 while ensuring the ratio of the motor poles and the number of encoder pole pairs is integer View P04 18 interference degree of resolver if this value have been changed above 200 check the encoder wiring 7 Set the frequency range from 0 to the rated
41. n time on time P11 01 0 1 Unit adopts P11 05 anaes eer 0 0 3600 0 that of 6 00 n time on time P11 01 0 1 Unit adopts P11 06 ER eaa 0 0 3600 0 that of 6 00 n time on time P11 01 0 1 Unit adopts Deceleratio Decelerati P11 07 time 4 time 4 0 0 3600 0 that of 6 00 n time on time P11 01 0 1 S curve Accelerati P11 08 f 10 00 600 00 Hz s 0 01 25 00 acceleration on F acl Fast acceleration A acceleratio 5 P11 09 at start 0 20 600 00Hz s 0 01 12 50 n at start segment of s ament S curve g Fast X Fast acceleration Acceleratio P11 10 at end 0 20 600 00Hz s 0 01 20 00 n at end segment of SEn S curve g S Decelerati P11 11 aa eceerall 40 00 600 00Hz s 0 01 25 00 deceleration on Fast Fast deceleration dacelerati P11 12 at start 0 20 600 00Hz s 0 01 20 00 nat start segment of sader S curve g 97 Fast Fast deceleration deceleratio P11 13 at end 0 20 600 00 Hz s 0 01 12 50 y n at end segment of seaman S curve Switching Switching frequency frequency of of P11 14 acceleration acceleratio 0 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 V n deceleration deceleratio time 1 and 2 n Switching Switching hysteresis hysteresis loop loop frequency frequency P11 15 of of 0 00 655 35Hz 0 01Hz 1 00 y acceleration acceleratio n deceleration deceleratio time 1 and 2 n Jo Jog 3 lei p11 16 acceleration n 0 1 60 0s 0 18
42. otherwise the drive may be damaged 261 9 3 Replacing wearing parts The wearing parts of the drive include cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor whose service life depends on the operating environment and maintenance status The common service life is listed in the table below Table 9 2 Component life Part name Service Life Fan 30 000 40 000 hours Electrolytic capacitor 40 000 50 000 hours Relay About 100 000 times Users can determine the replacement time according to the running time 1 Cooling fan Possible damage causes wear of the bearing aging of the vanes Judgment standard whether there is crack on the blade and whether there is any abnormal vibration or noise 2 Electrolytic capacitor Possible damage causes high ambient temperature increased pulsating current caused by rapid changing load electrolyte aging Judgment standard whether there is liquid leakage whether the safety valve has protruded measure the static capacitance measure the insulating resistance 3 Relay Possible damage caused erosion frequent actions Judgment standard whether it can be opened and closed properly 9 4 Storage of servo drive Note the following for the temporary and long term storage of the drive 1 The drive should be stored in the places away from high temperature dampness dust and metal powder There should be good ventilation there 2 Long term storage will degrade the electro
43. output frequency when the drive output voltage reaches the maximum value under the A F mode Output 4 voltage Vmax Fig 6 9 Diagram for the definition of limit frequency parameters B Note 1 The maximum output frequency upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency shall be set carefully according to the parameters on the nameplate of the controlled motor and the demands of the operation conditions 2 The limit range of the upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency is disabled for the JOG operation and automatic auto tuning of the motor 3 Besides the limit range of the upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency the output frequency of the drive in running is also limited by the setting values of other parameters such as the start frequency starting frequency for stop DC braking skip frequency etc 4 The relationship among the maximum output frequency upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency is as shown in the above Fig 6 9 Please pay attention to the size and order in setting 5 The upper lower limit frequency is used to limit the value of the actual output frequency to the motor If the set frequency is higher than the upper limit frequency it will run with the upper limit frequency if the set frequency is lower than the lower limit frequency it will run with the lower limit frequency if the set frequency is lower than the start frequency it will run with zero frequency 6 4 Moto
44. speed i i 0 01m H03 14 Peeling Peeling 9 0 300 00m min Me 0 0 V maximum maximum in 123 linear linear speed speed H03 15 Pesing Peeling 060000 1 times times H03 16 Reserved Reserved 0000 FFFF 1 H03 17 Pegg Peeling 300 00 300 00mm 0 01mm error error 124 Chapter6 Parameter Description The parameter format is as follows 6 1 System management parameters Group POO P0000 20 0 Quick menu mode Only the parameters related to the quick running of the drive will be displayed To start the drive quickly change the parameters under this menu mode 1 Full menu mode Display all the parameters excluding the hidden function codes associated to the function code 2 Verification menu mode Only the parameters that are different from the leave factory values will be displayed except for P00 03 The password setting function is used to prohibit the unauthorized person from viewing and modifying the function parameters To set the password If you need this function input a four digit number as the user password and then press ENTER DATA to confirm After the confirmation you need to re enter this function code to input the same value and press ENTER DATA to confirm within 10s When P SEt is displayed the password is successfully set If there is no other key operation within 5 minutes or re power after power down the password will become
45. the control character is valid The bit definition of expansion analog output ExAO setting 0x6410 is as follows reserved Bit Value Function Remarks BIT11 BITO Expansion analog output ExAO setting value 00 ExA0O1 01 ExAO2 Expansion analog output BIT13 BIT12 10 ExAO3 channel selection 11 ExA04 BIT15 BIT14 0 Reserved The bit definition of the control word 2 is as shown in the following table The overall word 2 is valid only when its BITO is valid Bit Value Function Remarks The control character 2 of the host device is 1 k The select bit for the validity of the valid BITO control character 2 of the host The control character 2 of the host device is A 0 device disabled Bita 1 Drive running disabled The select bit for enabling disabling 0 Enable the drive running the drive running 4 Running the direction depends on the function code BIT2 A Other status of running see control character 1 BIT15 BIT3 0 Reserved Note 2 Status parameters Register Parameter name Remarks address 0x6500 Status word 1 of drive 0x6501 Actual running value of current main reference Current running frequency 0x6502 Slave model 0x6503 Drive series number 275 Register Parameter name Remarks address 0x6504 Software version
46. the surge absorption circuit shall be installed such as the RC absorption circuit whose leakage current shall be less than the holding current of the controlled contactor or relay piezoresistor or fly wheel diode used in DC electromagnetic circuit and correct polarity shall be ensured during the installation The components of the absorption circuit shall be installed near the two ends of the windings of the relay or contactor Note 1 Do not short circuit the P24 terminal and COM terminal otherwise the control board may be damaged 2 Please use the multi core shielded cable or twist cable cross section area above 4mm to connect the control terminals 3 When using the shielded cable the near end of the shielded layer the end near the drive shall be connected to the grounding terminal PE of the drive 4 The control cables shall be kept away from the main circuit and strong current lines including power cable motor cable relay cable contactor connecting cable etc for at least 20cm and they shall not be laid in parallel pattern It is suggested to adopt vertical wiring to avoid the drive mis operation caused by interference 5 For the non 24V relay appropriate resistor shall be selected according to the relay parameters and connected in series to the relay circuit 6 The digital output terminal cannot withstand the voltage higher than 30V Notes on encoder wiring The encoder PG signal cable should be kept
47. 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 05 filtering filtering time time Binary setting Input 4 Input 0 Normal logical enabled upon terminal terminal connection P09 15 enabled 1 00 enabled 1 Inverted logical enabled upon status status disconnection setting Unit place of LED 88 BITO BIT3 X1 X4 Tens place of LED BITO BIT3 X5 X8 Binary setting 0 Disabled as Virtual input 1 Enabled Pr terminal Unit place of LED 00 P09 16 terminal settin setting g BITO BIT3 X1 X4 Tens place of LED BITO BIT3 X5 X8 Output Output selection of selection of 0 Open collector output terminal Multi funct P09 17 A Multi functio Y1 0 ional output nal output 1 DO terminal output terminal YA terminal Y1 Open 0 Drive in running state signal llect RUN DOVA Y1 function P09 18 Eeit selection 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR 0 se 2 Speed non zero detection signal Open 3 Frequency level detection collector i Y2 function signal FDT1 P09 19 output i A s selection 4 Frequency level detection ae signal FDT2 5 Overload detection signal OL Relay R1 6 Lockout for under voltage LU output R1 function P09 20 X 7 External fault stop EXT 15 function selection selection 8 Frequency upper limit FHL 9 Frequency lower limit FLL 10 Drive running at zero speed 11 Simple PLC stage running completion indication 12 PLC cycle completion indication 13 Reserved
48. 01 needs to be set according to the nameplate by the user When the tens place of P02 00 is 1 i e motor 1 is selected as the synchronous motor the meanings of the above motor parameters are as below the definition of the stator resistance of motor 1 P03 06 is the same as that of the asynchronous motor the leakage inductance or the direct axis inductance of motor 1 P03 07 indicates the direct axis inductance of the synchronous motor the rotator resistance or back EMF constant of motor 1 P03 08 indicates the back EMF constant of the synchronous motor at this time it displays an integer indicating the back EMF voltage for 1000 turns For example P03 08 1000 indicates that the back EMF at 1000 turns of rated rotating speed of the motor is 1000V the mutual inductance or the q axis inductance of motor 1 P03 09 indicates the q axis inductance value the meanings of other parameters are the same as that of the asynchronous motor P03 11 Overload protection coefficient of motor 1 20 0 110 0 100 0 To provide effective overload protection for motors of different models it is necessary to adjust the allowable maximum output current of the drive as shown in Fig 6 11 200 4 gt Overload protection coefficient of motor 1 min Time Fig 6 11 Overload protection coefficient setting of motor The adjustment value can be set according to your need In the same conditions if you want to realize quick protection upo
49. 1 32767 1comma 1 121 close close signal nd unit signal width width H01 44 Position Position 0 32767 error error 1comma 1 detection detection nd unit range range H01 45 Position Position 0 Valid error error alarm 4 Invalid 1 0 alarm H01 46 Origin Origin signal 0 Been looking for signal loss loss action 1 Report failure Er ORG after 1 1 action looking for twice Group H02 Spindle tapping parameters H02 00 Tapping Tapping o 1 1 0 enable enable H02 01 Accelerati Acceleration 0 00 300 00s 0 01s 2 00 on time time H02 02 Decelerati Deceleratio 0 00 300 00s 0 01s 2 00 on time n time H02 03 ASR1 P ASR1 P 0 1 200 0 0 1 20 0 H02 04 ASR1 I ASR1 0 000 10 000s 0 001s 0 200s H02 05 ASR1 ASR1 0 8 corresponds to 0 1 0 output output filter 28 10ms filter H02 06 ASR2 P ASR2 P 0 1 200 0 0 1 20 0 H02 07 ASR2 I ASR2 0 000 10 000S 0 001s 0 200s H02 08 ASR2 ASR2 0 8 corresponds to 0 1 0 output output filter 28 10ms filter H02 09 ASR1 2 ASR1 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 10 0 switching switching frequency frequency H02 10 Tapping Tapping 0 0 100 0 of maximum 0 1 100 0 maximum maximum frequency frequency frequency H02 11 Reaming Reaming 0 0 100 0 of maximum 0 1 100 0 maximum maximum frequency frequency frequency H02 12 Analog Analog filter 0 000 10 000s 0 001s 0 010 filter H02 13 Analog Analog 0 Normal sampling 1 0 sampling sampling 1
50. 15 The deceleration time means the time needed for the drive to decelerate from the maximum output frequency P02 15 to OHZ B Note 1 The time unit min s 0 1s of the acceleration deceleration time 1 4 can be selected through P11 01 and the default leave factory unit is second 2 For the drive of 5 5 22kW the leave factory value for its acceleration deceleration time is 6 0s for the drive of 30 45kW it is 20 0s and for other modes of drives it is 30 0s 3 When it is used independently in case of no switch of motor 1 the first acceleration deceleration time is determined by P02 13 acceleration time and P02 14 deceleration time When it is used independently in case of no switch of motor 2 the first acceleration deceleration time is determined by P11 04 acceleration time and P11 05 deceleration time max 50 P02 16 3000 00 50 00 P02 17 P02 15 50 00 P02 15 Maximum output frequency P02 16 Upper limit frequency P02 17 Lower limit frequency 0 00 P02 16 0 00 The maximum output frequency is the allowable maximum output frequency of the drive as Fmax shown in Fig 6 9 The upper limit frequency is the allowable maximum output running frequency set by the user as FH shown in Fig 6 9 141 The frequency of lower limit is the allowable minimum running frequency set by the user as FL shown in Fig 6 9 F in Fig 6 9 is the basic running frequency which is defined as the minimum value of corresponding
51. 35 Percentage A 100 a P09 11 Pulse Frequency Fig 6 35 No central point mode The values corresponding to the pulse input frequency are all positive 1 Central point mode 1 184 Percentage A 100 P09 11 0 P09 11 Pul r gt Pulse frequency 100 2 22 22 2 2 2 58 Fig 6 36 Central point mode 1 The pulse input has a central point The frequency at the central point is half of the maximum pulse input frequency P09 11 When the input pulse frequency is lower than the central point frequency the corresponding values are positive 2 Central point mode 2 The pulse input has a central point The frequency at the central point is half of the maximum pulse input frequency P09 11 When the input pulse frequency is higher than the central point frequency the corresponding values are positive PENO 100 p a i 0 P09 11 09 11 5 Pulse frequency 100 Fig 6 37 Central point mode 2 Tens place X8 central point selection Refer to the settings of the unit place X7 central point selection P09 14 Input pulse filtering time 0 00 10 00s 0 05s When the terminal X7 X8 is used as the high speed pulse input terminal this function code defines the filtering time of the input pulse The longer the filtering time is the slower the reference pulse frequency change rate will be P09 15 Input terminal valid status setting 00 FFH 00 185 Tens Unit
52. 4 1 7 1 E format ASCII 5 1 7 1 O format ASCII Hundreds place of LED wiring mode 0 Direct cabling 232 485 1 MODEM 232 Local Local P15 02 0 247 0 is the broadcast address 1 5 address address Communic ation Communica P15 03 timeout tion timeout 0 0 1000 0s 0 1 0 0s detection time time Response Response P15 04 delay of delay of the 0 1000ms 1 5ms the drive drive Reserved Reserved P15 05 function 1 function 1 0 65535 1 0 for user for user Reserved Reserved P15 06 function 2 function 2 0 65535 1 0 for user for user Group P16 Keyboard display setting parameters Binary setting 0 No display 1 Display Unit place of LED BITO Output frequency Hz BIT1 Preset frequency Hz flashing BIT2 Output current A Tens place of LED ED BITO Runni tati d display i D unning rotating spee P16 00 parameter Running min selection 1 display 1 BIT1 Preset rotating speed 1 007H when r min flashing running BIT2 Running line speed m s BIT3 Preset line speed m s flashing Hundreds place of LED BITO Output power BIT1 Output toque Note the default display shall be output frequency when all the parameters are 0 105 P16 01 LED display parameter selection 2 when running Running display 2 Binary setting 0 No display 1 Display Unit place of LED BITO Output voltage V BIT1 Al1 V BIT2 Al2 V BIT3 AI3 V Ten
53. 50Hz The curves are applicable to general use such as the straight line motion for 2 60Hz Constant torque faire moving devices They can be used 60Hz voltage saturation 50Hz where the load torque is unchanged no 4 Reserved matter how the rotating speed is 5 50Hz decrease progressively based on cube 6 50Hz decrease progressively These curves can be used for the loads where the torque is proportional to the based on square Degressive square or cube of the rotating speed U 60Hz decrease progressively torque feature such as the fan pump etc based on cube 8 60Hz decrease progressively based on square 9 50Hz medium startup torque The V F curves for the high startup 10 50Hz large startup torque l torque can be used under the following High startup conditions the cables of the drive and A GOR ee medium st rtup t rque torque the motor are very long more than 12 60Hz large startup torque 150m large torque is needed upon startup such as lifter AC reactor is 165 connected to the output of the drive 13 Reserved 14 Reserved ils Reserved 16 Reserved 17 50Hz decrease progressively based on square These curves can be used for the loads where the torque is proportional to the 18 50Hz decrease progressively Degressive nth power of the rotating speed such as based on the power of 1 7 torque feature the fan pump etc 19 50Hz decrease progressively based on the power of 1 2
54. 50Hz is 1 25s t PICOS 0 624s therefore the entire increasing time t is 3 874s r P11 10 parameter increase parameter decrease P11 08 Fig 6 59 Schematic diagram description of adjusting the S curve P11 14 Switching frequency of Acc Dec timel and 2 0 00 3000 00Hz 0 00 Hz A Frequency P11 14 a Time Fig 6 60 Schematic diagram for switching between acceleration deceleration time 1 and 2 As shown in Fig 6 60 for accelerating the motor 1 operate at the acceleration time 1 as the A curve shown in Fig 6 60 and the acceleration time t ieee When the output frequency increases to the switching point P11 14 the acceleration time will switch from P02 13 to P11 02 as the B _ f P1114 x P11 02 P02 15 operate at the deceleration time 2 as the C curve shown in the figure and _ f P11 14 P11 15 x P02 14 P02 15 curve shown in Fig 6 60 and the acceleration time t For deceleration tz until the output frequency decreases to a frequency 205 P11 14 P11 15 lower than P11 14 the deceleration time will switch to the deceleration time 1 from 2 switching value as the D curve shown in the figure and ty _ PLL 14 P1115 x P11 03 P02 15 l P11 16 Jog acceleration deceleration time 0 1 60 0s 6 0s PULIT 0 0 100 0s 0 08 P11 18 Jog running frequency 0 10 50 00 Hz 5 00 Hz Frequency 4 tin a 2 l Time Jog command Jog
55. 56 Frequency fmax lt gt Time t1 t2 Fig 6 56 Linear acceleration deceleration 1 S curve acceleration deceleration The output frequency is decreased or increased according to the S curve as shown in Fig 6 57 202 Time Fig 6 57 S curve acceleration deceleration The speed setting value is in the S curve status at the beginning of the acceleration and when it reaches the desired speed and at the beginning of the deceleration and when it reaches the desired speed Thus the acceleration and deceleration can be smooth and there is less impact The S curve acceleration deceleration mode is applicable to the start and stop of carrier of transportation and transmission such as the elevator conveyor etc 0 0 1s 1 s 2 min This function is used for defining the time unit for all the acceleration deceleration operations except for the jog operation P11 02 P11 03 P11 04 P11 05 P11 06 P11 07 Acceleration time 2 0 0 3600 0 6 0 0 0 3600 0 6 0 0 0 3600 0 6 0 0 0 3600 0 6 0 0 0 3600 0 6 0 0 0 3600 0 6 0 Deceleration time 2 Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3 Acceleration time 4 Deceleration time 4 The acceleration time means the time needed for the drive to accelerate from OHz to the maximum output frequency P02 15 as t4 shown in Fig 6 56 The deceleration time means the time needed for the drive to decelerate from the maximum output frequency P02 15 to OHZ as t
56. 6 When the running LED on the operation panel is off it indicates that the auto tuning is finished m Note 1 When P03 24 is set as 2 if over voltage or over current occurs during the auto tuning properly increase the acceleration deceleration time P02 13 and P02 14 for motor 2 please change P11 04 and P11 05 for tuning 2 When P03 24 is set as 2 for rotation setting disconnect the motor shaft from the loads It is prohibited to carry out rotation setting when the motor is connected to loads 3 Before the auto tuning the motor shall be in static status otherwise the auto tuning cannot be normally conducted 4 In certain situations for instance the motor cannot be disconnected from the loads where it is inconvenient to conduct rotation setting or the users does not have high motor control performance requirement static setting can be selected or the setting can be exempted If the setting is not performed be sure to enter the correct nameplate parameters of the motor 5 If you know the correct motor parameters please enter the correct motor parameters P03 00 P03 10 or P03 12 P03 22 6 If the auto tuning fails Er TUN error will be reported Auto tuning steps of the synchronous motor 1 Set correct function code parameters P03 00 P03 04 for motor 1 for motor 2 they are P03 12 P03 16 2 Properly set P02 16 upper limit frequency The value of P02 16 shall not be set lower than the rated frequency 3
57. 6 67 the drive will hold the running frequency and direction of the last section automatically after completing a single cycle 212 d4 a3 t2 f4 4 22 Aa f5 a i PLC running 1 a ei b TSS T e Teei Ter Toa Ts Ta Tend RUNcommand Fig 6 67 Retention mode of PLC after single cycle 2 Continuous cycle As shown in Fig 6 68 the drive will start next cycle automatically after completing one cycle and it will not stop until a stopping command is given f5 f5 f4 fi The first cycle i e The second cycle RUN command Fig 6 68 PLC continuous cycle mode Tens place The restart mode selection for interrupted PLC running 0 Restart from the first section If it is stopped caused by stopping command fault or power down during operation it will operate from the first section after restarting 1 Continue to run from the stage frequency of the stop fault moment If it is stopped caused by a stopping command or fault during operation the drive will automatically record the running time of the current stage and enter this stage after restarting and it will complete the remaining running time at the set frequency of this stage as shown in Fig 6 69 213 Stopping signal Output freq Hz fi f 1 da a fs f2 ay a2 i Time Stage 4 Operating i Remnant time of time of stage 2 stage 2 a1 Acc time of stage 1 a2 Acc time of stage 2 43 A
58. 71 Setting of PLC stage Unit place of LED setting of the PLC i stage 0 Select the multi stage frequency i For example when i 3 the frequency of stage 3 is the multi stage frequency 3 For the definition of the multi stage frequency please refer to P13 00 P13 46 1 Digital reference 1 Keyboard A V reference 2 Digital reference 2 Terminal UP DN reference 3 Serial port communication reference 4 Al analog reference The function code P10 01 shall be set for Al analog reference 1 or 9 shall be set for this terminal function according to input analog signal Their directions are all determined by LED s tens place setting of PLC current stage 5 Terminal PULSE reference The frequency setting is confirmed by the terminal pulse frequency and it can be input only by X7 and X8 for details please refer to definition in the function code of Group P09 6 Process closed loop PID 216 CJ Note When the stage running direction of PLC is determined by running command the running direction of motor can be changed from external direction command in real time For example the forward and reverse running can be realized via X terminal The running direction is the direction determined by the running command if the direction is uncertain then follow the direction of last section 6 15 Communication parameters Group P15 P15 00 0 10 0 Modbus protocol 1 Reserved Hundreds Tens Unit Baud rate
59. AS le cees S tec NEE A E E ES tees laceveabiuvaseees 14 Chapter 2 Drive Installatioh ssc ieniniiii eai da aoin 15 2 1 Removal and installation of drive components cceecceesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeesseeeeeeaeeesetseeeeseeeesaee 15 2 2 Installation environMeNt siccissssegecesvevsccueescsussescenerevseensazevazsceucescachieeraad cused eases usadantaadcusadedhcatrevetanseacegte 16 2 3 Mounting direction ANd SACO cece cence teste cence eeeeeeeseneeeseeaeeseaeeeseaeeesesaeesseaeeeseseetneeeteneeeesnaee 16 Chapter 3 Wiring of Servo Drive eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeneeeene 18 3 1 Wiring and configuration of main circuit terminals cceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeeseneseneeeneeseneseneeates 19 3 2 Wiring and configuration of Control CiPCUit eeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseneeeaeeeaeesneseeeeeneeeaneeneenees 27 3 3 Expansion card interface CONNECTION ccccceceseeeceneeeeeeeeeceeaeeeceseeeceaeeeeceaeesesaeeeseeueeeesaeesseaeeesaeess 42 Chapter 4 Quick Operation Guide for Servo Drive cee eesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenneeeene 46 4 1 Servo drive operation panel ccccccccssccsssccsescsssessseessccscceseccesaccstesseeeedanacesstaassscssenestetecedeeeseesteseeee 46 4 2 Servo drive runing MOE eeceeeesceesceceeeeeeescecececeneeeaeesaneceaeseaeesaeeseneseaeceaeeseeeseaeeeeeesaneeaeeeeeseetaee 55 AF COMMISSIONING sesparta aAa EE AAE A EE nan
60. Chapter 7 Spindle Servo Applications 7 1 Spindle servo classification 7 1 1 Whole pulse control Pulse reference is given by the X2 terminals of expansion PG card When the pulse signal is used for speed control the function code P02 04 main frequency reference source is set to 9 you need to properly set the pulse reference number of pulses per revolution P04 07 pulses per revolution of expansion card PG2 and HO00 01 pulse command input type If rigid tapping pulse position control the X4 terminal function P09 03 is set to 89 H00 00 is set to 1 speed position control switching when X4 terminal is closed the spindle enter pulse reference position control mode When rigid tapping spindle speed corresponding to the calculated value of the numerator of electronic gear ratio HO0 04 and denominator of electronic gear ratio HO0 05 Increase the proportional gain 1 of position control H00 08 proportional gain 2 of position control HO0 09 can make the position response faster but too fast will cause position control overshoot appropriately increase position command filter time HO0 02 and position command acceleration and deceleration time constant HO0 03 can suppress overshoot 241 CNC system Power supply 4 axis plug Forward Speed position h DUTxx a switch spindle accurate o 1 O relay board stop i Drive ready Quasi stop in place
61. Disabled 1 Enabled BIT12 Basic menu 0 Disabled 16 bit 32 bit 1 32 bit BIT13 parameter 0 16 bit BIT15 BIT14 Reserved 7 Change multiple function code parameters and status parameters of the drive and the parameter values will be saved after power off The command code 0x43 is used to change multiple function code parameters or control parameters of the drive and store the values into the nonvolatile memory cell Its command format is the same as that of 0x10 The only difference is as follows the parameter value changed under the 0x10 command will not be saved upon power off but the parameter value changed under the 0x43 command will be saved upon power off 6 Control parameters and status parameters of servo drive The control parameters of the drive can realize the start stop running frequency setting and other functions of the drive Inquiring the status parameters of the drive can get the parameters like the running frequency output current and output torque of the drive etc 1 Control parameters The control parameters of the drive are as shown in the following table Register Save upon Parameter name Remarks address power off 0x6400 Control word 1 No Refer to its bit definition list Main reference frequency the main reference channel uses serial communication and whether 0x6401 Main reference No it can be saved is dependent on the setting of P02 06 0x6402 Running frequency refere
62. Ea a 263 5 Protocol fUNCtONS sosina E E A E ee EA 265 6 Control parameters and status parameters of servo drive cccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeaees 272 T Expand ACCESS MOT a epee eee ae ee ee ee een ce 279 8 Cautions 9 CRC verification OV Application CxaMmple werv ccececssssceave cevsceqespeceuesseanassdid equuse coun E EE EEEE A EEEE EE 288 11 Scaling of servo drive parameters ccescceeceeeeeseeeeeneeeeeceeeceneseneeeaeeceneseaeeseneseneseneeeaeesereseeseaeeeneees 290 Appendix 2 Braking Components eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeseneeeeesnaeeeeneaaes 291 Appendix 3 Warranty and Service eeescecceeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeneaas 294 Parameter record table iic s ccasciseccisecsacezetenuscigeceqaecgactescissetssasqssnesscesasesautssaaqessaistenaviepsce eta rises raaraa saaa 296 Chapter 1 Introduction of SV Master Servo Drive 1 1 Product model The description of the drive model on the nameplate indicates the information of the product such as product series voltage class of power supply power class the software hardware code of customized product etc SVM 4 T 0 75 0 75kW 400kW Product Series Rated output power S Single phase T Three phase 2 220V 4 380V 1 2 Product nameplate MEGMEET MODEL svm 4T5 5 POWER 5 5kw INPUT AC3PH 380 480V 50 60Hz 14 5A OUTPUT AC 3PH 0 480V 0 3000Hz 13 0A
63. Fas 0 00 P07 12 0 01Hz 0 00Hz V frequency frequency 1 d Motor 2 Motor 2 V F P07 15 VIF 0 P07 13 0 1 0 0 y voltage 1 voltage 1 Motor 2 Motor 2 P07 16 torque torque 0 0 30 0 0 1 0 0 y increase increase Motor 2 torque Motor 2 t 0 0 50 0 corresponds to P07 17 increase Ne si GorTSsp 0 1 10 0 V increase P03 15 cut off i cut off point point Mot ror Motor stable P07 18 stable 0 255 1 10 y factor factor 0 Disabled P07 19 DR NR 1 Always enabled 1 2 J function function 2 Disabled only in deceleration situation Drooping Drooping P07 20 control control 0 30 00Hz 0 01 0 00 y value value 82 Group P08 Start and stop control parameters 0 Start from the startup frequency 1 Start from the startup frequency P08 00 Start i artup Stark mede after braking 1 0 mode 2 Start after speed tracking including the judgment of direction Startup Startup P08 01 s A 0 00 30 00s 0 01s 0 00s delay time delay time Start ATSP Startup P08 02 dwell 0 00 60 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz frequency frequency Startup Startup frequency frequency P08 03 7 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 00s retention retention time ime Start Be Startup DC 6 0 100 0 of the rated P08 04 braking mie TY 0 1 0 0 braking current of the drive current current Startup DC Startup DC 0 00 Disabled P08 05 F Ai 0 01s 0 00s braking braking time 0 01 30 00s time 0 Decelerate to stop
64. For details please for the multi functional input output Multi functional refer to the introduction to the terminals X8 input terminal functions of input terminals Input resistance RE2kQ 8 P09 00 P09 07 in 6 10 Digital input output parameters Group P09 common terminal PLC Maximum input frequendy 100kHz Input voltage range 20V 30V 29 Type Terminal Name Function Specification It can be set as the digital output terminal with multiple functions and also can be reused as DO pulse output Opto isolated output Open collector terminal which is selected by Maximum operating voltage 30V output terminal the function code P09 17 For Maximum output current 50mA 1 DO pulse details please refer to the The DO pulse output frequency range output terminal introduction to the functions of depends on P09 30 and the maximum P09 18 or P09 29 in 6 10 value is 50kHz Multi functional Digital input output output terminal parameters Group P09 common terminal COM It can be set as the digital output terminal with multiple functions For details please Opto isolated output Open collector refer to the introduction to the Maximum operating voltage 30V Y2 output terminal functions of P09 19 in 6 10 Maximum output current 50mA s Digital input output parameters Group P09 common terminal COM 24V power To provide 24V power for Power supply P24 Maximum output
65. Minimum ine Minimum P10 20 reference 0 0 P10 18 0 1 0 0 reference 1 of curve 1 Actual value Actual value ee corresponds P10 21 ds to the The same as P10 15 0 1 0 0 ae to minimum minimum reference 1 reference of curve 1 Unit place of LED AO1 selection 0 0 10V 0 20mA 1 2 10V 4 20mA The current and voltage depend Types of Types of on the hardware P10 22 analog analog 1 00 Tens place of LED AO2 selection output output 0 0 10V 0 20mA 1 2 10V 4 20mA The current and voltage depend on the hardware 0 Output frequency 0 maximum frequency 1 Set frequency 0 maximum frequency 2 Set frequency after acceleration deceleration 0 maximum frequency 3 Motor rotating speed 0 maximum rotating speed 4 Output current 0 2 1 Analog 5 Output current 0 2 lem output AO1 P10 23 terminal ee 6 Output torque 0 3 Tem 1 00 AO1 Vngnons 7 Output torque current 0 3 lem functions 8 Output voltage 0 1 2 Ve 9 Bus voltage 0 800V 10 Al1 after adjustment 11 Al2 after adjustment 12 Al3 after adjustment 13 Output power 0 2 Pe 14 Percentage of host device 0 4095 15 Torque limit value 1 10V 300 95 16 Torque limit value 2 10V 300 17 Torque offset 10V 300 18 Torque command 10V 300 19 Flux command 10V 100 20 Reserved position deviation 10V 2048 command pulse 21 Output torque 300 0 300 0 22 Output torque c
66. Number of po4 14 Pulses Per j Pulses per 4 9999 1 1024 V revolution revolution of of X7 X8 X7 X8 Quadratur 5 Quadrature di 0 X7 before X8 P04 12 encoding STE 1 0 y ars direction of 1 X8 before X7 direction X7 X8 of X7 X8 eee d Unit place High speed filtering of Filtering PG signal X7 X8 0 9 P04 13 coefficient filtering er 1 30 V of X7 X8 coefficient 2 Tens place Low speed filtering of X7 X8 0 9 Frequency Frequency P04 14 division division 0 4096 1 1 V coefficient coefficient Encoder PG1 ire ire 0 0 Disabled P04 15 wire break Wire break 0 1 0 0 y detection detection 0 1 10 0s time ime Encoder 7 Wire break 0 Coast to stop Er PG1 wire break P04 16 action of 1 Switch to SVC running 1 0 N protection PG1 reserved action Resolver Resolver P04 17 encoder encoder 0 64 1 1 y pole pairs pole pairs Resolver Resolver signal P04 18 S signal 0 1000 1 0 V disturbanc disturbance e Group P05 Speed control parameters Speed loop Speed loop low speed low speed P05 00 y 0 1 200 0 0 1 20 0 V proportion proportional al gain gain ASR1 P P05 01 Speed Speedloop 9 000 10 000S 0 001s 0 200s J loop low speed 75 low speed integral time integral time ASR1 D ASR1 ASR1 P05 02 output f 0 8 corresponds to 0 2 8 8ms 1 0 output filter filter Pits pen P05 03 9 switching 0 0 50 0 0 1 10 0 frequency 4 frequency 1 Speed loo
67. P08 06 Stop mode Stop mode 1 Coast to stop 1 0 2 Decelerate to stop DC braking Stop Stop P08 07 frequency frequency 0 00 150 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 50Hz detection detection Stop Stop frequency frequency P08 08 detection detection 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 00s retention retention time time Stop 0 Speed set value the only one Stop speed speed i detection mode under the V F P08 09 detection 1 detection mode mode mode 1 Speed detection value St op Stop P08 10 dwell 0 00 150 00Hz 0 01Hz 02 00Hz frequency frequency Stop St dwell OP frequency P08 11 frequency 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 00s f retention retention i i time time 83 Initial Initial frequency frequenc P08 12 for stop quency 0 00 60 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz for stop DC 3 braking braking Waiting FES time for Waiting time P08 13 for stop 0 00 10 00s 0 01s 0 00s step DG brakin braking 9 Stop DC Stop DC 0 0 100 09 f th ited P08 14 braking braking k ee nG pale 0 1 0 0 current of the drive current current Stop DC A Stop DC 0 0 Disabled P08 15 braking ae 0 01s 0 00s i braking time 0 01 30 00s time Selecting restart Restart function ep 0 Disabled P08 16 upon power 1 0 upon 1 Enabled fault power fault Waiting time for tart Restart P08 17 pies prince 0 0 3600 0s 0 18 0 0s upon waiting time power fault 0 Reverse operation is allowed Anititover Anti reverse io
68. Spindle Servo Applications 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeceenaeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeseenaeeeeneneees TA Spindle servo Classification sa csccseccesscesevssucaaccoscceessssaleacviezeyssescuuyscusendedcedeseeaiesvieshesdcusedeieeuctsvacetenaeus 241 7 2 The spindle accurate SO n A a a a a a a aeaa Aa aa 247 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 3 cise exiveceseeessceenssoeeeeeat tenani aeeie aan reiia Laena 248 8 1 Displaying exception and SOIUtIONS ieee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeenaeesseeeeseeneeeseneeeseaee 248 8 2 Operation exception and solutions cccccecececeseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeceseeeseaeeeeceeesscaeeessneeesseeesaees 257 Chapter 9 Maintenance wis su cccsscecivecccsseyescctea vi ccepcapeneted ve cesseces cada opii eani 260 9 1 D ily maintenance enin ann e A a nat tected as teeta E neta aa areca 1 260 9 2 Periodical MaintenanCe sic civecen vecesvcespudeoes eaaa aE E EAN EA AE EEE E EAE AC EAA 261 9 3 Replacing Wearing Palis ienei a a aea a aaa a a a A aaa paaa 262 9 4 Storage of Servo driVE csipni iaaa eea Aae A Enae A ENa Aa AAA EEEE EER 262 Appendix 1 Modbus Communication Protocol ssssssessieeriresrissrriissrriresrinrserresrrenns 263 T Networking Modera snr aaa aaraa aaa aa e aaa a E aE a a a aaa 263 2x Interface Moderniaren rieni iE esn rien e inre ahe dairi nag aae EE E LEE EA OERO t Eia 263 3 Communication MOUS ineas e E E E E Ea E a AARRE 263 4 Protocol formatines enyana ai aE aeai E e AiK ae eth Ea EE
69. Terminal UP 1 functions 15 Frequency decrease command DN 16 External fault normally open input 17 External fault normally closed input 18 External interrupt normally open contact input 19 External interrupt normally closed contact input 20 Reference frequency source switching command 21 Reserved 22 External reset RESET input 23 Coast to stop input FRS 24 Acceleration deceleration disable command 25 Stop DC braking input command 26 Simple PLC pause command 27 Reserved 28 Clearing the PLC stop memory 89 85 90 60 57 72 22 85 29 33 Reserved 34 Main reference frequency source selection 1 35 Main reference frequency source selection 2 36 Main reference frequency source selection 3 37 Switching main reference frequency to Al 38 Command source selection 1 39 Command source selection 2 40 Switching command to terminal 41 FWD disabled 42 REV disabled 43 Drive running disabled 44 External stop command it is valid for all the control modes the device will be stopped in accordance with the current stop mode 45 Auxiliary reference frequency reset 46 Pre magnetizing command terminal Reserved 47 Speed control and torque control switching terminal 48 Torque direction switching erminal for torque control 49 Torque offset selection erminal 50 Al torque offset retention 51 Pulse input terminal of the
70. The over torque under torque signal output can be monitored with the digital terminal Yi or relay 6 8 VF control parameters Group P07 P07 00 Motor 1 V F curve setting 0 19 0 P07 03 P03 03 0 00Hz P07 04 100 0 0 0 P07 01 Motor 1 V F frequency 3 P07 02 Motor 1V F voltage 3 P07 03 Motor 1 V F frequency 2 P07 05 P07 01 0 00Hz P07 04 Motor 1V F voltage 2 P07 06 P07 02 0 00Hz P07 05 Motor 1 V F frequency 1 0 00 P07 03 0 00Hz P07 06 Motor 1V F voltage 1 0 P07 04 0 0 P07 00 P07 06 are used to determine different V F curves of motor 1 under different V F control modes 164 Output voltage V _A 2 times line 1 1 7 times __1 2 times gt Output voltage 100 v3 v2 vi Output frequency Hz Fig 6 25 V F curve F1 F2 F3 Fb Output frequency Hz Fig 6 26 Multi stage V F curve P07 00 0 Customized curve applicable to sectional constant torque load situation refer to Fig 6 25 In Fig 6 26 F1 lt F2 lt F3 lt Fb Fb represents the basic running frequency generally it is the rated frequency of the motor V1sV2 lt V3 lt 100 V1 V2 and V3 represent the percentage of the maximum output voltage The 19 pre set V F curves are as shown in the following table which are enabled only under the V F control mode Table 6 4 V F curve types Set value Specification Features Use 1
71. When forming indexing command by combining the terminal the action delay difference between the terminals can not exceed 100ms otherwise it may cause the wrong choice of indexing angle Indexing angle is incremental when each indexing command is valid it will accumulate corresponding indexing angle the current angle of the spindle can be viewed by the function code H01 49 the angle is the current angle of the spindle relative to zero Before executing indexing command you must firstly make indexing terminals 1 2 3 invalid and then output the corresponding indexing command If execute indexing commands 5 you must first make sure the indexing terminals is 0 indexing terminals are invalid and then make indexing 1 3 terminals valid 234 Table 6 22 Indexing terminal description Indexing Positioning speed Indexing Indexing Internal multi point positioning position terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 source selection Low level of internal position1 reference Positioning speed H01 35 OFF OFF ON HO1 11 Low level of internal position2 reference Positioning speed H01 35 OFF ON OFF H01 13 Low level of internal position3 reference Positioning speed H01 35 OFF ON ON H01 15 Low level of internal position4 reference Positioning speed H01 35 ON OFF OFF HO1 17 Low level of internal position5 reference Positioning speed H01 35 ON OFF ON HO1 19 Low level of in
72. When the drive is in the running or stop status its current set frequency can be set by setting the functions of the external control terminal When this setting mode is selected the following parameters shall be set beforehand 1 Define the function of two external control terminals as 14 and 15 respectively among parameters P09 00 P09 07 2 With the function code P09 09 set the value change rate when setting the frequency with the UP DOWN terminal When the digital reference mode 2 is selected the wiring diagram is as shown in Fig 6 7 _ UP lt switch lt UP _ DOWN ye switch f DOWN SVM COM Fig 6 7 Wiring diagram for the mode of digital reference 2 If the terminal is closed validly the relationship between the status setting combination of two external switches and current set frequency of the drive is as shown in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Status of external switches and current set frequency of the drive Terminal UP on off status Off On Terminal DOWN on off status Off On Off On Current set frequency of the drive Maintain Decrease Increase Maintain 2 Digital reference 3 serial port communication reference Change the set frequency via the serial port frequency setting command 3 Al analog reference The analog reference has 3 independent physical channels Al1 Al2 and Al3 Al is the analog signal input channel When Al is the voltage signal input its voltage input ra
73. X7 X8 filtering coefficient It is used to set the filtering times of the feedback speed At the low speed if there is any current vibration noise you can increase the low speed filtering times Otherwise the low speed filtering times shall be decreased to improve the system response features P04 14 Frequency division coefficient 0 4096 1 Expansion encoder parameters Expansion means that when the encoder PG2 is used for the output it can be used together with the pulse input signal of the external equipment to perform the frequency division output for the output pulse of the drive If the division coefficient is set as 1 there is no frequency division if the division coefficient is set as 2 divide the division coefficient with the number of input pulses and the final value will be the output value and so on It is used to define the PG wire break detection time If P04 15 0 it indicates that the PG wire break will not be detected and the Er PG1 will be shielded 0 Coast to stop Er PG1 Under the vector control with PG or V F control with PG if the PG wire is broken the drive will report fault and Er PG1 will be displayed At the same time the drive will stop output and the motor will coast to stop 1 Switch to SVC running Switch to the open loop running mode P04 17 Resolver encoder pole pairs 0 64 1 For control permanent magnet synchronous motors pole pairs of the motor must be an integer multiple of the n
74. Y2 R1 R2 Relay R1 RAY R1 output P09 23 output 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1 delay delay Frequenc a x Frequency arrival arrival P09 24 FAR 0 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 2 50Hz detection detection idth width 90 PRIM FDT 1 leve P09 25 level Ba P09 24 P02 16 0 01Hz 50 00Hz Nae upper limit upper limit Drs FDT 1 leve P09 26 level lower oii 0 00 P09 23 0 01Hz 49 00Hz ast lower limit limi pene FDT 2 leve P09 27 level ae P09 26 P09 24 0 01Hz 25 00Hz tae upper limit upper limit RDI FDT 2 leve P09 28 level lower ep 0 00 P02 16 0 01Hz 24 00Hz A lower limit limi 0 No function 1 Output frequency 2 Set frequency 0 Maximum output frequency 3 Output current lei 0 2 lei 4 Output current lem 0 2 lem 5 Output torque 0 3 Tem 6 Output torque current 0 3 ltem 7 Motor rotating speed 0 Maximum output frequency 8 Output voltage 0 1 5 Ve 9 Al1 10 10V 4 20mA DO BE 10 Al2 10 10V 4 20mA P09 29 terminal Digital 1 0 i output 11 AI3 10 10V output 12 Output power 0 2 Pe 13 Electric torque limit value 0 3Tem 14 Braking torque limit value 0 3T em 15 Torque offset 0 3T em 16 Torque reference 0 3T em 17 Percentage of host device 0 65535 18 Reserved 19 Percentage of communication card Only the following function No will be shown in shortcut menu 0 8 Maximum tput Maxi P09 30 EU aximum 0 1 50 0 Maximum 50 0k
75. alarm status Red QUCIK LED BASIC LED Menu mode QUICK On Off Menu mode LED Quick menu Off On Basic menu BASIC Off Off Verification menu Green Green The running status LED is above the RUN key and the running command channel LED is above the Multi functional key M key Their indication meanings are as shown in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Status LED description LED Display status The indicated status of the drive Off Stop status Running status LED On Running status On Operation panel control status Running command channel Off Terminal control status LED Flash Serial port control status 4 1 1 2 Introduction to operation panel keys Table 4 3 Operation panel function table Key Name Function MENU ESC Program exit key To enter or exit the programming state ENTER DATA Function data key To enter the lower level menu or confirm data A Increase key To increase the data or function code V Decrease key To decrease the data or function code To select the bit for change in the data in editing state or switch the gt Shift key display of status parameters in other state yp Multi functional key Please refer to Table 4 4 for the useage of the Multi functional key RUN Run key When pressing this key in the operation panel mode the drive will 47 Key Name Function start to run STOP RESET Stop reset key
76. analog voltage current is selected in the function code P10 22 The terminal wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 9 Unit place of P10 22 AO1 select Analog meter 0 0 10V or 0 20mA AO1 lt EN 1 2 10V or 4 20mA SVM AO2 Tens place of P10 22 AO2 select 0 0 10V or 0 20mA GND lt 1 2 10V or 4 20mA Fig 3 9 Analog output terminal wiring 32 m Note 1 When using analog input filter capacitor or common mode inductor can be installed between the input signal and GND 2 The voltage of the analog input signal shall not exceed 12V 3 The analog input output signal is vulnerable to external interference Shielded cable shall be used and reliably grounded and the wiring length shall be as short as possible 4 The analog output terminal can withstand the voltage no more than 12V Communication interface wiring SVM servo drive provides the RS485 serial communication interface for the users A control system of single host single slave or single host multiple slaves can be created through the following wiring methods With the host device PC or PLC software real time monitoring remote control auto control and more complicated running control e g infinite multi stage PLC running can be realized on the drive within the network 1 Connection of the drive and the host device with RS485 interface oy a pe qr a ae a i l l SVM
77. and DC respectively and then the limiting current resistor used for protecting the rectifier inside drive will be valid when powering on 21 3 1 2 Connecting drive and options o RL1 S L2 T L3 N Isolation switch Circuit breaker or fuse l I AC input reactor Contactor J Input EMI filter by ae RL1 S L2 TR os 3 DC reactor PIBN SVM N Braking unit D O g PEU W Ae 4 K Braking resistor El WO Output EMI filter db l l l AC output z reactor as M j Z Se A Fig 3 2 Connection of servo drive and options 7 7 1 Isolation device e g isolation switch must be installed between the AC supply and the drive to ensure the personal safety during the equipment maintenance 22 2 In North America the delay type fuse the current rated value of which should be 225 of the maximum full load output current value should be used before the drive to isolate the faults caused by other equipments For the selection of the fuse please refer to Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Recommended fuse capacity and cross section area of the copper cored insulation wire Incoming line Main circuit Control circuit 2 2 Model protection mm mm Fuse A EE ou teut ir ee wire wire 0 75KW 5 1 1 1 1 5KW 10 15 1 5 1 2
78. away from the cables of main circuits and power cables and parallel cabling with narrow clearance shall not be adopted for such cables The PG cable shall adopt shielded cable and the shielding layer shall be connected to the PE terminal at the location close to the drive side 1 When the PG output signal is open collector signal the wiring with the interface board terminal is as shown in Fig 3 23 the broken line section in the figure is the voltage type output encoder Shield cable SVM VCC VCC o 70 5C 3 3V 1 0 V A a l COM _ A he me A 3 DYN OV Q FA a E B Bt The same as A B VCC B A Shield single end re ov grounded near drive Fig 3 23 Schematic diagram for wiring of PG with open collector signal 39 2 When the PG output signal is push pull signal the wiring with the interface board terminal is as shown in Fig 3 24 VCC OV VCC ov VCC l OVo jl A Shield cable Shield single end grounded near drive 5C TCOM One A V B TB OPE SVM 3 3V The same as A Fig 3 24 Schematic diagram for wiring of PG with push pull signal 3 When the PG output signal is differential signal the wiring with the interface board terminal is as shown in Fig 3 25 VCC Shield cable Shield single end Y grounded near drive SVM 3 3V la B Fig 3 25 Schematic diagram for wiring of PG with differential signal
79. blocking Check whether the motor blocking re Input side phase There is phase loss in input Check the installation wiring rr loss R S T Check the input voltage Eoy Output side There is phase loss in output Check the output wiring r o phase loss U V W Check the motor and the cables There is interphase short circuit Ap Cee ROS Rewiring and check if the motor insulation is or grounding short circuit in d ood Er drv Powermoguie output three phases i protection Instantaneous over current of the drive See the over current solutions 249 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code The duct is blocked or the fan is Unblock the duct or replace the fan damaged The ambient temperature is too i Lower the ambient temperature high The wirings or the plug in units of a Check them and rewiring the control board loosens Abnormal current waveform caused by output phase loss and Check the wiring so on The auxiliary power supply is damaged the drive voltage is Seek for service support insufficient Inverter module bridging Seek for service support conduction Abnormal control board Seek for service support Braking pipe damaged Seek for service support The ambient temperature is too P high Lower the ambient temperature Inverter module an Er oH1 heatsink The duct is blocked Clean the duct over temperature The fan is damaged Rep
80. changed Different stop status parameters can be cyclically displayed by pressing the gt key defined by function code P16 02 2 Run parameter display status When the drive receives the valid running command it will enter the run state the operation panel will display the running status parameter and RUN LED on the panel will be on and ON OFF of the FWD and REV LEDs depend on the current running direction As shown in Fig 4 2b the lower unit LEDs display the parameter units When the gt key is pressed the running status parameters will be cyclically displayed The running status parameters that can be viewed are defined by the function codes P16 00 and P16 01 3 Alarm display status When the drive detects abnormal conditions during running but it can still continue to run it will enter the alarm display status The upper Alarm LED will be on and the corresponding alarm code will be displayed on the operation panel as shown in Fig 4 2c When the gt key is pressed the running status parameters and alarm code will be cyclically displayed When there are several alarms the operation panel will cyclically display each alarm code at preset intervals To continue running you can disable the fault alarm and stop by setting the protection action P97 00 and P97 01 The alarm will disappear during running and the system enters the normal running parameter display status If the alarm still exists before stop the corresponding fault code w
81. damage may be caused Do not short circuit terminal P B1 and terminal DC otherwise fire and property damage may be caused Cable lugs must be firmly connected to the terminals of main circuit otherwise property damage may be caused Do not connect AC 220V input to the control terminals other than terminal TA TB TC BRA and BRC otherwise property damage may be caused Contents SV Master Series Servo Drive cccccccececsecceceeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeesecaaaeeeeeeeseecnaeeeeeeeseseenaeeeeeeees 1 Chapter 1 Introduction of SV Master Servo Drive ee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeneaas 7 TEA SPFOMUCE MOE REEE EEE TT EE EE acts AAT TE AE ATTA 7 1 2 Product nameplate 1 3 Prod Ct Series aee aaran ea AE a OaE aE R A SA deadianblaateaneitaancesiare 1 4 Technical specifications of product ceccececeeecceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeseeeeseeeeseseeeseaeeeseeeeenseessseeeees 8 1 5 Dive Structure i ietie cedss cues asseceesiiescieiaeiidareieaak Wasabi EEEO HEPES RAA SASE SEEN ER ete Eea Eaha Edats 10 1 6 Outline mounting dimensions and gross weight Of Arive eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeereeneeeneeeeee 10 1 7 Outline and mounting dimensions of operation Panel eccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeenreee 12 1 8 Outline and mounting dimensions of operation panel DOX ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeneeeeaeenee 12 TQ OPLlONS ive vans cde A E DEE AEE AEE E E EE
82. editing status 4 1 3 1 Operation of password To protect the parameters the drive has the password protection function After setting the user password only when you have entered the correct user password you can enter the function code editing status after pressing the MENU ESC key To enter the manufacturer set parameter zone correct manufacturer password shall be input aa Note It is recommended the user not change the manufacturer set parameters Improper parameter setting will cause abnormal operation or even damage of the drive Function code P00 01 can be used to set the user password 51 Assuming that the valid user password is 1368 the drive is locked at this time and no operation can be performed You can unlock the drive by entering the user password through the following steps 1 Press the MENU ESC key in the drive locked status and then the LED will enter the password verification status 0000 2 Change 00000 to 1368 3 Press the ENTER DATA key to confirm and pass the password verification and then the LED displays the P00 02 The above operation steps are shown in the Fig 4 3 MENU P in ENTER mm mom i a ena gt ise eau Fig 4 3 Operation example for unlocking user password You can conduct various operations on the drive after passing the password verification oO Note If there is no key pressing operation in 5 minutes after the correct user password is enter
83. frequency the set frequency is 0 5 Sqrt main set frequency Sqrt auxiliary set frequency Select the sum of the square root of the individual absolute value of the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency as the set frequency When the polarity of the auxiliary set frequency is opposite to that of the main set frequency the auxiliary frequency will be reset and the set frequency will be the square root of the main set frequency 6 Sqrt main set frequency auxiliary set frequency Select the square root of the absolute value of the sum of the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency as the set frequency When the polarity of the sum of the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency is opposite to that of the main set frequency the set frequency will be reset 7 Switching between main and auxiliary reference frequency source When any function code of terminals P09 00 P09 07 is selected as 20 the reference frequency source can be switched between the main reference frequency source and auxiliary reference frequency source via the terminal change 8 Switching between main reference frequency source and main auxiliary reference frequency source When any function code of terminals P09 00 P09 07 is selected as 20 the reference frequency source can be switched between the main reference frequency source and main auxiliary reference frequency source via the terminal change 9 Switching between au
84. is no need to set this parameter in most of running occasions For the relationship between the step response and PI parameters of the speed regulator ASR please refer to Fig 6 21 P05 13 P05 14 Electric torque limit channel 0 3 0 0 3 0 Braking torque limit channel Set the physical channel for the positive and negative torque limits 0 The torque limit value is set by the digit P05 15 and P05 16 are the positive torque limit value and negative torque limit value respectively 1 The torque limit value is the Al reference value The maximum value of Al input voltage current 10V 20mA can correspond to 300 of rated torque command When using this function the user needs to define the function of the Al terminal as the positive torque limit value Taking Al1 as an example set the function code P05 13 to be 1 first then set the unit place of P10 01 to be 6 2 The torque limit value is the terminal PULSE reference value The maximum value of the terminal PULSE input frequency 100k can correspond to 300 of the rated torque command Please refer to the description in Group P10 for the correspondence between the pulse input and output The pulse input terminal of the torque limit value is only valid for X7 and X8 To define the function of terminal X8 as the torque limit pulse the user needs to set the function P09 07 or P09 06 51 or 52 3 Process closed loop output The process closed loop output is used as the torq
85. means multi stage closed loop reference The multi stage closed loop reference selection in Table 6 8 can be realized by selecting the ON OFF combination of the multi stage closed loop terminals 1 4 Table 6 8 Expression of multi stage closed loop reference selection Multi stag Multi stag Multi stag Multi stag eclosed eclosed eclosed eclosed Multi stage closed loop loop loop loop loop reference selection terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 The closed loop reference is OFF OFF OFF OFF determined by P14 02 Multi stage closed loop OFF OFF OFF ON reference 1 Multi stage closed loop OFF OFF ON OFF reference 2 Multi stage closed loop OFF OFF ON ON reference 3 Multi stage closed loop OFF ON OFF OFF reference 4 Multi stage closed loop OFF ON OFF ON reference 5 Multi stage closed loop OFF ON ON OFF reference 6 Multi stage closed loop OFF ON ON ON reference 7 Multi stage closed loop ON OFF OFF OFF reference 8 Multi stage closed loop ON OFF OFF ON reference 9 Multi stage closed loop ON OFF ON OFF reference 10 Multi stage closed loop ON OFF ON ON reference 11 Multi stage closed loop ON ON OFF OFF reference 12 Multi stage closed loop ON ON OFF ON reference 13 Multi stage closed loop ON ON ON OFF reference 14 Multi stage closed loop ON ON ON ON reference 15 175 10 Acceleration deceleration time terminal 1
86. oHL This value can be set properly only when customers know the temperature change resistance value regularity of the motor temperature detection P97 07 Over voltage stall selection 0 1 1 P97 08 Over voltage point at stall 120 0 150 0 140 0 P97 07 0 means the over voltage stall action is disabled P97 07 1 means the over voltage stall action is enabled During the deceleration operation of the drive due to the load inertia the actual dropping rate of the motor rotating speed may be lower than the dropping rate of the output frequency At this time the motor will feed back the power supply to the drive causing the DC bus voltage of the drive to increase If no protection measure is taken for this the drive will trip because of over voltage The over voltage stall protection function can detect the bus voltage during the drive deceleration operation and compare it with the stall over voltage point defined by P97 08 relative to the standard bus voltage If it exceeds the stall over voltage point the drive output frequency will stop falling The deceleration operation will not be resumed until the bus voltage is detected to be lower than the stall over voltage point again as shown in Fig 6 81 Overvoltage point at stall Time Output frequency Time Fig 6 81 Over voltage stall function P97 09 Auto current limiting action selection 0 1 1 P97 10 Auto current limiting level 20 0 200 0 150 0 P97 11 Frequency re
87. of the drive Generally it can only be two classes lower or one class higher than that of the drive Otherwise the control performance cannot be P03 18 Mutual inductance or q axis inductance of motor 2 0 1 999 9 A depending on model Stator resistance of motor 2 P03 19 P03 20 P03 21 o N oO a P03 22 No load current Ip of motor 2 When the thousands place of P02 00 is 0 i e motor 1 is selected as the asynchronous motor the meanings of the above motor parameters are shown in Fig 6 12 R JXu R IXa op _ gt L L U EX R i x Fig 6 12 Equivalent circuit diagram for asynchronous motor in steady state The Ri X11 R2 X21 Xm loin Fig 6 12 respectively indicate the stator resistance stator leakage inductive reactance rotator resistance rotator leakage inductive reactance mutual inductive reactance and no load current Function code P03 07 is the sum of leakage inductive reactance of the stator and rotator If the parameters of the asynchronous motor are known please write the actual values into P03 18 P03 22 P03 22 is the no load current of asynchronous motor You can directly enter the no load current value If the motor parameter auto tuning is conducted the set values of PO03 18 P03 22 will be refreshed after the normal completion of the auto tuning 145 After changing the power of the asynchronous motor P03 12 the drive will set the param
88. position PG2 Z pul P01 41 of n PUSe 0 65535 1 0 i position expansion PG2 Z pulse Pulse Pulse P01 42 frequency of frequency of 0 0 100 0KHz 0 1 0 0 terminal X7 terminal X7 P01 43 Position Position 0 65535 1 reference reference 0 point point P01 44 High level of High level o 0 65535 1 position position 0 reference reference P01 45 Low level of Low level o 0 65535 1 position position 0 reference reference P01 46 High level of High level o 0 65535 1 position position 0 feedback feedback P01 47 Low level of Low level o 0 65535 1 position position 0 feedback feedback P01 48 Position Position error 9999 9999 1 0 error pulse pulse P01 49 Current Current 0 359 99 0 01 0 angle angle Group P02 Basic parameters P02 00 Motor and Motor and Unit place Control mode 0000 67 control mode selection control mode selection selection of motor 1 0 Vector control without PG 1 Vector control with PG 2 VIF control without PG 3 V F control with PG Tens place Type selection of motor 1 0 Asynchronous motor 1 Synchronous motor Hundreds place Control mode selection of motor 2 0 Vector control without PG 1 Vector control with PG 2 V F control without PG 3 V F control with PG Thousands place type selection of motor 2 0 Asynchronous motor 1 Synchronous motor P02 01 Motor selection Motor selection 0 Motor 1 1 Motor 2 P02 02 Running command
89. refer to the function description in Group P13 16 P13 46 for directions 27 Reserved 28 Clearing the PLC stop memory If the drive stops under the PLC running mode when this function terminal is enabled the PLC running stage running time and running frequency information stored in the PLC upon the drive stop will be cleared For details please refer to the function description in Group P13 16 P13 46 29 PID Closed loop disabled When this function is enabled the PID output will be disabled and the PID is forced by the drive to output with zero frequency 30 PID closed loop soft start disabled When the input terminal is closed it is used to disable P14 03 PID command acceleration deceleration time When the input terminal is open it will perform the ON OFF command of the acceleration deceleration time set by P14 03 PID command acceleration deceleration time For details please refer to the PID control block diagram 31 PID integral retention 177 When the input terminal is closed the integral value of PID control will be maintained forcedly When the input terminal is open the PID control will restart the integral For details please refer to the PID control block diagram 32 PID integral clearing The integral value of PID control will be reset to be 0 and kept when the input terminal is closed For details please refer to the PID control block diagram 33 Switching PID adjustment features It
90. selected be sure to disconnect the motor shaft from the loads It is prohibited to carry out setting when the motor is connected to loads and in such case the installation angle of the encoder will be automatically measured additionally and the measured value will be written into P03 26 and P03 08 for motor 2 it will be written into P03 20 The set value of P03 24 will be automatically configured as 0 when the auto tuning is finished 3 Calculating based on the nameplate parameters only enabled for asynchronous motor This function is only enabled for the asynchronous motor The drive will automatically calculate corresponding motor parameters based on the nameplate parameters of the motor set by the user and write into P03 06 P03 07 P03 08 P03 09 and P03 10 Auto tuning steps of the asynchronous motor 1 Set the P07 07 torque increase of motor 1 or P07 16 torque increase of motor 2 as 0 147 2 Properly set the function code parameters of PO3 00 P03 04 for motor 1 for motor 2 input parameters of P03 12 P03 16 3 Properly set P02 16 upper limit frequency The set value of P02 16 shall not be lower than the rated frequency 4 When P03 24 is set as 2 disconnect the motor shaft from the loads and check its safety status carefully It is prohibited to carry out rotation setting when the motor is connected to loads 5 Set P03 24 as 1 or 2 press the ENTER DATA key and the RUN key and then the auto tuning will be started
91. selection control 3 Servo Control Unit place Pulse type 0 A B phase pulse 1 PLUS SIGN pulse 2 CW CCW pulse Tens place Filter width reserved 0 3 Hundreds place Logical form Puke Pulse Input 0 Positive logic H00 01 input type P SAI 1 0000H setting type setting 1 Negative logic Thousands place Pulse input source 0 Terminals X7 X8 input 1 Local differential AB input 2 Expansion card RARB input 3 Internal position setting 4 Bus or PLC card reference 114 Position Position H00 02 command command 0 0 3000 0ms 0 1 0 filter time filter time Position Position command command H00 03 accelerati acceleration 0 0 50 0ms 0 1 0 on deceler deceleratio ation time n time constant constant Electronic Electronic HO00 04 gear gear 1 65535 1 1024 molecular molecular Electronic Electronic gear HO00 05 gear 1 65535 1 1024 denominat j denominator or H00 06 Reserved Reserved 1 65535 1 1024 Unit place Pulse clear mode 0 Clear position pulse command and feedback pulse error Pulse 1 Reserved Pulse clear H00 07 clear 2 Reserved 1 00 mode mode Tens place Position deviation reset signal selection 0 Pulse mode 1 Level mode Position Position H00 08 control control 0 8000 1 100 proportion proportional al gain 1 gain 1 Position Position H00 09 gontrol contro 0 8000 1 400 proportion proportional al gain 2 gain 2 Position Position 0 Do not sw
92. set as 1 For example if the signals are output from the terminal Y1 only the place of BITO will be set as 1 therefore the value displayed by P01 19 is 1 The value displayed by P01 19 will be 8 when the signal is output from the relay R2 only P01 20 P01 21 P01 22 AIl input voltage AI2 input voltage AI3 input voltage 10 00 10 00V 0 00V 10 00 10 00V 0 00V 10 00 10 00V 0 00V P01 20 P01 22 are used to display the analog input signal before the adjustment B J Note When the current input is selected for the analog input the Al input range is 4 to 20mA and the corresponding Q n ack D lt gt R D a N i o P01 23 P01 24 AO1 output AO2 output 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 P01 23 and P01 24 are used to display the percentage of the analog output relative to the full range For example the function of AO1 is set as output frequency If the maximum frequency is 100Hz and actual running frequency is 50Hz P01 23 will displays 50 PO1 25 P01 26 P01 27 Process closed loop reference Process closed loop feedback Process closed loop error wo 100 0 100 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 P01 28 Process closed loop output 100 0 100 0 0 0 P01 25 P01 28 are used to display the percentage of the process closed loop reference feedback error and output in Group P14 relative to the full range P01 29 Estimated temperature of
93. support this operation The upper lower limit value read here is that may be reached by the corresponding function code parameter If the value range of the parameter is limited by other function code parameters i e having associated function code parameters it needs to combine the values of associated function code parameters Unless otherwise specified the length of data of the response frame is 2 bytes The length of the function code parameter feature is 2 bytes and its bit definition is as follows Bit Features Value Meaning 0 Decimal system limit BITO Upper limit 1 Hexadecimal system limit 000 No decimals 010 One decimal 010 Two decimals BIT3 BIT1 Decimal point 011 Three decimals 100 The step length is 2 101 The step length is other value Others Reserved 00 Actual parameter value unchangeable 01 Can be changed in the operation BIT5 BIT4 Change properties Cannot be changed in the operation or it is set 10 by the manufacturers cannot be changed by users 11 Reserved 000 No unit 001 The unit is Hz 010 The unit is A 011 The unit is V BIT8 BIT6 Display unit 100 The unit is r min 101 The unit is line speed m s 110 The unit is percentage Others Reserved 271 Bit Features Value Meaning BIT9 Reserved Restore to 1 Restore BIT10 leave factory 0 Do not restore value 1 Enabled BIT11 Quick menu 0
94. take the following measures to correct it 1 Provide separate power supply to the PLC or host device or isolate its power supply In case the external interference is severe to protect the PLC or host device from interference isolate the communication wire 2 If the RS485 RS232 converter is used provide separate power supply to the converter 3 Use magnetic ring on the communication wire 4 Ifthe field conditions permit reduce the drive carrier frequency amp Note 1 In the applications with large interference the RS485 converter with isolation shall be used 2 The RS485 cannot withstand the voltage higher than 30V Wiring for Multi functional input output terminals The Multi functional input output terminals of SVM include X1 X8 X1 X6 are two way opto isolated circuits X7 and X8 are single way opto isolated circuits as shown in the following figure PLC is the common terminal for X1 X8 For X1 X6 the current passing the PLC terminal may be the source current or sink current for X7 and X8 the current passing the PLC terminal can be the source current only The typical wiring methods are as below 1 Dry contact mode X1 X8 1 When using the internal 24V power supply of the drive the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 13 34 P24 24V Fy T PLC 6 i mixes 2 FAC K 3 3V a xx P E LK S com f Fig 3 13 The wiring mode when u
95. terminal No 72 function in reaming mode the maximum frequency corresponding to analog is determined by H02 11 245 Power supply s VOmodule PP72 48 Forward Reverse Spindle accurate stop Rigid tapping 10 Output ax spindle scram f j x Spindle swing Reaming Fault reset Drive ready Homing completed 10 Input Drive failure Frequency output e plug i Motor encoder feedback Fig 7 3 Whole analog control wiring diagram 246 7 2 The spindle accurate stop The origin of the spindle accurate stop can select Z pulse of the spindle motor electric spindle or spindle proximity switches non electric spindle If transmission ratio between the motor shaft and the spindle is 1 1 sampling the motor encoder Z pulse as home position switch When X2 spindle accurate stop terminal function is set to 85 as long as the input signal is closed the spindle perform accurate stop action and after accurate stop in place will output Y1 spindle positioning homing is completed Spindle homing angle can rotate spindle position to the desired quasi stop position when the spindle in the free state you need rotate more than two rotations until P01 49 value has changed then record P01 49 spindle current angle under this state the value is set in the function parameters H01 07 If transm
96. the input signal pulse frequency and the set frequency can be adjusted through the curve of Group P10 13 Auxiliary set frequency pulse input valid only for X7 or X8 It is only valid for the input terminals X7 or X8 It is used together with P02 04 4 to serve as the reference of the auxiliary frequency The relation between the input signal pulse frequency and the set frequency can be adjusted through the curve of Group P10 14 Frequency increase command UP 15 Frequency decrease command DN The remote control of the frequency increase or decrease is realized through control terminals rather than operation panel It is enabled when P02 04 1 common operation or P02 07 2 as auxiliary frequency The acceleration deceleration rate is set by P09 09 16 External equipment fault normally open input 17 External equipment fault normally closed input The fault signal of external equipments can be input through this terminal for monitoring fault of external equipments by the drive The drive will display Er EFT i e external equipment fault alarm upon receiving the fault signal of external equipments and such signals can adopt either the input mode of normally open or normally closed 18 External interrupt normally open contact input 19 External interrupt normally closed contact input 176 The drive will lock the output and run with zero frequency when receiving the external interrupt signal during running Once the extern
97. the relevant indication signal will be output as shown in Fig 6 40 190 A Output Preset E freq Time Fig 6 40 Schematic diagram for frequency arrival signal output FDT 1 level upper limit P09 26 P02 16 50 00 FDT 1 level lower limit 0 00 P09 25 49 00Hz FDT 2 level upper limit P09 28 P09 26 25 00 FDT 2 level lower limit 0 00 P02 17 24 00Hz P09 25 P09 26 are the complementary definitions of the No 3 function in P09 21 and P09 27 P09 28 are the complementary definitions of the No 4 function in P09 21 They have the same use method The P09 25 P09 26 P09 27 P09 28 following will take P09 25 P09 26 for example When the output frequency exceeds the set frequency P09 25 FDT1 level upper limit the relevant indication signal will be output until the output frequency is reduced to lower than certain frequency of the FDT1 level FDT1 level lower limit As shown in Fig 6 41 4 Output Frequency FDT1 upper limit FDT1 lower limit Time yA i Time Fig 6 41 Schematic diagram for frequency level detection P09 29 DO terminal output 0 19 0 Table 6 13 Function definition of the multi functional digital output Item Function Indication range 0 No function None 1 Output frequency 0 Maximum output frequency 2 Set frequency 0 Maximum output frequency 3 Output current lei 0 200 of the rated current of the drive 4 Output curren
98. the stop mode 1 Activate temperature protection upon inverter and rectifier and coast to stop 2 Temperature alarm upon inverter and rectifier and keep running 3 No action to rectifier activate temperature protection upon inverter and stop in the stop mode Action upon under voltage fault indication 0 No action 1 Action under voltage is regarded as a kind of fault Action upon auto reset interval fault indication 0 No action 1 Action Fault lockup function selection 0 Prohibited 1 Open without fault output 2 Open with fault output Fig 6 78 Fault protection and alarm property setting 3 In certain abnormal situations the drive can shield faults and stop actions and keep operating by setting P97 00 P97 01 and P97 02 The operation panel at that moment will display an alarm AL XXX XXX represents the alarm code For details please refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting P97 00 defines the protection action selections for abnormal communication abnormal contactor abnormal EEPROM and 24V 10V short circuit 221 Note If 1 is selected for 10V short circuit action When a 10V short circuit fault occurs and lasts the drive will automatically report Er 10v after the alarm operates for 15 minutes When a 24V short circuit fault occurs the drive will report Er 24v immediately and stop no matter what 0 or 1 is selected for the thousands place of P97 00 P9
99. to the description in Group P10 for the correspondence between the PULSE input and the torque The terminal PULSE selects the positive and negative value of the torque command based on the pulse reference central point The torque reference pulse is only valid for X7 and X8 The user needs to set the function of X7 and X8 as the torque reference pulse terminals and set the function code P09 06 or P09 07 53 3 The torque command is set by communication The current torque command of the drive is set by the host device with the standard RS485 communication port built in the drive For the detailed programming methods operation methods and communication protocols please refer to the MODBUS communication protocol 4 The torque command is set by the process closed loop output The process closed loop output is used as the torque command reference 5 Reserved P06 03 Digital reference of torque 300 0 300 0 0 0 The digital setting range of the torque command is 300 0 300 0 P06 04 Torque reference acceleration deceleration time 0 65535ms Oms It sets the torque acceleration deceleration time upon torque control This function code is disabled under the speed control mode The time the system takes to reach the reference torque from the current torque P06 05 Speed torque switching point 0 300 0 100 0 initial torque P06 06 Speed torque switching delay 0 1000 ms Oms Start the drive under the torque control mode and run
100. value corresponds to the inflection point 2 of the curve 1 Inflection point 1 of the curve 1 reference Actual value corresponds to the inflection point 1 of the curve 1 Minimum reference of curve 1 Actual value corresponding to the minimum reference of curve 1 Where the value range of P10 07 P10 09 P10 11 P10 13 P10 15 P10 17 P10 19 and P10 21 is as follows Take as the frequency reference its value range is 0 0 100 0 Fmax 0 0 300 0 Te for the torque and 0 0 100 0 Qe for the magnetic flux For example the demand analysis is as follows 1 Setting the set frequency with the pulse signal input by the terminal 2 Input signal 1kHz 20kHz 198 3 The 1kHz 8kHz 12kHz and 20kHz input signal shall correspond to the set frequency of 50Hz 10Hz 40Hz and 5Hz respectively Based on the above requirements the parameter settings are as below P02 04 4 adopting the terminal PULSE reference as the main frequency reference channel 1 P09 07 12 input the pulse signal from X8 terminal 2 P10 05 2000 select the curve 1 3 P09 11 20 0kHz set the maximum pulse input frequency as 20kHz 4 P10 14 20 20x100 100 0 set the percentage of the maximum reference of curve 1 20kHz elative to 20kHz P09 11 5 P10 15 5 00Hz P02 15 x100 set the corresponding set frequency percentage of the maximum eference 20kHz pulse signal 6 P10 16 12 20x100 60 0 set the percentage of the inflection point 2 of the curve 1
101. weaker the immunity will become 197 P10 05 Analog curve selection 0 2222H 0210H Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit 2 curve 1 Al2 curve selection O line 1 1 line 2 2 curve 1 Al3 curve selection O line 1 1 line 2 2 curve 1 Pulse curve selection O line 1 1 line 2 2 curve 1 Fig 6 51 Analog and pulse curve selection P10 05 is used for selecting the analog and pulse curve P10 06 Maximum reference of line 1 P10 08 100 0 100 0 P10 07 P10 08 P10 09 P10 10 P10 11 P10 12 P10 13 P10 14 P10 15 P10 16 P10 17 P10 18 P10 19 P10 20 P10 21 Actual value corresponding to the maximum reference of line 1 0 0 300 0 100 0 0 0 P10 06 0 0 0 0 300 0 0 0 P10 12 100 0 100 0 0 0 300 0 100 0 0 0 P10 10 0 0 0 0 300 0 0 0 P10 16 100 0 100 0 0 0 300 0 100 0 P10 18 P10 14 100 0 0 0 300 0 100 0 P10 20 P10 16 0 0 0 0 300 0 0 0 0 0 P10 18 0 0 0 0 300 0 0 0 Minimum reference of line 1 Actual value corresponding to the minimum reference of line 1 Maximum reference of line 2 Actual value corresponding to the maximum reference of line 2 Minimum reference of line 2 Actual value corresponding to the minimum reference of line 2 Maximum reference of curve Actual value corresponding to the maximum reference of curve 1 Inflection point 2 of the curve reference Actual
102. with P02 09 Please refer to Fig 6 5 for details P02 10 Calculation of reference frequency source 0 9 0 0 The sum of the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency is used as the set frequency When the positive and negative polarity of the combined frequency is opposite to that of the main set frequency the set frequency is 0 139 q s The value that the main set frequency minuses the auxiliary set frequency is used as the set frequency When the positive and negative polarity of the combined frequency is opposite to that of the main set frequency the set frequency is 0 2 r The product of the main frequency and the auxiliary frequency is used as the set frequency When the positive and negative polarity of the main set frequency is opposite to that of the auxiliary set frequency the set frequency is 0 3 MAX main set frequency and auxiliary set frequency Select the maximum absolute value between the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency as the set frequency When the positive and negative polarity of the auxiliary set frequency is opposite to that of the main set frequency the set frequency is the latter 4 MIN main set frequency auxiliary set frequency Select the minimum absolute value between the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency as the set frequency When the positive and negative polarity of the auxiliary set frequency is opposite to that of the main set
103. with a speed When the output torque reaches the torque switching point P06 05 after the speed torque switching delay time P06 06 is reached switches the drive back to the torque control mode to run If the terminals X1 X8 are used to switch the torque and speed control modes P06 05 is disabled P06 06 is the delay time for the switching between the torque and speed control modes an Note 1 If you need to switch the torque and speed control modes with the terminals X1 X8 please set one of the function codes among P09 00 P09 07 to be 47 and set the current control mode as the vector control mode 161 2 It can not switch to the torque control mode in the special speed control running modes like the PLC process closed loop and multi speed running 3 When the stop command is entered if the current mode is the torque control mode it will switch to the speed control mode automatically and then stop P06 07 FWD speed limit channel 0 1 0 0 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 P06 08 FWD speed limit value P06 09 REV speed limit channel P06 10 REV speed limit value The function codes P06 07 P06 10 are enabled only under the torque control mode and they are disabled under other control modes The speed limit value of the motor under the torque control mode can be set through the function codes P06 07 P06 10 Under the torque control mode if the motor speed exceeds the speed limit value the interna
104. x motor rated rotating ee Rotating speed motor rated frequency x P16 04 S l speed P16 04 0 1 100 0 isp ay coefficient Preset rotating speed Preset coefficient frequency x motor rated rotating speed motor rated frequency x P16 04 Non VF Running rotating speed measured estimated rotating speed x P16 04 Preset rotating speed Preset frequency x motor rated rotating speed motor rated frequency x P16 04 Cl I 0 1 999 9 enh Closed loop P16 05 n display Note The close loop analog 0 1 100 0 display coefficient reference feedback displays coefficient range is 0 9999 9 Inverter mo le Inverter P16 06 module 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0 0 temperatu temperature re Rectifier os module Rectifier P16 07 module 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0 0 temperatu temperature re Mot tem one Motor P16 08 i temperature 0 C 200 C Te 0 measured measured 107 Accumulat ed Accumulate P16 09 d power on 0 maximum 65535 hours 1hour 0 power on hours hours Accumulat Accumulate P16 10 ed running d work 0 maximum 65535 hours 1hour 0 hours hours Accumulat ed runnin Accumulate P16 11 9 d running 0 maximum 65535 hours 1hour 0 hours of hours of fan fan Group P97 Protection and fault parameters Unit place of LED Action upon communication fault 0 Activate protection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running 2 Alarm and stop in the stop mode only in serial port con
105. 0 0 0 1 100 0 93 reference reference 2 of line 2 Actual ices Actual value correspon corresponds P10 11 ds to the The same as P10 07 0 1 100 0 to maximum maximum reference 2 reference of line 2 Minimum Minimum P10 12 reference 0 0 P10 10 0 1 0 0 reference 2 of line 2 Actual VATE Actual value PONSSPON corresponds P10 13 ds to the j The same as P10 07 0 1 0 0 se to minimum minimum reference 2 reference of line 2 Maximum Maximum P10 14 reference P10 16 100 0 0 1 100 0 reference 1 of curve 1 Actual value Actual value Frequency reference correspon 0 0 100 0 of Pmax d a o P10 15 dstothe Somespones 0 1 100 0 tomaximum Torque 0 0 300 0 of Te maximum reference reference 1 Magnetic flux 0 0 100 0 of De of curve 1 Inflection Inflection point 2 of A point 2 of P10 16 the curve P10 18 P10 14 0 1 100 0 1 the curve 1 reference reference Actual value correspon Actual value ds to the s A P10 17 2 y of inflection The same as P10 15 0 1 100 0 inflection oint 2 point 2 of P the curve 1 Inflection Inflection point 1 of aint 408 P10 18 the curve P P10 20 P10 16 0 1 0 0 1 the curve 1 reference reference Actual Actual value P10 19 value of inflection The same as P10 15 0 1 0 0 correspon point 1 94 ds to the inflection point 1 of the curve 1
106. 0 1kHz 10 0 pulse output pulse frequency 91 0 Without central point 1 With central point Pulse It is PO9 30 2 It is positive when output the frequency is less than the Pulse output i P09 31 central central point frequency 1 0 y central point point 2 With central point Paral It is PO9 30 2 It is positive when the frequency is larger than the central point frequency Pulse tput Pul tput 0 00 10 00s P09 32 SRA es Pensa 0 01s 0 05 filtering filtering time time Flux Flux P09 33 detection detection 10 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 value value Zero spee 0 0 100 0 of P09 34 d Fa neg ie eae 1 0 1 0 ihiSshold resho requency Group P10 Analog input output terminal parameters Unit place Al1 0 Voltage input Analog 1 Current input Analog input P10 00 input Nalog INPUE Tens place Al2 1 00 f properties properties 0 Voltage input 1 Current input Al3 is the differential voltage input Unit place of LED Al1 function selection 0 No function 1 Main reference frequency setting 2 Auxiliary reference frequency setting 3 Torque offset Analog Al 4 Speed limit value 1 Al function Si P10 01 function 5 Speed limit value 2 1 000 selection selection 6 Torque limit value 1 7 Torque limit value 2 8 Torque command reference 9 Main reference frequency setting unipolar A Auxiliary reference frequency setting unipolar B Motor temperatu
107. 002 None None 0x4E5A Change low level of internal position1 reference i e function code H01 11 of No 5 drive to be 60000 which cannot be saved upon power off 32 bits mode Data ee Command Register Number of Number of bytes Register Check ress frame code address registers of register content content code Request 0x05 0x10 0x9F0B 0x0002 0x04 0x0000EA60 0x0592 Response 0x05 0x10 0x9F0B 0x0002 None None 0x1F9A 11 Scaling of servo drive parameters 1 Scaling of the frequency 1 100 To make the drive run at 50 Hz the main setting shall be 0x1388 5000 2 Scaling of time 1 10 To make the acceleration time of the drive to be 30 s the function code shall be set as 0x012C 300 3 Scaling of current 1 10 If the feedback current of the drive is 0x012C 300 the present current shall be 30 A 4 The output power is its absolute value 5 For other parameters please refer to the user manual of servo drives 290 Appendix 2 Braking Components 1 Definition of external braking unit model DBU X XXX Braking aot Power of matched unit drive when ED10 Code Power AC voltage level 015 15kW Code Voltage 022 22kW 2 AC 200V 030 30kW 4 AC 400V 045 45kW 6 AC 600V 110 110kW 220 220kW Attached Fig 2 1 Definition of brake unit model Note ED10 in the above figure means the brake utilization rate is 10 2 External brake mod
108. 0100 0000 0100 0000 S N LITTON AMON 018 SVM 4T5 5 6101026920123000 Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd 1 3 Product series Table1 1 Name and model of drive Enclosure Rated capacity Rated input Rated output Rated output model Product mid kVA current A current A power kW SVM 4T1 5 3 0 5 1 3 7 15 R2 SVM 4T2 2 4 0 5 8 5 5 2 2 SVM 4T3 7 5 9 10 5 8 8 3 7 SVM 4T5 5 8 5 14 5 13 0 5 5 SVM 4T7 5 11 0 20 5 17 0 TS SVM 4T11 17 0 26 0 25 0 11 ee SVM 4T15 21 0 35 0 32 0 15 SVM 4T18 5 24 0 38 5 37 0 18 5 R5 SVM 4T22 30 0 46 5 45 0 22 SVM 4T30 40 0 62 0 60 0 30 SVM 4T37 50 0 76 0 75 0 37 na SVM 4T45 60 0 92 0 90 0 45 SVM 4T55 72 0 113 0 110 0 55 a SVM 4T75 100 0 157 0 152 0 75 SVM 4T90 116 0 180 0 176 0 90 Sa SVM 4T110 138 0 214 0 210 0 110 SVM 4T132 167 0 256 0 253 0 132 7 SVM 4T160 200 0 307 0 304 0 160 R9P SVM 4T200 250 0 385 0 380 0 200 SVM 4T220 280 0 430 0 426 0 220 ee SVM 4T280 355 0 525 0 495 0 280 1 4 Technical specifications of product Table1 2 Technical specifications of drive Rated voltage V Three phase 380V 480V continuous fluctuation of voltage 10 transient fluctuation of voltage 15 10 i e the range is 323V 528V Voltage unbalance rate lt 3 the Input power distortion rate complies with IEC61800 2 Rated input current A Please refer to Table 1 1 Rated frequency
109. 03 None 0x02 0x1388 0x44D2 288 Read the running frequency of No 5 drive and the response running frequency is 50 00Hz 32 bits mode Data Register Number of registers or Register Address Command code Checksum frame address number of bytes read content Request 0x05 0x03 0xE501 0x0002 None 0xA343 0x000013 Response 0x05 0x03 None 0x04 a5 0xB2A5 Change the acceleration time 1 i e function code P02 13 of No 5 drive to be 10 0s which cannot be saved upon power off 16 bits mode Data frame Address Command code Register address Register content Check code Request 0x05 0x06 0x020D 0x0064 0x19DE Response 0x05 0x06 0x020D 0x0064 0x19DE Change the acceleration time 1 i e function code P02 13 of No 5 drive to be 10 0s which cannot be saved upon power off 32 bits mode Data Addr Comma Register Number of Number of bytes of Register Check frame ess nd code address registers register content content code Request 0x05 0x10 0x820D 0x0002 0x04 0x00000064 0x5E4B Respon 0x05 0x10 0x820D 0x0002 None None 0xF9F7 se Read the output current of No 5 drive and the response output current is 30 0A 16 bits mode Data Register Number of registers or Register Address Command code Check code frame address number of bytes read content Request 0x05 0x03 0x6506 0x0001 None 0x7B43 Respon
110. 05 19 55 Motor 1 and 2 switching terminal When this terminal function is enabled the control switching between two motors can be realized The drive controls two motors at the same time and can switch between them through this function code The acceleration deceleration time of motor 1 can be set with the acceleration deceleration time 1 and 2 and that of motor 2can be set with the acceleration deceleration time 3 and 4 56 Security terminal input 58 PG speed testing input A valid only for X7 59 PG speed testing input B valid only for X8 When No 58 and No 59 functions are enabled X7 X8 terminal can be used as the PG input terminal for the 24V open collector or the push pull signal 60 Emergency stop When this terminal function is enabled the drive will stop as soon as possible It will automatically determine the deceleration time according to the load torque to stop as soon as possible 61 71 Reserved 72 Reaming enable 180 73 75 Reserved 76 Start positioning terminals 1 77 Start positioning terminals 2 78 Start positioning terminals 3 When implementing internal digital to multi point positioning select 8 different locations given by these three terminals See H01 for details 79 Position pulse direction valid only for X7 This function is only valid for X7 terminal the ON OFF level of the terminal determines the direction of the position pulse inputs 80 Position pulse input valid only for X8
111. 07 04 VIF P07 06 P07 02 0 1 0 0 voltage 2 voltage 2 Motor 1 VIF Motor 1 V F P07 05 0 00 P07 03 0 01Hz 0 00Hz frequency frequency 1 1 Motor 1 Motor 4 V F P07 06 VIF 0 P07 04 0 1 0 0 voltage 1 voltage 1 Motor 1 Motor 1 P07 07 torque torque 0 0 30 0 0 1 0 0 increase increase ae Motor 1 torque 0 0 50 0 corresponds to P07 08 increase DA METER 0 1 10 0 increase P03 03 cut off j cut off point point 0 User customized V F curve 1 Constant torque feature 1 2 Constant torque feature 2 3 Constant torque feature 3 4 Reserved Motor 2 Motor 2 V F 5 Decrease torque feature 1 P07 09 VIF curve curve 1 0 6 Decrease torque feature 2 setting setting 8 Decrease torque feature 4 9 High starting torque feature 1 10 High starting torque feature 2 11 High starting torque feature 3 81 12 High starting torque feature 4 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 2 times power curve 18 1 7 times power curve 19 1 2 times power curve Motor 2 VIF Motor 2 V F P07 10 vee PO7 12 P03 15 0 01Hz 0 00Hz V frequency frequency 3 3 Motor 2 Motor 2 V F P07 11 VIF P07 13 100 0 0 1 0 0 y voltage 3 voltage 3 Motor 2 VIF Motor 2 V F r P07 12 ae P07 14 P07 10 0 01Hz 0 00Hz y frequency frequency 2 2 Motor Motor 2 V F P07 13 VIF P07 15 P07 11 0 1 0 0 y voltage 2 voltage 2 Motor 2 VIF Motor 2 V F P07 14
112. 0x6528 Status word 3 of drive Note u 2 In the status parameter the maximum length of actual running value of current main reference current running frequency running frequency setting and running frequency at the 3rd fault is 32 bits and for the others the length is 16 bits The bit definition of the status word 1 of the drive is as shown in the following table Bit Value Function Remarks 1 Enable serial port control BITO 0 Disable serial port control 1 Drive runs BIT1 0 Drive stops 1 Drive runs reversely BIT2 0 Drive runs forward 1 Enable serial port reference BIT3 0 Disable serial port reference 1 Meet the main setting BIT4 0 Does not meet the main setting 1 fault If the value is 1 it means there is a fault BIT5 Please refer to BIT15 BIT8 of status word 1 0 No fault to identify the current fault type 1 Alarm If the value is 1 it means there is an alarm BIT6 Please refer to BIT15 BIT8 of status word 1 No alarm to identify the current alarm type 277 Bit Value Function Remarks BIT7 0 Reserved 0 No fault or alarm Not 0 it means there is a fault or alarm you BIT15 BIT8 need to consider both the status of BIT5 and 0x00 OxFF Fault or alarm code BIT6 to identify if it is a fault or alarm code Please refer to P97 15 for the fault and alarm types The bit definition of the status wor
113. 1 0 0 feedback feedback range Process Process 100 0 100 0 P01 27 closed loop closed loop percentage relative to the full 0 1 0 0 error error range Process Process 100 0 100 0 P01 28 closed loop closed loop percentage relative to the full 0 1 0 0 output output range Estimated Estimated P01 29 temperature temperature 0 200 C 1 C 0 of motor of motor Pulse Pulse P01 30 frequency of frequency of 0 0 100 0KHz 0 1 0 0 terminal X8 terminal X8 ASR ASR 300 0 300 0 relative to rated P01 31 controller controller nats ae 0 1 0 0 torque of the motor output output se Of 0 4 P01 32 Torque Torque 300 0 300 0 relative to 01 0 0 reference reference rated torque of the motor UVW input status of UVW input P01 33 0 7 1 0 Expansion status PG1 Correspondi iti PG Z pul po1 34 Ng postion puse 0 65535 1 0 of local PG position Z pulse Speed of P01 35 expansion PG1 Speed 0 00 600 00Hz 0 01 0 00 PG1 Speed of P01 36 expansion PG2 Speed 0 00 600 00Hz 0 01 0 00 PG2 66 Counter P01 37 value of PG1 Counter 0 65535 4 0 expansion value PG1 Correspondi ng position P01 38 o PGT U pulse i a s535 1 0 expansion position PG1 U pulse Correspondi ng position P01 39 of PG1Zpulse 0 65535 1 0 position expansion PG1 Z pulse Counter l f PG2 Count P01 40 eres ounter 0 65535 1 0 expansion value PG2 Correspondi ng
114. 1 100 0 factor of factor of P q y motor 2 motor 2 55 Actual converted current of overload protection sampling current overload protection action level 0 Disabled Parameter 1 Enabled motor in static status Parameter P03 24 auto tunin 2 Enabled motor in rotate status 1 0 auto tuning g 3 Reserved according to the nameplate setting Synchrono Synchronou po3 25 9S motor Smor P identificati identification 0730 of motor rated current 0 10 on current current Initial le fi po3 26 SPIO initial angle 0 FFFFH 1 0 installing encoder Initial le of Angle of Z P03 27 ETAR nge 0 FFFFH 1 0 encoder Z pulse pulse Synchrono Synchronou 0 SMPM can not guarantee to us motor P03 28 ope s motor type enable REV 1 0 selection selection 1 IPM Can enable non REV Group P04 Encoder parameters Unit place Encoder selection of motor 1 0 Local differential encoder Speed Speed 1 X7 amp X8 double phase pulse feedback feedback input P04 00 1 00H encoder encoder 2 Expansion encoder selection selection Tens place Encoder selection of motor 2 0 Local differential encoder 1 X7 amp X8 double phase pulse 73 input 2 Expansion encoder Number of Number of pulses per ulses per P04 01 revolution PusesP 1 10000 1024 revolution of of local PG PG Rotation irecti i 0 A before B P04 02 direction PG Rotation 0 of local directio
115. 1 DEV detection value 0 0 50 0 20 P05 22 DEV detection time 0 0 10 0s 10 0s Detection method for large set speed deviation DEV When the speed deviation difference between the command speed and actual speed of the motor exceeds the setting value of P05 21 and the lasting time of such status exceeds that set by P05 22 large speed deviation will be detected Set P05 21 with the maximum output frequency as 100 m Note The detection of large speed deviation DEV is enabled only under the speed control mode P06 00 0 6 7 Torque control parameters Group P06 P06 00 Speed torque control mode 0 1 0 The switching between speed control and torque control can be realized through this function code 0 Speed control mode The motor action is controlled by the speed command and the internal ASR is enabled The speed control mode shall be used together with the electric torque limit value and the braking torque limit value 1 Torque control mode The internal ASR is disabled and the torque command reference be selected according to function code P06 02 When the torque control mode is used the motor speed may increase because the torque command does not match the load torque Please remember to set the speed limit value m Note Under vector control mode it can be switched between speed control mode and torque control mode through terminal If P06 00 is set as 0 and the terminal function 47 is disabled it is under speed
116. 1 Low level Low level of 0 65535 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 6 referenc 6 reference e H01 22 High level High level of 0 150 119 of internal internal position position 7 referenc 7 reference e H01 23 Low level Low level of 0 65535 1 0 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 7 referenc 7 reference e H01 24 High level High level of 0 150 1 0 of internal internal position position 8 referenc 8 reference e H01 25 Low level Low level of 0 65535 1 0 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 8 referenc 8 reference e H01 26 Each Each 0 FFH segment segment Unit place direction direction Bito Position 1 direction setting of settingof Bit Position 2 direction internal internal position position Bit2 Position 3 direction Bit3 Position 4 direction Tens place Bit0 Position 5 direction 1 00H Bit1 Position 6 direction Bit2 Position 7 direction Bit3 Position 8 direction 0 The same as the running direction 1 Running in the opposite direction H01 27 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 1 000 mode mode timer timer 1 1 H01 28 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 4 000 mode mode timer timer 2 2 H01 29 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 4 000 mode mode timer timer 3 3 H01 30 Automati
117. 14 Speed feedback encoder selection 149 The drive can accept three speed input modes including the local differential encoder X7 X8 double phase pulse input and the expansion encoder The motor can accept anyone of the three modes as the speed test mode However once a speed test mode is selected by one motor the other motor can only select from the other two modes If both motors select the same speed test mode the system will report the Er PST fault X7 X8 double phase pulse input can only be used for the closed loop vector control of the asynchronous motor P04 01 Number of pulses per revolution of local PG 1 10000 1024 The parameters of the local encoder are set according to the number of pulses per revolution PPR of the pulse encoder PG selected m Note When there is any speed sensor be sure to properly set this parameter otherwise the motor cannot operate normally P04 02 Rotation direction of local PG 0 1 0 Local encoder parameters 0 A before B 1 B before A When the motor is running forward A is before B When the motor is running reversely B is before A When the wiring sequence between the drive interface board and the PG has the same direction with the wiring sequence between the drive and motor the set value shall adopt 0 FWD otherwise it shall adopt 1 REV The correspondence relation between the wiring directions can be conveniently adjusted by changing this parameter and you do n
118. 15 torque torque limit 0 0 300 0 0 1 180 0 limit value value Braking Braking P05 16 torque torque limit 0 0 300 0 0 1 180 0 limit value value 0 Disabled Zero serv z 4 Al bled P05 17 o function Pee oe E 1 0 selection function 2 Enabled under conditions terminal enabled Zero servo Zero servo P05 18 0 6 000 0 001 1 000 gain gain Zero servo Zero servo P05 19 initial initial 0 00 10 00Hz 0 01 0 30 frequency frequency Action selection Action Ron selection 0 Decelerate to stop detection P05 20 of large upon 1 Coast to stop display Er dEv 1 2 speed detection of 2 Continue to run an DEV deviation DEV Detection Detection P05 21 value of value of 0 50 0 0 1 20 0 DEV DEV DEV DEV P05 22 detection detection 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 10 0 time time 77 Group P06 Torque control parameters Speed tor 0 Speed control mode P06 00 que Speeditorqu p 1 0 control e selection 1 Torque control mode mode Unit place Torque command selection 0 Torque reference 1 Torque current reference Tens place Selecting positive Torque Torque direction of torque control control 0 FWD driving direction is P06 01 s 1 0 mode mode positive selection selection 1 REV driving direction is positive Hundreds place Selection for switching from speed to torque 0 Switching directly 1 Switching once over the torque switching point 0 Digital reference 1 Al reference T
119. 2 Three wire running control 1 running a self keeping function add an P09 08 control ping y 1 0 mode one terminal among X1 X8 mode setting 3 Three wire running control 2 self keeping function add any one terminal among X1 X8 P09 09 Terminal Terminal 0 01 99 99Hz s 0 01 1 00 87 UP DN UP DN accelerati acceleration on deceler deceleratio ation rate nrate Terminal r aes Terminal P09 10 filtering a SUSTA 0 500ms 1 10 filtering time time Maximum input Maximum P09 11 pulse input pulse 0 1 100 0 kHz 0 1kHz 10 0 frequency of X7 of X7 Maximum input Maximum P09 12 pulse input pulse 0 1 100 0 kHz 0 1kHz 10 0 frequency of X8 of X8 Unit place X7 central point selection 0 Without central point 1 With central point it is P09 11 2 It is positive when the frequency is less than the central point frequency 2 With central point it is P09 11 2 It is positive when the Pulse i frequency is larger than the reference Pulse central point frequency P09 13 central reference i 1 00 7 Tens place X8 central point point central point j selection selection 0 Without central point 1 With central point it is P09 12 2 It is positive when the frequency is less than the central point frequency 2 With central point it is P09 12 2 It is positive when the frequency is larger than the central point frequency Pulse input Pulse input P09 14 Ta ahd PT
120. 2KW 10 15 1 5 1 3 7 KW 15 2 5 2 5 1 5 5KW 20 4 4 1 7 5KW 32 6 6 1 11KW 35 6 6 1 15KW 50 6 6 1 18 5KW 63 10 10 1 22KW 80 16 16 1 30KW 100 25 25 1 37KW 100 25 25 1 45KW 125 35 35 1 55KW 160 35 35 1 75KW 200 70 70 1 90KW 250 70 70 1 110KW 315 95 95 1 132KW 400 150 150 1 160KW 450 185 185 1 200KW 560 240 240 1 220KW 630 150x2 150x2 1 280KW 800 185x2 185x2 1 Note The parameters listed in this table are recommended values 3 When the contactor is used to control the AC supply do not power on off the drive directly through the contactor 4 DC reactor To prevent the influence of the AC supply on the drive protect the drive and suppress the high order harmonics DC reactor should be configured in the following situations If a capacitor tank used for reactive power compensation or a SCR load shares the same AC supply with the drive the harmonics caused by the SCR load or the capacitor tank when it is switched on or off may damage the drive s input rectifying circuit The unbalance of the three phase power supply for the drive exceeds 3 It is required to increase the drive input power factor to more than 0 93 When the drive is connected to a large capacity transformer the current in the input power circuit of the drive may damage the rectifying circuit In general when the power supply capacity of the drive is larger than 550kVA or 10 times higher than the drive capacity the drive needs to be configured
121. 30 34 33 oD 0A 264 In the above table the check code is the LRC checksum which is equivalent to the complement of 05 06 02 01 0x0F 0xA0 Response frame Frame Slave Command Data Check Frame trail head address code Register address Written content code Character 0 5 0 6 0 2 0 1 0 F A 0 4 3 CR LF ASCII 3A 30 34 30 36 30 32 30 31 30 46 41 30 34 33 OD 0A With the function codes the drive can set different response delays to meet the specific application demands of various host stations For the RTU mode the actual time of response delay shall be not less than the interval of 3 5 characters and for the ASCII mode the actual time of response delay shall be not less than 1ms 5 Protocol functions The main function of Modbus is reading writing parameters Different command codes determine different operation requests The Modbus protocol of SVM drive supports the operations as shown in the following table Command code Meaning Reading the drive parameters including function code parameters control parameters and status 0x03 parameters Change the single 16 byte function code parameter or control parameter of the drive and the parameter 0x06 value will not be saved after power off 0x08 Line diagnosis Change multiple function code or contr
122. 36 0 Position control low level of motor position feedback P01 48 9999 9999 0 Position control real time difference of position reference and position feedback This value is greater than zero indicating the actual position ahead the reference less than zero indicating the actual position lag the reference P01 49 0 00 360 00 0 Spindle positioning mode the angle of the spindle current position relative to the spindle reference point 6 3 Basic parameters Group P02 P02 Basic parameters The group of basic parameters are mainly used to the basic parameters that are necessary for the drive operation such as control mode main auxiliary frequency reference and calculation acceleration deceleration time etc The set frequency of the SVM drive can be combined by the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency PO2 04 P02 06 are used to define the main set frequency and P02 07 P02 09 are used to define the auxiliary frequency The Fig 6 5 shows the process of adjusting the proportion of the main set frequency and the auxiliary set frequency to form the set frequency Main reference freq r Calculation of f3 Proportion adjustment a Reference gt A P02 04 eee rog source p02 11 P02 12 M P frequency t f2 f2 Auxiliary reference freq p f2 P02 09 f2 P02 07 gt 3 P02 07 f2 2 P02 07 lt 3 Fig 6 5 Diagram for combining th
123. 4 0x006C 0xC1AC 0x81AD 0x406D 0x01AF 0xCO6F 0x806E 0x41AE 0x01AA 0xCO6A 0x806B 0x41AB 0x0069 0xC1A9 0x81A8 0x4068 0x0078 0xC1B8 0x81B9 0x4079 0x01BB 0xC07B 0x807A 0x41BA 0x01BE 0xC07E 0x807F 0x41BF 0x007D 0xC1BD 0x81BC 0x407C 0x01B4 0xC074 0x8075 0x41B5 0x0077 0xC1B7 0x81B6 0x4076 0x0072 0xC1B2 0x81B3 0x4073 0x01B1 0xC071 0x8070 0x41B0 0x0050 0xC190 0x8191 0x4051 0x0193 0xC053 0x8052 0x4192 0x0196 0xC056 0x8057 0x4197 0x0055 0xC195 0x8194 0x4054 0x019C 0xC05C 0x805D 0x419D 0x005F 0xC19F 0x819E 0x405E 0x005A 0xC19A 0x819B 0x405B 0x0199 0xC059 0x8058 0x4198 0x0188 0xC048 0x8049 0x4189 0x004B 0xC18B 0x818A 0x404A 0x004E 0xC18E 0x818F 0x404F 0x018D 0xC04D 0x804C 0x418C 0x0044 0xC184 0x8185 0x4045 0x0187 0xC047 0x8046 0x4186 0x0182 0xC042 0x8043 0x4183 0x0041 0xC181 0x8180 0x4040 If the CRC checksum of each byte to be sent is computed on line it will take a longer time but it can save the program space occupied by the table The code for computing CRC online is as follows unsigned int crc_check unsigned char data unsigned char length int i unsigned crc_result Oxffff while length crc_result datat for i 0 i lt 8 i if Ccrc_result amp 0x01 crc_result crc_result gt gt 1 0xa001 else crc_result crc_result gt gt 1 287 return 10 Application example To start No 5 drive and make it rotate forward with a speed of 50 00Hz expressed as 5000 internally the command is as fol
124. 5 P09 17 Output selection of Y1 0 1 0 0 Common open collector output 1 High speed pulse output P09 18 Open collector output terminal Y1 0 42 0 P09 19 Open collector output terminal Y2 0 42 1 P09 20 Relay R1 output function selection 0 42 15 P09 21 Relay R2 output function selection 0 42 16 Y2 and the relay terminal can be defined as the multi functional digital output in addition Y1 can also be used as the high speed pulse output 0 50kHz terminal When Y1 terminal is used as the high speed pulse output terminal please refer to relevant functions of P09 29 Table of function definition of the multi functional digital output 186 Table 6 12 Function definition of the multi functional digital output Item Function Item Function 0 Drive in running state signal RUN 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR 2 Speed non zero signal 3 een level detection signal Frequency level detection signal 4 5 Overload detection signal OL FDT2 6 Lockout for undervoltage LU 7 External fault stop EXT 8 Frequency upper limit FHL 9 Frequency lower limit FLL Simple PLC stage running 10 Drive running at zero speed 11 completion indication 12 PLC cycle completion indication 13 Reserved 14 Encoder direction output 15 Drive ready for running RDY 16 Drive fault 17 Host device switch signal 18 Reserved 19 Limiting torque 20 Flux de
125. 54 PI A P05 00 P05 01 P05 04 P05 05 y P05 03 P05 07 Fig 6 19 Schematic diagram of PI parameters Note 1 If the PI parameter is not selected properly the over voltage fault may occur after the system is started to reach the high speed quickly if no external braking resistor or brake unit is connected This is caused by the energy feedback produced in the system regenerative braking while decelerating after the overshoot It can be avoided by adjusting the PI parameter 2 When two motors are switched for use do not set parameters of P05 08 P05 09 to be the ultra high speed section PI of motor 1 In the vector control mode the speed response features of the vector control can be changed by setting the proportional gain P and integral time of the speed regulator 1 Component of speed regulator ASR As shown in Fig 6 20 Kp is the proportional gain P and Tyis the integral time orque current Frequency Bet prea error Output given K 1 gt i pl 7s 1 filter O Torque offset Actual Speed Torque limit gren P06 07 P06 09 y Fig 6 20 Simple diagram of the speed regulator When the integral time is set to be 0 P05 01 0 P05 05 0 there is no integral action and the speed loop is a simple proportion regulator 2 Setting of the proportional gain P and integral time of the speed regulator ASR 155 Larger P Command speed S
126. 54 Zero servo enable terminal 55 Motor 1 and 2 switching terminal 56 Security terminal input 57 Spindle swing 58 PG speed testing input A set only for X7 59 PG speed testing input B set only for X8 60 Emergency stop 61 71 Reserved 72 Reaming enable 73 75 Reserved 76 Start positioning terminals 1 77 Start positioning terminals 2 78 Start positioning terminals 3 79 Position pulse direction valid only for X7 80 Position pulse input valid only for X8 81 Position deviation counter reset 82 Command pulse inhibit 83 Position loop gain switching terminal Position reference point input terminal valid only for aa 84 85 Spindle positioning back to zero terminal X6 X7 X8 86 Spindle indexing terminal 1 87 Spindle indexing terminal 2 88 Spindle indexing terminal 3 89 Servo control switching terminal i Negative limit switch valid only for 90 Tapping enable 91 X6 X7 X8 92 Positive limit switch valid only for X6 X7 X8 93 94 Reserved 173 Item Function Item Function 95 Internal positioning start enable Any two terminals can not be set as the same function No except for the function No 0 0 No function 1 Terminal forward running input FWD 2 Terminal reverse running input REV 3 Terminal jog forward running input 4 Terminal jog reverse running input The above functions 1 4 are only enabled under the terminal running command reference mode P02 02 1 the running command and the jog command
127. 6 0 V deceleratio rime Mecelerat on time y Jog P11 17 Jog interval z 0 0 100 0s 0 1s 0 0 V interval Frequency Frequency P11 18 of jog of jog 0 10 50 00Hz 0 01Hz 5 00 y running running Upper limit Skip P11 19 of skip frequency P11 20 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 V frequency 1 1 Lower limit Skip P11 20 of skip frequency 0 00 P11 19 0 01Hz 0 00 V frequency 1 1 Upper limit Skip P11 21 of skip frequency P11 22 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 V frequency 2 2 Lower limit Skip P11 22 of skip frequency 0 00 P11 21 0 01Hz 0 00 V frequency 2 2 Upper limit Skip P11 23 of skip frequency P11 24 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 V frequency 3 3 Lower limit Skip P11 24 of skip frequency 0 00 P11 23 0 01Hz 0 00 V frequency 3 3 98 Group P12 Advanced function parameters HD ND HD ND 0 HD Heavy duty P12 00 1 0 selection selection 1 ND Normal duty Energy sa A Di E i 0 Disabled P12 01 ving ee 1 0 ng running 1 Enabled running Carrier Carrier 0 7 15 0KH ini tor P12 02 wave wave ae PUN vector 0 1 8 0 frequency frequency Unit place enable the overmodulation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Tens place Automatic adjustment selection for carrier wave frequency PWM 0 No automatic adjustment d 1 Automatic adjustment P12 03 Hie K g FA moge f 1 1001 optimizatio optimization Hundreds place modulation n mode 0 Two phase three phase switching 1 Three phase modulation Thousands place Low frequency carrier li
128. 6 The drain connecting mode when using the internal 24V power supply of the drive 3 The source connecting mode when using the external power supply note be sure to remove the short circuit plate between the user terminal PLC and P24 is as shown in Fig 3 17 External Controller P24 t24V Ag COM 3 3V DC PLC z P gt Ja DIYA si 3 3V i COM Fig 3 17 The source connecting mode when using the external power supply 4 The drain connecting mode when using the external power supply note be sure to remove the short circuit plate between the user terminal PLC and P24 is as shown in Fig 3 18 36 External Controller P24 24V R pel COM 3 3V PLC F ji at I at x1 aes 3 3V T De Me ce ae wo FRO Fig 3 18 The drain connecting mode when using the external power supply Wiring for Multi functional output terminals 1 When the Multi functional output terminals Y1 and Y2 use the internal 24V power supply of the drive the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 19 Warning The inductive load such as relay shall be anti parallel with the fly wheel diode 24V _ 24V T P24 DE 5V y1 Relayca O COM 5V TEA y2 Relay ca 7 IYK
129. 7 01 defines the protection action selections for input output phase loss external analog frequency torque command loss motor over temperature and analog input fault P97 02 defines the protection action selections for temperature sampling disconnection under voltage fault auto reset interval fault and fault locking P97 03 Overload protection setting for motor 0 2113H 0001 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Action upon motor overload protection 0 No action 1 Action with low speed compensation 2 Action without low speed compensation Overload pre alarm detection selection 0 Always detect 1 Detect only at constant speed Overload pre alarm action selection 0 Alarm and keep running 1 Activate protection and coast to stop Overload pre alarm detection level selection 0 Relative to rated current of the motor 1 Relative to rated current of the drive Fig 6 79 Overload protection setting for motor Unit place Motor protection mode 0 Disabled The drive has no overload protection for the load motor This function shall be selected carefully 1 Common motor with low speed compensation Because the heat dissipation of the common motor at low speed will be degraded the corresponding electronic thermal protection value shall be properly adjusted Low speed compensation means to lower the motor overload protection threshold for the mo
130. 7 22 14 the setting reserved corresponding output is enabled Expansion virtual digital input terminal BITO BIT5 EX1 EX6 the corresponding bit 0x6410 No reserved selection and channel of P28 08 is enabled Expansion virtual digital output BITO BIT1 ExRO1 ExRO2 when P26 09 0x6411 No terminal reserved P26 11 17 the corresponding terminal is enabled 0x6412 Control word 2 No Refer to its bit definition list Note 1 When reading the control parameter the value returned is the value written in the previous communication u 2 In the control parameters the maximum length of main reference running frequency setting and auxiliary frequency setting is 32 bits and for the others the length is 16 bits 273 3 In the control parameters for the scaling of each reference input output setting range and decimal point please refer to the corresponding function code parameter The bit definition of the control word 1 is as shown in the following table Bit Value Function Remarks Coast to stop and the drive 111B Stop for external fault displays external fault 110B Stop in mode 1 Coast to stop Stop according to the deceleration BIT2 BITO 101B Stop in mode 0 time set enabled when the jog is disabled Start the drive enabled when the 100B Running commands jog is disabled Others No command Birs 1 Run reversely Set
131. C input output parameters for the input voltage of the relay output Group P09 common terminal is class II terminal COM Analog input terminal wiring 1 When Al1 and Al2 terminals receive the single end analog voltage or current input with the voltage current input selected via jumper and function code P10 00 the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 6 SVM 10 10 O A A 9 AI1 Al2 J gt GND PE 10V410V O or 0 20mA Shield single end grounded near the drive Fig 3 6 Wiring diagram for Al1 and Al2 terminals 31 2 When the Al3 and Al3 terminals receive the analog voltage differential input or analog voltage single end input the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 7 and Fig 3 8 SVM oO A N 4 alae VRE o H Ho as J J PE 10V10V T Analog differential voltage input l ee Shield single end grounded near the drive Fig 3 7 Wiring diagram for Al3 and Al3 terminals to receive differential voltage input SVM ase EA l 10V0V O T 9 AIB AIS 1 1 A e y 0 AI3 AI3 PE Q Shield single end grounded near the drive Fig 3 8 Wiring diagram for Al3 and Al3 terminals to receive single end voltage input Analog output terminal wiring The external analog meter of the analog output terminals AO1 and AO2 can indicate various parameters The analog output of the voltage current is selected via the jumper and the output range of the
132. Er PoF 27 Origin lost Er oRG 28 Parameter setting error Er PST 29 Control board 24V power short circuit Er 24v 30 Reserved 31 Expansion card fault Er oPT 32 Reserved 33 Grounding short circuit Er GdF 34 Large DEV deviation fault Er dEv 35 Reserved 36 Reserved 37 Reserved Expansion PG fault Er PG2 38 PID feedback exceeding limit Er Fbo 39 Motor over temperature Er oHL 40 Reserved 41 Abnormal Al input fault Er AIF abnormal analog input 42 Inverter module temperature sampling disconnection protection Er THI 43 Rectifier module temperature 112 sampling disconnection protection Er THr 44 Short circuit of 10V analog output power Er 10v 45 Abnormal internal over current reference Er rEF 46 50 Reserved Note 1 Er drv fault can not be reset until 10s later 2 For continuous over current less than 3 times including 3 times it can not be reset until 6s later if it is more than 3 times it can not be reset until 200s later 3 The keyboard displays AL xxx in case of any fault e g in case of the contactor fault keyboard displays Er xxx if there is protection action and displays AL xxx if continuing running with alarm The The second P97 16 second The same as P97 15 1 0 fault type fault type The third The third P97 17 The same as P97 15 1 0 fault type fault type DC bi v
133. Fair So so Poor Other comment User s signature Date Return visit record in Customer Service Center aTelephone return visit cLetter return visit Others Signature of the technical support engineer Date Note This bill becomes invalid if the user can not be visited 295 Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd Drive Warranty Bill Customer company Detailed address Postal Code Contact Tel Fax Machine model Power Machine No Contract No Purchase date Service unit Contact Tel Maintenance personnel Tel Maintenance date Comment on service Good Fair So so Poor Other comment User s signature Date Return visit record in Customer Service Center aTelephone return visit cLetter return visit Others Signature of the technical support engineer Date Note This bill becomes invalid if the user can not be visited Parameter record table
134. Group P06 0x06 Group P99 0x63 Group P07 0x07 Group H00 OXIE Group P08 0x08 Group H01 0x1F Group P09 0x09 Group H02 0x20 Group P10 0x0A Control parameter group 0x64 Group P11 0x0B Status parameter group 0x65 For example the register address of the function code parameter P03 02 of the drive is 0x0302 and the register address of the first control parameter control word 1 is 0x6400 As the format of the whole data frame has been detailed in the above text the following text will focus on the format and meanings of the command code and data of Modbus protocol These two parts constitute the Modbus application layer protocol data unit Any reference to application layer protocol data unit to below refers to such two parts The following introduction to the frame format is based on RTU mode For the ASCII mode the length of the application layer protocol data unit shall be doubled 1 Read the drive parameters The application layer protocol data units are as follows Request format Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x03 Start register address 2 0x0000 0xF FFF Number of registers 2 0x0001 0x000A If the operation is successful the response frame is as follows Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x03 Number of bytes read 1 2 Number of regist
135. H01 00 you can select reciprocating multiple positioning you can select continuous positioning positioning times set by the function code H01 09 Thousands 0 place Reciprocating Single point multiple positioning mode can select reciprocating Single point ese na f A positioning can also select continuous positioning in one multiple positioning 1 Continuous direction mode H0101 0 1219H 0009H 230 H01 01 parameters description please refer to table 6 19 Table 6 19 Homing mode parameters description Parameter Setting value Description place 0 Homing according to the current direction CCWL as a return to the origin 1 Homing according to the current direction CWL as a return to the origin 2 Forward homing ORGP as a return to the origin Unit place 3 Reverse homing ORGP as a return to the origin Origin detector types and 4 The shortest distance homing ORGP as a return to the origin looking for z TPE rote 5 Homing according to the current running direction ORGP as a return to the direction settings origin 6 Forward looking for Z pulse as a return to the origin 7 Reverse looking for Z pulse as a return to the origin 8 The shortest distance looking for Z pulse as the return to the origin 9 Homing according to the current direction Z pulse as a return to the origin Tens place 0 Level mode Homing Terminal function is 85 command mode 1 Pulse mode
136. Hz P08 03 Startup frequency retention time 0 00 10 00s 0 00s The drive begins to run from the startup frequency P08 02 and accelerates to the set frequency after the startup frequency retention time P08 03 Note For the heavy duty startup applications it will facilitate the startup if the startup frequency and retention time are properly set P08 04 Startup DC braking current 0 0 100 0 0 0 P08 05 Startup DC braking time 0 00 30 00s 0 00s P08 04 sets the volume of the startup DC braking current which is indicated in a percentage of the rated current of the drive P08 05 sets the action time for the startup DC braking Different stop modes can be adopted for different applications 0 Decelerate to stop Decelerate to stop according to the set deceleration time 1 Coast to stop The drive locks the output and the motor coast to stop 2 Decelerate to stop DC braking Decelerate to stop according to the set deceleration time and when the frequency is lower than the DC braking initial frequency P08 12 inject the DC braking current P08 14 after the stop DC braking waiting time P08 13 The stop DC braking is determined by P08 15 P08 07 Stop frequency detection 0 00 150 00Hz 0 50Hz Detecting the frequency upon the stop action is finished P08 08 Stop frequency detection retention time 0 00 10 00s 0 00s The retention time for detecting the frequency upon the stop action is finished P08 09 Stop speed det
137. Hz 0 00 P11 19 P11 24 are designed to let the output frequency of the drive avoid the resonance frequency point of the mechanical load The set frequency of the drive can skip around some frequency point in accordance with the mode shown in Fig 6 62 up to 3 skip ranges can be defined Frequency after adjustment _ _ _ Skip frequency 3 upper limit Skip frequency 3 lower limit Skip frequency 2 upper limit Skip frequency 2 lower limit Skip frequency 1 upper limit Skip frequency 1 lower limit gt Set frequency Fig 6 62 Diagram for the skip frequency and scope After the skip frequency is set even if the set frequency of the drive is within the mechanical resonance frequency range of the drive system the output frequency of the drive will be adjusted out of the range to avoid running with the resonance frequency 6 13 Advanced function parameters Group P12 P12 00 HD ND selection 0 1 0 The rating of the drive can be divided into heavy duty rating HD and normal duty rating ND according to load feature For difference between heavy duty rating HD and normal duty rating ND please refer to Table 6 15 Table 6 15 Schematic diagram of setting HD ND P12 00 parameter setting Rated output current Overload capacity 0 Heavy duty rating HD Heavy duty rating depending on its For 150 drive rated current for 60s model 1 Normal duty rating HD Normal dut
138. Hz 50Hz 60HZz fluctuation range 5 Standard applicative motor kW Rated capacity kVA Please refer to Table 1 1 Output Rated current A power Output voltage V Output with three phase under rated input conditions 0 rated input voltage the error is less than 3 Output frequency Hz V F 0 00 3000 0Hz unit 0 01Hz vector control 0 1200 00Hz Overload capacity HD 1 min for 150 rated current 0 5 s for 200 rated current Control mode Vector control without PG Vector control with PG V F control without PG V F control with PG Maximum output frequency 3000Hz for V F control 1200Hz for other control Speed adjusting range 1 200 vector control without PG 1 1000 vector control with PG Speed control precision 0 2 vector control without PG 0 02 vector control with PG Operation 0 3 vector control without PG control Speed fluctuation z features 0 1 vector control with PG Positioning precision lt 1 pulse lt 5ms vector control with PG Torque response lt 10ms vector control without PG Torne cento The torque control precision is 7 5 when vector control q without PG and 5 when vector control with PG Startup torque 150 ori vector control without PG 200 OHz vector control with PG Fast tracking over torque under torque detection torque limit multi stage speed oper
139. If the control mode of the synchronous motor is selected as With PG vector control be sure to disconnect the motor shaft from the loads during auto tuning It is prohibited to carry out the setting when the motor is connected to loads 4 Set P03 24 press the ENTER DATA key and the RUN key and then the auto tuning will be started 5 When the running LED on the operation panel is off it indicates that the auto tuning is finished m Note If the control mode of the synchronous motor is selected as With PG vector control please pay attention to the following points when conducting the auto tuning of the parameters 148 1 If over voltage or over current occurs during the auto tuning properly increase the acceleration deceleration time P02 13 and P02 14 For the tuning of motor 2 please modify P11 04 and P11 05 2 Disconnect the motor shaft from the loads It is prohibited to carry out rotation setting when the motor is connected to loads 3 Before the auto tuning the motor shall be in static status otherwise the auto tuning cannot be normally conducted 4 In certain situations for instance the motor cannot be disconnected from the loads where it is inconvenient to conduct rotation setting be sure to enter the correct nameplate parameters of the motor P03 26 5 Once the auto tuning of the motor is completed the initial installation angel will be saved into P03 26 automatically If the tuning is failed pl
140. P00 04 Selection of key functions 0 371FH 0100 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Used for manufacturer commissioning Function selection of STOP RESET key 0 STOP key valid only in panel control mode 1 STOP key valid in all control modes Note RESET key is valid in any control mode Function selection of M key 0 No function 1 Jog 2 FWD REV 3 Command channel switching 1 valid only in stop status 4 Command channel switching 2 valid both in stop amp running status 5 Panel locking function 6 Emergency stop function 7 Coast to stop function Panel locking function 0 Lock all the keys 1 Lock all the keys except STOP key 2 Lock all the keys except gt gt key 3 Lock all the keys except RUN amp STOP key Fig 6 1 Selection of key functions Unit place Used for manufacturer commissioning reserved Tens place Function selection of the STOP RESET key It is used to set the function scope and working mode of the STOP RESET key of the keyboard when it is used as the stop key Table 6 1 Working mode of operation panel Unit place Function Description Invalid in non panel control 0 The STOP key is valid only in the panel control mode mode Stop in the stop mode under Valid in the command channel of panel terminal and serial port the non panel control mode When this key is pressed the drive will stop
141. P06 25 Under torque detection time 0 0 10 0s 0 0s 163 Under torque judging If the torque is continually less than the torque detection value P06 24 within the detection time P06 25 it is considered as the signal of under torque detected Action selection for under torque detected 0 Under torque detection is disabled Do not detect under torque 1 Continue to run after the under torque is detected only when the speed is consistent Detect the under torque only in the process of running with the constant speed and the drive continues to run after the under torque is detected 2 Continue to run after the under torque is detected during running The drive continues to run after the under torque is detected during the whole running process 3 Turn off the output after the under torque is detected only when the speed is consistent Detect the under torque only in the process of running with the constant speed and the drive will stop the output and the motor will coast to stop after the under torque is detected 4 Turn off the output after the under torque is detected during running The drive will stop the output and the motor will coast to stop after the under torque is detected in the whole running process Under the V F control mode when the setting value is 100 it corresponds with the rated current of the drive Under the vector control mode when the setting value is 100 it corresponds with the rated torque of the motor
142. Proportion 0 Disabled djust F P02 11 SaS Hs SARANG 1 Corresponds to P02 15 t selection proportion 1 0 of set adjustment 2 Corresponds to the current frequency frequency Proportion adjustmen s t Proportion P02 12 ea adjustment 0 0 200 0 0 1 100 0 coefficient Sd coefficient of set frequency Unit 5 5 22 6S adopts 30 Accelerati Acceleration P02 13 0 0 3600 0 that of 45 20S on time 1 time 1 P11 01 Others 0 1 30S 5 5 Unit 22 6 08 adopts Decelerati Deceleratio 30 P02 14 get ined 0 0 3600 0 that of on time n time P11 01 45 20 0S 0 1 Others 30S Maximum Maximum MAX 50 00 upper limit frequenc P02 15 output output Sapp quency 9 o1Hz 50 00 P02 16 3000 00Hz frequency frequency U limit U limit P02 16 PhP Ay pper mit p02 17 P02 15 0 01Hz 50 00 frequency frequency Lower limit Lower limit P02 17 0 00 P02 16 0 01Hz 0 00 frequency frequency Group P03 Motor parameters 70 Rated Rated P03 00 power of 0 4 999 9KW 0 1 0 power motor 1 Rated g Rated O rated voltage of drive P98 04 P03 01 voltage of aR g 1 0 voltage motor 1 Rated Rated Depending P03 02 current of 0 1 999 9A 0 1A current on model motor 1 RANER Rated Dependin P03 03 frequency 1 00 3000 0Hz 0 01Hz pened frequency on model of motor 1 Rated ae Raag P03 04 9 rotating 0 60000rpm 1rpm 1440rpm speed of speed motor 1 0 001 1 000 Power Power It shall b d whi I
143. Relay R2 be hy nner output R2 function 14 Encoder direction output ie function selection 15 Drive ready for running RDY selection 16 Drive fault 17 Host device switch signal 18 Reserved 19 Limiting torque Torque command is enabled when limited by the torque limit value 1 or 2 89 20 Flux detection signal Flux detection value is enabled when exceeding P09 33 21 Zero servo completed 22 Analog torque offset enabled 23 Over torque output 24 Under torque output 25 Positioning completed 26 Positioning close 27 Reserved 28 Position tolerance alarm 29 Reserved 30 Spindle positioning back to zero completed 31 Spindle indexing completed 32 Reserved 33 Reserved 34 Drive FWD REV indication terminal 35 Motor 1 and 2 indication terminal 36 Communication card ON OFF signal 37 Positioning position1 arrived 38 Positioning position 2 arrived 39 Positioning position 3 arrived 40 Positioning position 4 arrived 41 Positioning position 5 arrived 42 Positioning position 6 arrived 43 Positioning position 7 arrived 44 Positioning position 8 arrived Only the following function No will be shown in the shortcut menu 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 16 Binary setting Output terminal Output 0 Enabled upon connection terminal P09 22 enabled 1 Enabled upon disconnection 1 0 stat s enabled status Unit place of LED seme BITO BIT3 Y1
144. SV Master Series Servo Drive User Manual Document Version V1 0 Archive Date 2014 05 23 BOM Code R29090527 Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd provides full technical support for our customers customers can contact local Megmeet offices or customer service centers or directly contact Megmeet headquarters Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd All rights reserved The contents in this document are subject to change without notice Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd Address 5th Floor Block B Unisplendor Information Harbor Langshan Rd Science amp Technology Park Nanshan District Shenzhen 518057 China Website www megmeet drivetech com Tel 86 755 86600500 Fax 86 755 86600562 Service email driveservice megmeet com Foreword Thank you for choosing the SV Master series servo drive of Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd S V Master servo drives enhance closed loop vector and servo control function applicable to machine tool servo spindle paper processing printing and dyeing packaging textile and other industry with servo requirements Vector control can drive asynchronous motors and synchronous motors the maximum output frequency up to 1200Hz SV Master servo drives with torque control speed control and position control mode and online switching mode realize permanent magnet synchronous motors high speed weakening control asynchronous motor high speed spindle drive support m
145. ULSE reference 6 Internal PLC running 7 Process closed loop PID 8 Multi speed 9 PLC card or bus reference reserved Mai on Main reference P01 01 ade reference set 3000 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 frequency frequency Auxiliary Auxiliary fi 3000 00 3000 00Hz P01 02 i T reference set 0 01Hz 0 00 fi frequency requeney Set Set P01 03 5 s 3000 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 frequency frequency Frequency command anter Frequenc P01 04 acceleration q y 3000 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 I command deceleration Out Out P01 05 TES RUR 3000 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 frequency frequency P01 06 uty outpu 0 480V 1v 0 voltage voltage Out Out P01 07 wee SPS 0 0 3le 0 1A 0 0 current curren Torque Torque P01 08 300 0 300 0 0 1 0 0 current curren P01 09 Flux current Flux current 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 64 P01 10 won rai 300 0 300 0 0 1 0 0 torque torque Motor 0 0 200 0 relative to rated P01 11 Motor power et 0 1 0 0 power power of the motor Estimated Estimated P01 12 frequency of frequency of 3000 0 3000 0Hz 0 01 0 00 motor motor Measured Measured P01 13 frequency of frequency of 3000 0 3000 0Hz 0 01 0 00 motor motor High level of eek K 10000k P01 14 output Output kWh 0 65535 10000kWh Wh 0 kWh Low level of P01 15 output Output kWh 0 9999kWh 1kWh 0 kWh P01 16 Bus voltage Bus voltage 0 800V 1V 0 0 FFFFH Bit 0 RUN STOP Bit 1 RE
146. V Only the well trained and authorized personnel are allowed to perform the internal wiring of the drive Check the wiring carefully when connecting the emergency stop or safety circuit Check the voltage level of the drive before power on otherwise human injury and death or equipment damage may be caused WARNING e Check carefully whether the rated input voltage of the drive is consistent with the AC power voltage before power on e The drive has passed the dielectric strength test before delivery Do not conduct this test again When connecting the external braking resistor or braking unit please refer to Chapter 1 Do not connect the AC supply cables to the output terminals U V and W e The diameter of copper cable used as grounding wire should be bigger than 3 5mm and the grounding resistance should be less than 100 e There is leakage current inside the drive and the value of the leakage current depends on the operating conditions To ensure the safety the drive and the motor must be grounded and a Residual Current Detector i e RCD is required The type B RCD is recommended The set value of the leakage current is 300mA e To provide the over current protection for the input side and facilitate the power off maintenance the drive should be connected to the AC supply through a circuit breaker or a fuse Please refer the wiring diagram shown in Fig 3 1 when commissioning 18
147. V FWD Bit 2 Running at zero speed Bit 3 Accelerating Bit 4 Decelerating Bit 5 Running at constant speed Operation Operation Bit 6 Pre exciting P01 17 state of the state of the Bit 7 Tuning 1 0000 drive drive Bit 8 Over current limiting Bit 9 DC over voltage limiting Bit 10 Torque limiting Bit 11 Speed limiting Bit 12 Drive in fault Bit 13 Speed control Bit 14 Torque control Bit 15 Position control O FFH 0 off 1 on Stalon DI terminal i P01 18 digital input The high speed pulse reference 1 00 i state will not be refreshed terminal synchronously State of O FH 0 open 1 close digital DO terminal P01 19 The high speed pulse output will 1 0 output state not be refreshed synchronously terminal Al1 input Al1 input P01 20 pa Nope 10 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00 voltage voltage P01 21 Al2 input Al2 input 10 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00 65 voltage voltage Al3 input Al3 input P01 22 Mpa npu 10 00 10 00V 0 01V 0 00 voltage voltage 0 0 100 0 P01 23 AO1 output AO1 output percentage relative to the full 0 1 0 0 range 0 0 100 0 P01 24 AO2 output AO2 output percentage relative to the full 0 1 0 0 range Process Process 100 0 100 0 P01 25 closed loop closed loop percentage relative to the full 0 1 0 0 reference reference range Process Process 100 0 100 0 P01 26 closed loop closed loop percentage relative to the full 0
148. a ESE CREER AERAR e 57 Chapter 5 Parameter UIStiapiisniena tenane p ieni 62 5 1 Basic menu function code parameter table cccccccscccceseceesseeeseeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeesaeeesseeeeessaeeesseeeeseeees 62 Chapter 6 Parameter DeSCIiption eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeaeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeeeenaeerseeeaeees 125 6 1 System management parameters Group POO cecceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseneseeeeeaeeseeeseneseaeeserenereee 125 6 2 Status display parameters Group PO1 cecceeceeececeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeneeeaeesaeeseneeeaeeseeseneseeeseeeesereereea 129 6 3 Basic parameters Group PO2 ceecceeeeeeeeceneeeeeeceaeeeseeeseecaeeeaeesseesaeseaeeeaeeseeseneeeeeseneteteeateeee 133 6 4 Motor parameters Group P03 142 6 5 Encoder parameters Group PO4 eecceeseeseeeeeeeseeceeeceaeeeseecsaeceaeesaeesseesaeeeaeesseeseaeseaeesaeeseneeateeee 149 6 6 Speed control parameters Group POS5 cccceeceeececeeeeeneeeeeecneeeeeeseeseeseneeeaeeeaeereaeeeieeeanesenetereee 154 6 7 Torque control parameters Group P06 ceeceeececeeeceeeeeeeeceeeseaeeseeceeseneeeaeeeeeseeeseeeesaeenererereee 159 6 8 VF control parameters Group PO7 ccecceeeeeeseeeeeceeeceaeeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeeceeseeeseaeesneeseaeeeeeeieeseeeeteee 164 6 9 Start and stop control parameters Group PO8 cecceeseeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeesereeeaeesaeeseeeseeeseneeseneteneens 168 6 10 Digital input output parameters Group POQ eeececeeee
149. al 2 In the acceleration section the fast acceleration in start segment and end segment can be adjusted at your disposal 3 In the deceleration section the fast deceleration in start segment and end segment can be adjusted at your disposal The schematic diagram of adjusting the S curve is as shown in Fig 6 59 The above figure is the schematic diagram of adjusting the S curve in acceleration section When the parameter increases the S curve will become steeper When the parameter decreases the S curve will become less steep The principles of adjusting the S curve parameter in deceleration section are the same as the acceleration section The calculation of the S curve time is the relationship of acceleration and time Now the following example illustrates the calculation relationship of S curve and t take P11 08 25 00 P11 09 12 50 P11 10 20 00 for example calculate the time t accelerating to the set frequency As shown in Fig 6 59 t is made up of three sections Fast acceleration time of the S curve in start segment Acceleration time of the S curve in the linear section Fast acceleration time P11 08 _ P11 09 of the S curve in the end segment The set running frequency is 50 00HZz 2s the cut off 204 P11 08 frequency of 4 running is 25 00Hz t ene g 2 P11 10 1 25s and the initial frequency of t running is _ 50 00 34 40 34 40Hz The time running from 34 4Hz to
150. al It can be set as the digital d Opto isolated input please refer to the X1 input terminal input terminal with multiple introduction to the multifunctional 1 functions The factory default 2 f f input output terminal wiring Multi functional settings for X1 and X2 are Input resistance R 3 1kQ maximum X2 input terminal FWD forward running input frequency 200Hz 2 command terminal and REV Input voltage range 20V 30V Multi functional reverse running command X3 input terminal terminal respectively The F33V r 3 running command terminals l A Multi functional can be set with other input 43 3V x4 input terminal terminals and can realize the VAI 4 three wire control function r Multi functional with the third input terminal SVM X5 input terminal For details please refer to the 5 introduction of the functions about input terminals P09 00 P09 07 and he Multi functional introduction of the two wire input terminal Multi functional control and three wire X6 input terminal control functions P09 08 in 6 6 10 Digital input output parameters Group P09 common terminal PLC or COM Multi functional In addition to acting as an X7 input terminal ordinary multi functional 7 terminals same as X1 X6 The equivalent diagram for the X7 and X8 can also be setas opto isolated input is shown as above the high speed pulse input please refer to the introduction to wiring terminal
151. al interrupt signal is removed the drive will start in the speed tracking mode and resume the running 20 Reference frequency source switching command The reference frequency source can realize the reference mode of the frequency source through this terminal function and the function code of P02 10 21 Reserved 22 External reset input Realizing the fault reset The STOP REST key on the operation panel and the host device command can be used to reset the fault as well 23 Coast to stop input FRS In the running status once this terminal function is enabled the drive will coast to stop immediately 24 Acceleration deceleration disable command If this function terminal is enabled the running frequency will remain the same except for the stop command 25 Stop DC braking input command Once the drive received the stop command when the running frequency is lower than the stop DC braking frequency P08 12 the drive will start the DC braking The braking current is set by P08 14 and the braking time is selected between the terminal function retention time and the stop DC braking time P08 15 whichever is longer 26 Simple PLC pause command It is used to realize the pause control of PLC process during running The drive will run with zero frequency and the PLC running will not be timed when this terminal is enabled and the drive will start in the speed tracking mode and continue the PLC running when this terminal is disabled Please
152. alid in all control modes Note The RESET key is valid IN any control mode Hundreds place Function selection of M key 0 No function 1 JOG 2 FWD REV 3 Command channel switching 1 valid only in stop status 4 Command channel switching 2 valid both in stop amp running status 5 Panel locking function 6 Emergency stop function 7 Coast to stop function Thousands place Panel locking function 0 Lock all the keys 1 Lock all the keys except the STOP key 2 Lock all the keys except the gt gt key 3 Lock all the keys except the RUN amp STOP key 0100 P00 05 Parameter initializatio n Parameter initialization 0 Parameter changing status 1 Clear fault memory information 2 Restore to leave factory value 3 Restore the quick start function group only P00 06 Parameter copy Parameter copy 0 Disabled 1 Uploading parameter 63 2 Downloading parameters 3 Downloading parameters except the motor parameters Note The drive parameters will not be uploaded downloaded Group P01 Status display parameters 0 Disabled 1 Digital reference 1 Keyboard A V reference 2 Digital reference 2 Terminal UP DN reference 3 Serial port communication Main Main reference reference reference P01 00 1 0 frequency frequency 4 Al analog reference channel channel 5 Terminal P
153. ally displayed by pressing the gt key The fault reset operation can be conducted through the STOP RESET key on the operation panel the control terminal or the communication command If the fault still persists the display of the fault code will be maintained 5 Function code editing status Press the MENU ESC key in stop run or fault alarm state you can enter the editing state if there is any user password please refer to the description of P00 01 The editing status will be displayed in two level menu mode shown as below function code group or function code function code parameter Press the ENTER DATA key to enter the function parameter display status In the function parameter display status press the ENTER DATA key to save the parameter press MENU ESC to exit 50 4 1 2 Indentification of LED display symbols The correspondence relation between the LED display symbols and the character figure is as shown below LED Meaning LED Meaning LED Meaning LED 5 Meani Display Display Display Display ee 0 A S 5 e 5 M00 0 00 n D a an oooi o o n momoni mni 00nn nnman 0 D 4 1 3 Operation example In the below example the stop display parameter is the set frequency and its leave factoryvalue is 50 00Hz The black part in the figure indicates the current
154. ame Description Pin Name Description 3 RXD TXD P Receive send data 1 RXD TXD P Receive send data 4 RTS Receive send control 2 RXD TXD N Receive send data a signal 3 GND et M 5 GND 9 groun ground 4 PE Protection ground 6 vp Communication signal power 8 RXD TXD N Receive send data Shell PE Protection ground Others Reserved pin 3 3 3 CANopen communication card The CANopen communication of SVM servo drive is based on CAN2 0B standard frame format 11 identifiers COB ID and 8 data bits e CANopen technical specification 301 402 Support Node Guard protocol the master can use this feature to check the device status Send and receive each have four PDO channels send PDO supports synchronous asynchronous transmission type etc As shown on the right the right of communication card with a 5pin common connector and a terminal resistor DIP switch S1 and an external 24V power supply selector switch J1 J2 Back with a drive connection plug for the communication card plugged into the servo drive Table 3 6 5pin common connector pins and functions Pin Name Description A 24V External 24V power supply 2 CAN CAN communication interface terminals 5 3 SHILD Shield Fig 3 29 CANopen card 4 CAN CAN communication interface terminals 5 24V External 24V power supply 3 3 4 AD DA card AD DA card of the SVM servo drives supports 4 0 10V DA outputs and 2 12
155. and UP 15 Frequency decrease command DN 16 External fault normally open input 17 External fault normally closed input A External interrupt normally closed contact 18 External interrupt normally open contact input 19 input 20 Reference frequency source switching command 21 Reserved 22 External reset RESET input 23 Coast to stop input FRS 24 Acceleration deceleration disable command 25 Stop DC braking input command 26 Simple PLC pause command 27 Reserved 28 Clearing the PLC stop memory 29 PID closed loop disabled 30 PID closed loop soft start disabled 31 PID integral retention 32 PID integral clearing 33 Switching PID adjustment features 34 Main reference frequency source selection 1 35 Main reference frequency source selection 2 36 Main reference frequency source selection 3 37 Switching main set frequency to Al 38 Command source selection 1 39 Command source selection 2 40 Switching command to terminal 41 FWD disabled 42 REV disabled 43 Drive running disabled 44 External stop command 45 Auxiliary set frequency reset f Speed control and torque control switching 46 Pre magnetizing command terminal 47 i terminal 48 Torque direction switching terminal for torque control 49 Torque offset selection terminal 50 Al torque offset retention 514 Pulse input terminal of the torque limit 1 valid only for X7 or X8 52 Pulse input terminal of the torque limit 2 valid only for 53 Torque reference pulse input terminal valid X7 or X8 only for X7 or X8
156. and 32 bits double characters So the data of both lengths shall be considered when reading writing the parameters There are two modes in which the drive parameters are accessed to including 16 bit mode and 32 bit mode that is the user can read write the parameters with 16 bits or 32 bits as the unit separately The 16 bit mode and 32 bit mode are identified through the start register address of the request frame If the highest byte of the address is 0 the reading writing shall be done in the 16 bit mode otherwise they shall be done in the 32 bit mode As shown in the following table Start register address Access mode Remarks BIT15 BIT14 BITO 0 Actual address of the start parameter 16 bit 1 Actual address of the start parameter 32 bit When accessing to the parameters in the 32 bit mode as the unit of the register of the request frame is 16 bits and each parameter of 32 bits needs two registers of 16 bits the number of registers shall be set correctly The number of registers in the request frame shall be twice of that of the parameters to be accessed to otherwise it will return to the abnormal response frame 1 Reading operation The 16 bit access mode is as described above For the 32 bit access mode the unit of the data returned is 32 bits As shown in the following table reading 4 continuous function codes with P01 01 as the start address the slave address is 5 279 Requ
157. andard RS485 commmunication port DCL DC reactor Braking unit and resistor External optional part External optional part C BO woo el oc l XR i i 3 phase q L z eo 50 60Hz X TB w SVM mO P24 PLC ooo TESEI E EA if nction i GND Muitetunction input x1 DC voltage current meter i E AO1AO2 ao KH Multi function input 2 0 0 20mA Multi function input 3 6 AO2 KN Voltage current signal EEF x 0 10V Multi function input 4 x4 P246 _ Multi function input 5 Frequency meter MUA REEE x5 y1 open collector output ti function inpu X6 m _ 0 24V pulse signal output Multi function input 7 COM ANA X7 Multi function input 8 2 x8 COM Y2 Output 2 Bidirectional open collector output 10 AI1AI2 Analog input 0 20mA mooo ANAR mO TA 10 0 10V rg Programmable relay output GND Oe TC mc Ag m O BRA Analog differential input Programmable relay Als output 10v 10V Ls o BRC RS485 Standard RS485 PE lt lt commmunication RS485 port Fig 3 4 Basic wiring diagram 2 Note 1 For Al1 and Al2 the input voltage signal or the current signal can be selected via the jumper The function code P10 00 shall be cha
158. aoe x Incremental card Revolver card SinCos card Incremental PG card X1 port definition Pin Signal name Signal description Pin Signal name Signal description 1 GND Ground 9 W Encoder W signal 2 VCC 5V power output 10 W Encoder W signal 3 Z Encoder Z signal 11 V Encoder V signal 4 Z Encoder Z signal 12 V Encoder V signal 5 B Encoder B signal 13 U Encoder U signal 6 B Encoder B signal 14 U Encoder U signal 42 7 A Encoder A signal NC Empty 8 A Encoder A signal Shell Shield Shield Resolver PG card X1 port definition 3 EXC Encoder EXC signal 4 EXC Encoder EXC signal 9 SIN Encoder SIN signal 10 SIN Encoder SIN signal 13 COS Encoder COS signal 14 COS Encoder COS signal Shell Shield Shield SinCos PG card X1 port definition Pin Signal name Signal description Pin Signal name Signal description 1 GND Ground 9 SC Encoder SC signal 2 VCC 5V power output 10 SC Encoder SC signal 3 NC Empty 11 SB Encoder SB signal 4 NC Empty 12 SB Encoder SB signal 5 SR Encoder SR signal 13 SA Encoder SA signal 6 SR Encoder SR signal 14 SA Encoder SA signal 7 SD Encoder SD signal 15 NC Empty 8 SD Encoder SD signal Shell Shield Shield Common X2 port definition
159. are interlocked that is the drive will not respond to the jog command in the running status and vice versa 5 Three wire operation control It is enabled only under the terminal running command reference mode P02 02 1 please refer to P09 08 for the using method 6 Multi stage reference terminal 1 7 Multi stage reference terminal 2 8 Multi stage reference terminal 3 9 Multi stage reference terminal 4 When P13 00 0 the multi stage reference means multi stage frequency reference By combining the ON OFF options of these function terminals the maximum of 15 step speed running curve can be defined Table 6 7 Table of multi speed running options K4 K3 K2 K Frequency setting OFF OFF OFF OFF Common running frequency OFF OFF OFF ON Multi stage frequency 1 OFF OFF ON OFF Multi stage frequency 2 OFF OFF ON ON Multi stage frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF Multi stage frequency 4 OFF ON OFF ON Multi stage frequency 5 OFF ON ON OFF Multi stage frequency 6 OFF ON ON ON Multi stage frequency 7 ON OFF OFF OFF Multi stage frequency 8 ON OFF OFF ON Multi stage frequency 9 ON OFF ON OFF Multi stage frequency 10 ON OFF ON ON Multi stage frequency 11 ON ON OFF OFF Multi stage frequency 12 ON ON OFF ON Multi stage frequency 13 ON ON ON OFF Multi stage frequency 14 ON ON ON ON Multi stage frequency 15 174 When P13 00 1 the multi stage reference
160. ation multiple acceleration deceleration time switching auto tuning S curve acceleration deceleration slip compensation MODBUS communication drooping control torque control position control torque control mode Key functions speed control mode position control mode switching automatic restart DC braking dynamic braking simple PLC dwell function two sets of motor parameters switching spindle accurately stop spindle tool change rigid tapping spindle swing reaming absolute positioning relative positioning spindle indexing Basic frequency 0 01Hz 3000 0Hz Product Startup frequency 0 00Hz 60 00Hz functions Digital panel setting terminal UP DN setting host device Frequency setting mode communication setting analog setting AI1 AI2 AI3 terminal pulse setting Acceleration deceleration time 0 1 3600 0 unit can be selected among 0 1s s and min 7 Models of 75kW and below have built in braking unit as Dynamic braking capacity i standard and the braking rate is 0 0 100 0 Initial frequency 0 00Hz 60 00Hz DC braking capacity Braking time 0 1s 30 0s Braking current 0 100 for HD according to the nominal rated current of the servo drive Pluggable please refer to the introduction of terminal functions Terminal functions r for details Protection Refer to Protection function section for details function 293 7 5kW and below 295 45kW and below 298 Eficiency 55kW and above
161. ation of any function code is invalid for example the parameter value is invalid the parameter cannot be changed etc the error message will be returned and none of the parameters can be changed when writing several control parameters if the writing operation of any parameter is invalid for example the parameter value is invalid the parameter cannot be changed etc the operation will return from the storage address of the first fault this parameter and its following parameters cannot be changed normally but the parameters before it can be written normally and the error message will be returned 2 For some special function codes 0x06 and 0x41 have the same function and 0x10 and 0x43 have the same function When operating power on again after power off the parameters will be saved These function codes are as show in the following table 284 Function code Function description P00 03 Parameter protection setting P02 01 Motor selection P09 00 P09 07 Input terminals X1 X8 function selection P02 04 Main reference frequency selection P02 06 Main reference amp auxiliary reference frequency control P13 16 PLC running mode P03 00 Rated power of motor 1 P03 12 Rated power of motor 2 P03 04 Rated rotating speed of motor 1 P03 16 Rated rotating speed of motor 2 P98 07 Drive series selection manufacturer parameters 3 Some control parameters cannot be stored into the nonvolatile memory c
162. be output according to the setting of PO6 23 P06 25 25 Positioning completed Running state when choosing the position control and position deviation is less than or equal H01 42 corresponding indication signal will be output 26 Positioning close Running state when choosing the position control and position deviation is less than or equal H01 43 corresponding indication signal will be output 27 Reserved 28 Position tolerance alarm Running state when choosing the position control and position deviation is greater than or equal H01 44 position tolerance detection range and H01 45 position tolerance alarm select 0 valid corresponding indication signal will be output 30 Spindle positioning back to zero completed This signal will be output after spindle positioning back to zero completed 31 Spindle indexing completed This signal will be output after spindle indexing completed 34 Drive FWD REV indication terminal Corresponding indication signal will be output according to the actual running direction of the drive 35 Motor 1 and 2 indication terminal Corresponding indication signal will be output according to the currently selected motor 36 Communication card ON OFF signal 37 Positioning position arrived 189 38 Positioning position 2 arrived 39 Positioning position 3 arrived 40 Positioning position 4 arrived 41 Positioning position 5 arrived 42 Positioning position 6 arrived 43 Positioning po
163. bit AD inputs 45 Chapter 4 Quick Operation Guide for Servo Drive 4 1 Servo drive operation panel 4 1 1 Introduction to servo drive operation panel o FWD m m Oo o REV ALARM QUICK BASIC o o o o A v mis r min DIGITAL PANEL STOP RUN RESET Fig 4 1 Schematic diagram of operation panel 4 1 1 1 LED description Table 4 1 LED description LED symbol Name Meaning Color On Current parameter displayed represents the running frequency Hz Frequency LED Green Flash Current parameter displayed represents the frequency set Unit On Current parameter displayed represents A Current LED Green LED the current On Current parameter displayed represents V Voltage LED Green the voltage On Current parameter displayed represents m s Line speed LED Green the line speed 46 On Current parameter displayed represents r min Rotating speed LED the rotating speed Green On In the stop status it means the drive has forward running command FWD Forward running LED In the running status it means the drive is running forward Flash The drive is switching from FWD to REV Green On In the stop status it means the drive has reverse running command Status REV LED Reverse running LED In the running status it means the drive is running reversely Flash The drive is switching from REV to FWD Green ALARM Alarm LED On The drive enters the
164. bled in the case of constant speed operation When the auto current limiting acts the output frequency may change For the situations requiring stable output frequency at constant speed operation the auto current limiting function shall not be used When the auto current limiting is enabled because of the low setting of the current limiting level it may affect the overload capacity of the drive P97 12 Grounding short circuit detection upon power up 0 1 1 0 Disable the grounding short circuit detection upon power up 1 Enable the grounding short circuit detection upon power up The grounding short circuit detection upon power up means that the drive automatically detects whether there is any grounding short circuit on the output side upon power up If any the drive will display Er GdF fault which can not be reset Please power off troubleshoot the detected grounding short circuit on the output side and power up again This function is available for drives of power of 7 5kW or below aE TWD With the fault auto reset function the faults in the operation can be automatically reset according to the preset times and interval When 0 is selected for the auto reset times it indicates that auto reset is disabled and immediate fault protection shall be triggered Note 1 The inverter module protection Er drv and external equipment fault Er EFT do not have auto reset function 2 During the reset interval the output is loc
165. c Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 1 000 mode mode timer timer 4 4 120 H01 31 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 7 0 001s 1 000 mode mode timer timer 5 5 H01 32 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 1 000 mode mode timer timer 6 6 H01 33 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 1 000 mode mode timer timer 7 7 H01 34 Automatic Automatic 0 600 00s operation operation 0 001s 1 000 mode mode timer timer 8 8 H01 35 Positioni Positioni 0 100 0 of i fi ositionin ositioning of maximum frequency 0 1 20 0 g speed speed H01 36 Positionin Positioning 0 1 300 00s g acceleration g 0 01s 2 00 accelerati time on time H01 37 Positionin Positioning 0 1 300 00s g deceleration x i 0 01s 2 00 decelerati time on time H01 38 Positionin Positioning Unit place The current reference g status status position parameter parameters 1 8 7 00H 00H Tens place The current position of the positioning completed 1 8 H01 39 Spindle Spindle 0 0 360 0 swing swing angle 0 1 30 0 angle H01 40 Spindle Spindle 0 00 100 00Hz swing swing speed 0 01 5 00 speed H01 41 Spindle Spindle 0 00 60 00S swing swing accelerati acceleration 0 01 1 00 on and and decelerati deceleration on time time H01 42 Position Position 0 10000 positioning positioning 1comma 1 complete complete nd unit range range H01 43 Position Position
166. cable to the parameter of type with the writing range from 32768 to 32767 and the parameter of type II with the writing range from 0 to OxFFFF The writing operation of other parameters shall adopt the 32 bit mode 2 For the parameter of type I when the value of 16 bits is written into the parameter with an actual length of 32 bits in the 16 bit mode the actual written value is the expanded value The principles for the length expansion are as follow expanding according to the highest bit of the 16 bit parameter value to be written if the highest bit is 1 the 16 high bits will be filled with OxFFFF otherwise they will be filled with 0x0000 If the expanded value is within the value range of the parameter the value is valid and it is allowed to change the parameter then the value can be written successfully There is no need to expand the parameter of type II and they are independent of the values of the 16 high bits 3 In the 32 bit access mode no matter the actual length is 16 bits or 32 bits as long as the value to be written is within the value range of the parameter the value is valid and it is allowed to change the parameter then the value can be written successfully 4 To change the parameter with an actual length of 16 bits in the 16 bit mode please refer to the description above 8 Cautions 1 For the command codes 0x10 and 0x43 when writing several function code parameters of the drive continually if the writing oper
167. cc time of stage 3 d2 Dec time of stage 2 1 Freq of stage 1 f2 Freq of stage 2 3 Freq of stage 3 Fig 6 69 PLC start mode 1 2 Continue to run from the running frequency of the stop or fault moment If it is stopped caused by a stopping command or fault during operation the drive will not only automatically record the current running time but also the running frequency of the stop moment when restarted it will be restored to the running frequency of the stop moment and then continue the remaining running time as shown in Fig 6 70 J Note The difference between the mode 1 and 2 is that latter can record the running frequency of the stop moment and continue to run from this frequency after restarting Stopping signal Output freq Hz f1 i a de j i ia d2 Be G2 fo a Stage 1 Operating J Remnant time of Time time of i stage 2 stage 2 a1 Acc time of stage 1 a2 Acc time of stage 2 a3 Acc time of stage 3 d2 Dec time of stage 2 f1 Freq of stage 1 f2 Freq of stage 2 f3 Freq of stage 3 Fig 6 70 PLC start mode 2 Hundreds place Storage selection of PLC status parameter upon power down 0 No storage The PLC running status will not be saved upon power down and it will restart from the first section after power on 1 Save the stage and frequency at the moment of power down 214 Record PLC running status upon power down including the stage of the power down moment running frequenc
168. ce 2 H01 12 Multi stage reference 2 OFF OFF ON H01 13 P13 02 Internal position reference 3 H01 14 Multi stage reference 3 OFF ON OFF H01 15 P13 03 Internal position reference 4 H01 16 Multi stage reference 4 OFF ON ON H01 17 P13 04 Internal position reference 5 H01 18 Multi stage reference 5 ON OFF OFF HO01 19 P13 05 Internal position reference 6 H01 20 Multi stage reference 6 ON OFF ON H01 21 P13 06 Internal position reference 7 H01 22 Multi stage reference 7 ON ON OFF H01 23 P13 07 Internal position reference 8 H01 24 Multi stage reference 8 ON ON ON H01 25 P13 08 If H01 04 select 1 after start positioning internal position reference 1 is reached and maintained automatic operation mode timer 1 time set by H01 27 starts automatically positioning to the next position internal position reference 2 until the final positioning position reference 8 When using the internal position reference multi point positioning positioning speed corresponding to multi stage speed 1 8 P13 01 P13 08 Positioning acceleration time is H01 36 positioning deceleration time is H01 37 Positioning direction of each position is determined by function code H01 26 When the spindle positioning mode unit place of H01 00 select 1 indexing the spindle indexing terminal terminal function 87 88 forms the corresponding indexing angle indexing command is pulse can continuously perform indexing control
169. channel selection Command channel selection 0 Keyboard control 1 Terminal control 2 Communication control 3 Bus control including bus communication card and PLC card reserved P02 03 Running direction setting Running direction setting 0 Forward running 1 Reverse running P02 04 Main reference frequency source selection Main reference source selection 0 Digital reference 1 Keyboard A V reference 1 Digital reference 2 Terminal UP DN reference 2 Serial port communication reference 3 Al analog reference 4 Terminal PULSE reference 5 Internal PLC running 6 Process closed loop PID 7 Multi speed 8 PLC or bus reference reserved 9 Extended PG2 pulse reference P02 05 Digital setting of main Main reference frequency P02 17 P02 16 0 01Hz 50 00 68 reference setting frequency Unit place of LED Main digital frequency saving control 0 Save when power down 1 Do not save when power down Tens place of LED Main digital frequency control when stop 0 Maintained when stop 1 Reset when stop Hundreds place of LED Auxiliary Main amp i eg Fi Main amp digital frequency saving control auxiliary AA auxiliary 0 Save when power down po2 o6 erence reference 1 0000 j digital 1 Do not save when power down frequency frequency contral Thousands place of LED control Auxiliary dig
170. ck especially where the PG is not installed on the motor shaft directly an Note PG refers to the photoelectric measuring pulse encoder 1 When selecting the vector control mode be sure to enter the correct nameplate parameters of the controlled motor and conduct the auto tuning to get the correct motor parameters Once the auto tuning process is executed normally the motor parameters set will be saved in the control panel for the future control 2 The parameters of the speed regulator shall be set correctly to ensure sound steady dynamic control status For the setting and adjustment of the parameters of the rotating speed regulator please refer to introductions to parameters of P05 and PO6 134 3 When selecting the vector control mode please note one drive can drive one motor only The capacity of the drive shall not be far from that of the motor the power of the motor it shall be two classes lower or one class higher that that of the drive Otherwise the control performance will decrease or the drive system can not run normally 4 When vector control with PG or V F control with PG is selected the PG encoder parameters of Group P04 shall be set properly 5 When V F control is selected the special function codes under V F control parameters of Group P07 shall be set properly Pozoi 10 0 Motor 1 1 Motor 2 The parameters of motor 1 and motor 2 correspond to the function codes of Gr
171. code H00 02 H00 03 Position command acceleration deceleration time constant 0 0 50 0ms 0 Position command low pass filter time constant after the host device pulse reference sent commands even start when the servo motor is running synchronous operation can begin smoothly HO00 04 Electronic gear molecular 0 65535 1024 H00 05 Electronic gear denominator 0 65535 1024 By setting function code H00 04 H00 05 the pulse command becomes the amount of movement of the motor such as a pulse represents 10um In the control you can not take into account the mechanical reduction ratio and the number of encoder pulses The following are examples Assuming 2500 lines encoder the absolute position of the motor rotated one revolution is 5mm the distance 5mm corresponding to 10000 2500 x 4 pulses An existing workpiece need to be moved a distance of 8mm the number of pulses required to move is 8 5 x 10000 assuming command unit is 1um directly set the position pulse 8000 and set the electronic gear ratio 8 5 x 10000 8000 2 1 Therefore setting the function code H00 04 2 H00 05 1 tO Note Pulse following control if the encoder line number is 2500 denoted as F Unit pulse while required number of pulses for the motor per revolution is f Unit pulse then the molecular of electronic gear H00 04 and denominator of electronic gear H00 05 must satisfy F f H00 04 H00 05 228 H00 07 Pulse clear mode 0 12H 00
172. command Fig 6 61 Description of the jog running parameter As shown in Fig 6 61 t1 is the jog acceleration and deceleration time P11 16 of actual running t2 is the jog time and t3 is the jog interval time P11 17 f is the jog running frequency P11 18 The jog acceleration and deceleration time t of actual running is determined by the following equation t P1116 x P11 18 P02 15 The jog interval time P11 17 is the waiting time interval from canceling the jog command last time to the next valid jog command In the interval the jog command will not make the drive operate The drive operates at zero frequency of the non output If the jog command persists the jog command will be executed after the interval The jog command is executed immediately after the jog interval B Note 1 The jog running starts and stops according to start mode 0 and stop mode 0 The unit for the acceleration and deceleration time is second by default 2 The operation panel control terminal and serial port can perform the jog control P1119 P11 20 P11 21 P11 22 IPL 2S P11 24 Upper limit of skip frequency 1 Lower limit of skip frequency 1 Upper limit of skip frequency 2 Lower limit of skip frequency 2 Upper limit of skip frequency 3 Lower limit of skip frequency 3 206 P11 20 3000 00Hz 0 00 0 00 P11 19 Hz 0 00 P11 22 3000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 P11 21 Hz 0 00 P11 24 3000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 P11 23
173. constant of motor 1 00 000 65 000 depending on model Mutual inductance or q axis inductance of motor 1 0000 0 2000 0 depending on model 0 1 999 9A depending on model Stator resistance of motor 1 P03 07 P03 08 P03 09 o N em S oO a P03 10 No load current Ip of motor 1 When the tens place of P02 00 is 0 i e motor 1 is selected as the asynchronous motor the meanings of the above motor parameters are shown in Fig 6 10 R JXu R IXa op gt I L U re R i x Fig 6 10 Equivalent circuit diagram for asynchronous motor in steady state The Ri X11 R2 X21 Xm loin Fig 6 10 respectively indicate the stator resistance stator leakage inductive reactance rotator resistance rotator leakage inductive reactance mutual inductive reactance and no load current Function code P03 07 is the sum of leakage inductive reactance of the stator and rotator If the parameters of the asynchronous motor are known please write the actual values into P03 06 P03 09 P03 10 is the no load current of asynchronous motor You can directly enter the no load current value If the motor parameter auto tuning is conducted the set values of PO3 06 P03 10 will be refreshed after the normal completion of the auto tuning 143 After changing the motor power P03 00 the drive will set the parameters of PO03 02 P03 10 to be the default parameters of the motor The rated voltage of motor 1 P03
174. control If the terminal function is enabled it switches to the torque control If P06 00 is set as 1 and the terminal function 47 is disabled it is under the torque control If the terminal function is enabled it switches to the speed 159 control Please refer to the description of the terminal function of Multi functional terminals PO9 00 P09 07 47 speed control torque control switching terminal P06 01 Torque control mode selection 0 111H 0 Hundreds Tens Unit Torque command selection 0 Torque referenc 1 Torque current reference Selecting positive direction of torque 0 FWD driving direction is positive 1 REV driving direction is positive Selection for switching from speed control to torque control 0 Switching directly 1 Switching once over the torque switching point of P06 05 Fig 6 24 Torque control mode Unit place Torque command selection 0 Torque reference The reference value shows the percentage of the torque 1 Torque current reference The reference value shows the percentage of the torque current The torque current and the torque reference are different in the flux weakening area Tens place Selecting positive direction of torque 0 FWD driving direction is positive 1 REV driving direction is positive The positive direction of torque can be switched through the terminal setting the terminal function as No 48 functi
175. cording to the stop mode 45 Auxiliary reference frequency reset It is only valid for the digital auxiliary frequency P02 07 1 2 3 When this function terminal is enabled the auxiliary frequency reference will be cleared and the set frequency is completely determined by the main reference 46 Pre magnetizing command terminal Reserved 4T Speed control and torque control switching terminal This function shall be used together with the speed torque control function code of Group P06 00 Under the vector control mode the switching between the speed control mode and torque control mode can be realized through this terminal If P06 00 is set as 0 and the terminal function is disabled it is under the speed control if the terminal function is enabled it will switch to the torque control mode If P06 00 is set as 1 and the terminal function is disabled it is under the torque control if the terminal function is enabled it will switch to the speed control mode 48 Torque direction switching terminal for torque control 179 When the drive is under the torque control mode this terminal function is enabled and it can change the torque direction of the torque reference 49 Torque offset selection terminal When this terminal function is enabled the torque offset set by the function code of P06 18 will be added to reference frequency 50 Al torque offset retention When this terminal is enabled the Al input at this time will be conve
176. correctly E Stop suddenly by pressing the See the function definition of the STOP key mergency sto gency StoP STOP key in P00 04 Er EFT or external External fault emergency stop After the external fault is revoked release device fault terminal is enabled the external fault terminal EEPROM p The read write error of the control Reset by pressing the STOP RESET key Er EEP read write parameters occurs seek for service support fault The baud rate is set improperly Set the baud rate properly er Reset by pressing the STOP RESET key Serial port communication error Abnormal remote seek for service support Er SC1 serial port The fault alarm parameters are 7 A communication set iiApropen Modify the P15 03 and P97 00 settings Check if the host device is working and if The host device does not work ae the wiring is correct The grid voltage is too low Check the grid voltage Replace the contactor of the main circuit The contactor is damaged Abnormal seek for service support Er rLy contactor The power up buffer resistance is damaged Replace the buffer resistance seek for service support The control circuit is damaged Seek for service support 251 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code Input phase loss Check the input R S T wiring The wirings or the plug in units of a Check them and rewiring the control board loos
177. crease compensation can be provided for the output voltage P07 07 is relative to the maximum output voltage When it is set as 0 it is automatic torque increase when it is set as a non zero value it is manual torque increase as shown in Fig 6 27 P07 08 is used to define the percentage of the cut off frequency for the manual torque increase relative to the basic running frequency Please refer to the fz in Fig 6 27 The cut off frequency is applicable to any V F curve determined by P07 00 Output voltage Vmax Vb Output freq fz fb Vb Manual torque boost Vmax Max output voltage fz Cut off freq for torque boost f b Basic operating freq Fig 6 27 Torque increase the increase amount is the shaded part amp Note 1 Improper setting of this parameter may cause motor over temperature or over current protection 2 For the definition of fz please refer to function code P07 08 3 When driving the synchronous motor it is recommended to use the manual torque increase mode and adjust the V F curves according to the motor parameters and relevant applications 4 The maximum output voltage Vmax corresponds to the motor rated voltage so it is necessary to correctly set the motor rated voltage based on the motor selected P07 09 Motor 2 V F curve setting 0 19 0 167 P07 10 Motor 2 V F frequency 3 P07 12 P03 15 0 00 P07 13 100 0 0 0 P07 14 P07 10 0 00 P07 11 Motor 2 V F voltage 3 P07 12 M
178. ction of the digital output terminal 6 11 Analog input output terminal parameters Group P10 The analog input Al1 AI3 and pulse input can be used as different channel references For the function selection of the analog input channel please refer to the setting of the function code of Group P10 01 193 For the function selection of the pulse input please refer to the setting of the X7 and X8 terminal input functions For example when Al1 Al2 Al3 or the pulse frequency PULSE input is selected as the frequency reference channel the relationship between the reference frequency and the set frequency is as shown in Fig 6 45 take Al1 as the main frequency reference channel P02 04 L Filter L Curve selection p Curveset p Set frequenc P10 02 P10 04 P10 05 P10 06 P10 21 ai P10 01 Fig 6 45 The relationship between the reference channel input and the set frequency After the analog reference signal is filtered the relationship with the set frequency is determined by the linear 1 linear 2 or curve 1 The linear 1 is defined by P10 06 P10 09 The linear 2 is defined by P10 10 P10 13 and the curve 1 is defined by P10 14 P10 21 Take the set frequency as an example both can realize the positive action and reverse action independently as shown in Fig 6 46 The Fig 6 46 shows the correspondence when the inflection point is set on the curve determined by the maximum and mi
179. culati Dependin P03 05 factor of shall POUSEU when calculating 0 001 eae factor the motor parameters with the on model motor 1 nameplates Stator Stator F 3 i Depending P03 06 resistance resistance 0 000 65 000 0 001 on model of motor 1 R1 Leakage i Leakage inductanc a y inductance Ser ase or direct Dependin P03 07 axis 0 0 2000 0 0 1 eis axis on model inductanc inductance e of motor 1 of motor 1 Rotator Rotator resistance resistance P03 08 a p 0 000 65 000 0 001 Depending back EMF back EMF i i i on model constant constant of of motor 1 motor 1 Mutual y Mutual inductanc e or q axis pene Dependin po3 09 09 or q axis 0 0 2000 0 0 1 pencmg inductanc on model inductance e of motor 1 of motor 1 peed No load Dependin P03 10 current Io 0 1 999 94 0 1A panang current lo on model of motor 1 Overload Overload 20 0 110 0 protection protection P03 11 factor of factor of Set action level motor rated 0 1 100 0 motor 1 motor 1 current drive rated current x 100 71 Low speed compensation actual action level set action level x output frequency 30HZ x 45 55 Actual converted current of overload protection sampling current overload protection action level P03 12 Reted Rated Depending power of 0 4 999 9KW 0 1KW power on mode motor 2 aie Rated Dependin P03 13 voltage of O rated voltage of drive P98 04 1V pe
180. current 200mA supply external load 30 Type Terminal Name Function Specification Common terminal of Multi functional Multi functional input terminal Common terminal of X1 X8 PLC is PLC input common Short circuited with P24 upon interally isolated with P24 terminal Common terminal delivery 24V power 2 common terminals in total COM common used together with other COM is internally isolated with GND terminal terminals It can be set as the relay TA TB normally closed TA TC normally TA 7 open output terminal with multiple 4 i Contact capacity functions For details please AC250V 2A COS 1 TB refer to the introduction to the AC250V 1A COS 0 4 Relay output Relay output functions of output terminals DC30V 1A terminal 1 l of P09 20 in 6 10 Digital For operating method please refer to the TC input output parameters description of P09 The over voltage class Group P09 common for the input voltage of the relay output terminal COM terminal is class II It can be set as the relay BRA BRC Normally open BRA output terminal with multiple Contact capacity functions For details please AC250V 2A COS 1 refer to the introduction to the AC250V 1A COS 0 4 Relay output DC30V 1A i Relay output functions of output terminals terminal 2 F yt For operating method please refer to the of P09 21 in 6 10 Digital 3 description of P09 The over voltage class BR
181. d 2 of the drive is as shown in the following table Bit Value Function Remarks 1 Common running BITO 0 Non common running 1 Jog running BIT1 0 Non jog running 1 PLC running BIT2 0 Non PLC running 1 Multiple frequency running BIT3 0 Non multiple frequency running 1 Process closed loop running BIT4 0 Non process closed loop running 1 Swing frequency reserved BITS 0 Non swing frequency reserved 1 Under voltage BIT6 0 Normal voltage BIT7 Reserved BITS Reserved servo running BIT9 Reserved customized running Reserved synchronized speed BIT10 running Others Reserved The bit definition of the status word 3 of the drive is as shown in the following table Bit Value Function Remarks BITO BIT1 Reserved BIT2 Running at zero speed 278 BIT3 Accelerating BIT4 Decelerating BITS Running at constant speed BIT6 Pre exciting BIT7 Setting BIT8 Limiting over current BIT9 Limiting DC over voltage BIT10 Limiting torque BIT11 Limiting speed BIT12 Drive fault BIT13 Speed control BIT14 Torque control BIT15 Position control reserved 7 Expand access mode The standard protocol only supports the register of 16 bits and the above description is also based on the register of 16 bits The parameters of SVM series drive include both 16 bits single character
182. d to rewire the relevant unit Note If this function code is set wrongly the drive will report the PG fault Er PG1 P04 09 Expansion PG signal enabled 000 111H 010 Expansion encoder parameters 151 Hundreds Tens Unit Unit Expansion PG1 Z pulse enabled Tens Expansion PG1 UVW enabled Hundreds Expansion PG2 Z pulse enabled Fig 6 16 Expansion PG signal enabled As the SinCos and resolver code signal contains the absolute position signal no additional absolute position identification signal if the expansion card interface is incremental type set it as Z pulse or UVW signal according to the incremental position P04 10 Expansion PG signal filtering coefficient 0000 9999H 0030 Expansion encoder parameters Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Unit Expansion PG1 high speed filtering times Tens Expansion PG1 low speed filtering times Hundreds Expansion PG2 high speed filtering times Thousands Expansion PG2 low speed filtering times Fig 6 17 Expansion PG signal filtering coefficient It is used to set the filtering times of the feedback speed At the low speed if there is any current vibration noise you can increase the low speed filtering times Otherwise the low speed filtering times shall be decreased to improve the system response features P04 11 Number of puls
183. detected 9 ue 3 Turn off the output after the detected under torque is detected only when the speed is consistent 4 Turn off the output after the under torque is detected during running 0 300 0 Under t 7 SA Under torqu SVC Rated torque of equivalent P06 24 e detection motor 0 1 0 detection value value V F Rated current of equivalent motor Under torq aa Under torqu P06 25 A e detection 0 0 10 0s 0 1 0 0 detection 5 time time Group P07 VF control parameters 0 User customized V F curve 1 Constant torque feature 1 2 Constant torque feature 2 3 Constant torque feature 3 4 Reserved 5 Decrease torque feature 1 Motor 1 Motor 1 V F 6 Decrease torque feature 2 P07 00 VIF curve curve 1 0 E 7 Decrease torque feature 3 setting setting 8 Decrease torque feature 4 9 High starting torque feature 1 10 High starting torque feature 2 11 High starting torque feature 3 12 High starting torque feature 4 13 Reserved 80 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 2 times power curve 18 1 7 times power curve 19 1 2 times power curve Decrease torque feature 3 Motor 1 VIF Motor 1 V F P07 01 P07 03 P03 03 0 01Hz 0 00Hz frequency frequency 3 3 Motort Motor 1 V F P07 02 VIF P07 04 100 0 0 1 0 0 voltage 3 voltage 3 Motor 1 VIF Motor 1 V F P07 03 P07 05 P07 01 0 01Hz 0 00Hz frequency frequency 2 2 Motor t Motor 1 VIF P
184. drive is heavier the drive will automatically reduce the output frequency according to the parameter set via this function to remove some load During trial operation this value can be adjusted gradually from the small value 6 9 Start and stop control parameters Group P08 Different start modes can be adopted for different applications 0 Start from the startup frequency The drive begins to run from the startup frequency P08 02 and accelerate to the set frequency after the startup frequency retention time P08 03 If the motor is still rotating upon the startup of the drive the motor will be automatically braked to low speed before the acceleration 1 Start form the startup frequency after braking 168 DC current is first supplied to perform DC magnetizing and DC braking on the motor The volume and time for the DC injection are set by P08 04 and P08 05 After the DC braking time expires the drive begins to run from the startup frequency P08 02 and accelerate to the set frequency after the startup frequency retention time P08 03 2 Speed tracking The drive will identify the speed of the rotating motor and directly start from the identified frequency The current and voltage are smooth without any impact during the startup P08 01 Startup delay time 0 00 30 00s 0 00s The startup delay time means that the drive begins to run after the startup time P08 01 if there is any running command P08 02 Startup frequency 0 00 60 00Hz 0 00
185. duction rate upon current limiting 0 00 99 99Hz s 10 00 The auto current limiting function refers to automatically limiting the load current to lower than the preset auto current limiting level P97 10 through real time monitoring on the load current so as to prevent the tripping caused by current overshoot This function is especially useful for the loads with large inertia or drastic change 224 The auto current limiting level P97 10 defines the current threshold for the auto current limiting action Its setting range is the percentage relative to the drive rated current The frequency reduction rate upon current limiting P97 11 defines the adjustment rate of the output frequency upon the auto current limiting If the frequency reduction rate upon current limiting P97 11 is too small it is difficult to get out of the auto current limiting state and it may ultimately cause overload fault If its reduction rate is too large the frequency adjustment will be drastic and the drive may be always in the power generation state which will cause over voltage protection The auto current limiting function is always enabled in the acceleration deceleration state and whether it will be enabled in constant speed operation depends on the auto current limiting action selection P97 09 P97 09 0 indicates that the auto current limiting is disabled in the case of constant speed operation P97 09 1 indicates that the auto current limiting is ena
186. e as torque offset 8 Torque command reference When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P06 02 function code setting The analog input meaning is the same as torque offset 9 Main set frequency reference unipolar The meaning of this function is the same as 1 the only difference lies in that the analog input polarity does not affect the running direction of the drive which is determined by P02 03 or the forward and reverse terminals or communication setting A Auxiliary set frequency reference unipolar The meaning of this function is the same as 2 the only difference lies in that the analog input polarity does not affect the direction of auxiliary frequency When the auxiliary frequency can be used as the main reference switching frequency its running direction is determined by P02 03 or the forward and reverse terminals or communication setting B Motor temperature detection The motor temperature resistance switches into the analog voltage input value by hardware processing as the detection value of the motor temperature C V F output voltage offset When the analog input is the voltage signal and the analog input terminal function is the output voltage offset the corresponding output voltage offset is as shown in Fig 6 49 196 Offset voltage Vb VF cay i 10V OV BV OV Analog voltage Vf Fig 6 49 Output voltage offset Assuming that the output voltage corresponding to the s
187. e brake units and drive and between the brake units and brake resistors shall be bunched and the length shall be within 5m If it is longer than 5m twisted pair wire shall be adopted The maximum wire length is 10m 293 Appendix 3 Warranty and Service Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd manufactures motor drive products strictly according to the 1S09001 2008 standard In case of any abnormal product please contact your product provider or the headquarter of Shenzhen Megmeet Drive Technology Co Ltd Our company will provide full technical support service for our customers 1 Warranty period The product is warranted for 18 months from the date of purchase however the warranty date shall not exceed 24 months after the manufacture date recorded in the nameplate 2 Warranty scope During the warranty period any product abnormalities incurred due to our company can be freely repaired or replaced by our company In case of any following situations a certain maintenance fees for the product will also be charged even if it is in the warranty period 1 The damages are caused by fire flood strong lightning strike etc 2 The artificial damages are caused by unauthorized modifications 3 The product is damaged due to fall or in transit after purchasing 4 The damages are caused by using beyond the standard specification requirements 5 The damages are caused by operation and use failing to follow the instruction manual 3
188. e encoder in the wrong direction change the encoder function code P04 you can set encoder direction or swap any two motor wire you can also swap encoder A B phase signal so that the encoder in the correct direction If the frequency is 0 indicating that the encoder is not connected please check the encoder wiring pay attention to the encoder to use the shield and the shield connected to the drive control terminal PE If the frequency is not correct indicating that the number of encoder lines or motor rated speed is set incorrectly change the corresponding function code 7 Reset PG closed loop vector for control mode P02 00 0001 8 Set the frequency range from 0 to the rated frequency observe whether the motor is running smoothly whether there is vibration especially in the vicinity of zero frequency If there are vibration close to zero frequency set the encoder low speed filter parameters and speed loop PI parameter PO5 group until the entire frequency range running smoothly Synchronous motor commissioning 1 Check the drive wiring check the PG card wiring in this case using incremental ABZUVW encoders power on if correct 2 Set PG closed loop vector for control mode P02 00 0011 3 Set PG parameters correctly PG feedback sources P04 00 using expansion cards PG set parameters P04 00 12 4 Set P03 motor parameters correctly and do motor tuning P03 24 5 When the motor tuning first starting DC
189. e is used for setting the voltage level of the drive 0 220V 1 380V 2 400V 3 415V 4 440V 5 460V 6 480V 6 19 Servo control parameters Group HOO H00 00 Servo control switching selection 0 3 0 When servo control switching selection this function code is used to select the servo control mode 0 Non servo control Non servo control position control is not performed 1 Speed torque lt servo control Current is speed or torque control when servo control switching terminal function 89 is valid switch to the servo control 2 Servo lt speed torque control 226 Current is servo control when servo control switching terminal function 89 is valid switch to speed or torque control 3 Servo Control Position control the position reference source is selected by H00 01 In order to select the servo control control mode P02 00 must be set to the closed loop vector control H00 01 Pulse input type setting 0 4132H 0 HO00 01 parameter description please refer to table 6 17 Table 6 17 Pulse input type setting parameter description Parameter Setting va
190. e rated current refer to the thousands AAA of P97 03 97 05 05 Overload pre alarm detection time pre alarm detection time 0 0 60 0s oo 60 0s 5 0 0s This function code defines the output overload pre alarm signal after the time that the drive output current is greater than the overload detection level P97 04 exceeds the setting time When the drive output current is higher than the overload detection level P97 04 the pre alarm detection timing will be gradually increased When the drive output current is lower than the overload detection level the pre alarm detection timing will be gradually decreased When the overload pre alarm status is enabled it means that the drive overload detection timing time exceeds the overload pre alarm detection time Schematic diagram for the overload pre alarm detection function is shown as follows Output current Overload pre alarm detection Time Detect time j 7 time i i Time 7 7 gt Action Enable 4 Cae Time p Fig 6 80 Schematic diagram for the overload pre alarm detection function P97 06 Motor over temperature protection point 0 10 00V 10 00 223 Compare the analog feedback quantity of the thermal sensor installed on the motor with the preset protection threshold P97 06 of the sensor If the feedback quantity is greater than the protection threshold for more than 10s the drive will report the motor over temperature fault Er
191. e reference By X2 terminal of expansion PG card pulse frequency reference m Note The frequency calculation relationship curves for the frequency main reference modes 3 and 4 are determined by the function code of Group P10 When the main frequency reference adopts the analog or pulse reference the positive and negative polarity of the output main set frequency is determined by the selection of the function code of Group P10 which determine whether the reference adopts the analog or pulse value or let it determined by the function code of Group P02 03 In the contrast when the frequency reference is provided under other modes the positive and negative polarity of the main set frequency is determined by P02 03 completely The auxiliary frequency superimposition is not applicable to the output frequency for the main frequency reference modes 5 6 and 7 The calculation of the output frequency for these three modes are independent P02 05 Digital setting of main reference frequency P02 16 P02 17 50 00 When the main set frequency channel is defined as the digital reference P02 04 0 1 2 7 this function parameter represents the initial set frequency of the main set frequency of the drive P02 06 Main amp auxiliary reference digital freq control 0000 1111H 0000 For the main reference amp auxiliary reference digital frequency control the main reference frequency control is only enabled for P02 04 0 1 2 and the auxiliary re
192. e retuned is 16 bit 0x86A0 P01 05 31072 which is different from the actual value 32 bit 0x000186A0 The actual value is returned The 16 low bits are captured and the value retuned is 16 bit 0x 7960 P01 06 31072 which is different from the actual value 32 bit 0x FFFE7960 The actual value is returned 16 bit 0x FFFF P01 07 32 bit 0x0000FFFF Parameter of type Il the 16 high bits are filled with 0 As shown in the above table when reading the parameter with an actual length of 32 bits in the 16 bit mode the value returned may not be equal to the actual value Therefore please note the reading operation of the 16 bit mode is only applicable to parameters with the current value range from 32768 to 32767 and the reading operation of other parameters shall adopt the 32 bit mode 2 Writing operation 1 Command codes 0x06 and 0x41 Both of these command codes supports changing the single parameter of 16 bits and do not support the 32 bit access mode If the highest bit of the start register address in the request frame is 1 it will return to the abnormal information frame indicating that the address is wrong Note 1 The writing operation of the 16 bit mode is only applicable to the parameter of type with the current value range from 32768 to 32767 and the parameter of type II with the current value range from 0 to OxFFFF 2 For the parameter of type I when these two types of commands are used to write the value o
193. e set frequency 133 P02 00 Motor and control mode selection 0000 1313H 0000 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Control mode selection of motor 1 0 Vector control without PG 1 Vector control with PG 2 VIF control without PG 3 V F control with PG Type selection of motor 1 0 Asynchronous motor 1 Synchronous motor Control mode selection of motor 2 0 Vector control without PG 1 Vector control with PG 2 VIF control without PG 3 V F control with PG Type selection of motor 2 0 Asynchronous motor 1 Synchronous motor Fig 6 6 Motor control mode diagram Motor control mode 0 Vector control without PG open loop vector It refers to the running mode of vector control without a speed sensor which is applicable to the cases of high performance generality and speed adjustable driving 1 Vector control with PG It refers to the running mode of vector control with a speed sensor which is mainly used where there are restrict performance requirements such as requirements on the high precision speed control torque control simple servo control etc 2 V F control without PG It can control the voltage frequency rate constantly and adjust all the speed to improve the current speed control system which is especially applicable to where multiple motors are driven by one drive 3 V F control with PG It can be used to control the simple speed feedba
194. e value motor value Mechani Mechanical P06 15 FE Ane F ae 0 30 000kgm2 0 001 0 al inertia inertia Friction Friction 0 50 0 of the rated torque of P06 16 0 1 0 0 torque torque motor Torque Torque compensa compensati P06 17 0 5 3 0 0 1 1 0 tion on coefficient coefficient Torque Torque P06 18 300 0 300 0 0 1 0 0 offset offset Torque Torque offset offset P06 19 0 00 1 00s 0 01s 0 00 startup startup delay delay 0 Over torque detection is disabled 1 Continue to run after the over torque is detected only when Action the speed is consistent selection Action for 2 Continue to run after the P06 20 for over torque over torque during running 1 0 over torqu detected 3 Turn off the output after the e detected over torque is detected only when the speed is consistent 4 Turn off the output after the over torque is detected during running 79 0 0 300 0 Over torqu i Over torque SVC Rated torque of equivalent P06 21 i detection motor 0 1 0 detection valle value V F Rated current of equivalent motor Over torqu Over ti P06 22 we eee 0 0 10 0s 0 1 0 0s detection detection time time 0 Under torque detection is disabled 1 Continue to run after the under torque is detected only Action when the speed is consistent selection 2 Continue to run after the Action for f gt for under torque is detected during P06 23 indenta under torqu Minin 1 0 4 e
195. ease increase the value of P03 25 and tune again It is better to tune more than 3 times If the difference among the three tuning results is below 71CH the tuning is successful Otherwise tune again If the tuning results always differ greatly please check the encoder issues 6 If the auto tuning fails Er TUN error will be reported P03 25 Synchronous motor identification current 0 30 10 This function code is used to control the synchronous motor identification current and the range is 0 30 of the rated current P03 26 Initial angle for installing encoder 0 FFFFH 0 This function code displays the initial angle for installing encoder for the synchronous motor currently used It is used to control the algorithm and the value will be refreshed automatically after tuning P03 27 Initial angle of encoder Z pulse 0 FFFFH 0 This function code displays the initial angle for Z pulse of the synchronous motor currently used P03 28 Synchronous motor type selection 0 1 0 This function code displays the type of the synchronous motor currently used 0 represents SMPM 4 represents IPM 6 5 Encoder parameters Group P04 Tens Unit Unit Motor 1 encoder selection O Local differential encoder 1 X7 X8 double phase pulse input 2 Expansion encoder Tens Motor 2 encoder selection 0 Local differential encoder 1 X7 X8 double phase pulse input 2 Expansion encoder Fig 6
196. ection mode 0 1 0 169 0 Speed set value This is the only one detection mode under the V F mode 1 Speed detection value P08 10 Stop dwell frequency 0 00 150 00Hz 02 00Hz P08 11 Stop dwell frequency retention time 0 00 10 00s 0 00s During the deceleration when it decelerates to the stop DWELL frequency set by P08 10 continues to decelerate after the retention time set by P08 11 for keeping the frequency nP Run commandoFF Fig 6 28 Sequence diagram for DWELL function upon startup stop aa Note The stop speed delay time is invalid for the V F control mode and the stop speed detection mode is valid only when it is the speed detection value P08 09 1 P08 12 Initial frequency for stop DC braking Waiting time for stop DC braking Stop DC braking current 0 00 60 00Hz 0 00Hz P08 13 0 00 10 00s 0 00s P08 14 0 0 100 0 0 0 P08 15 Stop DC braking time 0 00 30 00s 0 00s Begin to inject the initial frequency of the stop DC braking current during the stop process set by P08 12 P08 13 waiting time for the stop braking The time interval from the moment when the running frequency reaches the initial frequency for braking P08 12 till the DC braking is injected during decelerating to stop P08 14 sets the volume of the stop DC braking current which is indicated in a percentage of the rated current of the drive P08 15 sets the action time for the stop DC braking 170 bef
197. ed the password protection will again be triggered to lock the drive 4 1 3 2 Key locking and unlocking Key locking The operation panel can be locked through the function code P00 04 1 In the stop parameter display state press MENU ESC key to enter the first level menu P00 00 2 Press the key to select function code P00 04 3 Press the ENTER DATA key to enter the second level menu 4 Press the gt key to switch to the thousands place 5 Press the key to set the thousands place to be 0 lock all 1 lock all the keys except the STOP key 2 lock all the keys except the SHIFT key or 3 lock all the keys except the RUN amp STOP key 6 Press the ENTER DATA key to confirm and return to the first level menu 7 Press the MENU ESC key to return to the stop parameter display status 8 Press and hold the M key and then press the key three times again to lock the operation panel The above operation steps are shown in the Fig 4 4 52 mm mi a e E josey pons Fig 4 4 Operation example for locking the operation panel keys Key unlocking When all the keys on the operation panel are locked they can be unlocked through the following operation Press and hold the M key and then press the V key for 3 times aa Note No matter how P00 04 is set before the operation panel is in unlocking status upon the power up of the drive 4 1 3 3 Operation panel self detection Before using the op
198. ed for the grounding of the shielded layer of the wire The shielded layer of the analog Shield Connected to the main circuit wiring Shield PE signal wire 485 grounding terminal internally communication wire and motor power wire can be connected to this terminal 10V power To provide 10V reference 10 Allowable maximum output current 10mA supply power for external load 10V power To provide 10V reference 10 Allowable maximum output current 10mA Power supply supply power for external load The reference ground for 10V 10V GND analog signal and 10V 10V Internal isolated with COM power GND power 27 Type Terminal Name Function Specification Analog To receive the single end AN1 single end analog voltage or current input Al1 input with the analog input Input voltage range 10V 10V input voltage current selected via resistance 20kQ resolution 1 4000 the jumper and the Analog Input current range OMA 20mA input corresponding input type Al2 single end resistance 246Q resolution 1 2000 selected by the function code input Al2 P10 00 reference grounding GND Analog voltage Analog input differential For the analog voltage input Al3 or differential input the Al3 is Al3 analog voltage the non inverting input single end terminal and the Al3 is the inpu inverting input terminal Input voltage range 10V 10V input Ana
199. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeaeesaeeseeeeeaeesaeeseneeeneees 172 6 11 Analog input output terminal parameters Group P10 cseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeatenereneneees 193 6 12 Auxiliary function parameters Group P11 eceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceneeeaeeeaeeseeseeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeneeeerenereee 202 6 13 Advanced function parameters Group P12 eeceeeceeseeeeneeeeeeeeneceeeeeaeeseneceeeeeaeenaneeeneseanesereteneees 207 6 14 Multi stage reference and simple PLC parameters Group P13 c ceeceeereeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeereseneees 210 6 15 Communication parameters Group P15 cesceeeceeeeeceeeeeneeceeeceneeeaeeeaeeseeeseneseaeeeaeeeeneseeeeeeresereee 217 6 16 Keyboard display setting parameters Group P16 ccesceeeeeereeeeeeeeeeseneseeeeeneeeaeeeeeeeeaeesnesereeee 218 6 17 Protection and fault parameters Group P9Q7 e cccsceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeaeeseneseeeseneeseeeseneeeatesereseneees 220 6 18 Servo drive parameters Group PQ8 ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeceaeeeaeeeaeeseneeeaeeeaeeseeeseeeseateseneereeed 226 6 19 Servo control parameters Group HOO cceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceneeeaeeeaeeseneseaeesaeeseeeseeeseaeeseresereee 226 6 20 Spindle positioning parameters Group HO1 ecceeeceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeseneseeeseneeeereseeeseneeneresereees 230 6 21 Spindle tapping parameters Group H02 6 22 Peeling function parameters Group H03 Chapter 7
200. effective automatically To change the password Press MENU ESC to enter the password verification status and input the correct original four digit password to enter the parameter editing status Select P00 01 at this moment P00 01 displays 00000 Setting the new password is the same as above To clear the password Press MENU ESC to enter the password verification status and input the correct original four digit password to enter the parameter editing status Select P00 01 at this moment P00 01 displays 00000 The process of clearing password is the same as that of setting new password however you need to input 0000 twice When the password is successfully cleared P Clr is displayed Note Please keep the user password properly This is no user password as default P00 02 LCD display language selection 0 1 0 125 0 Chinese 1 English This function is only enabled for configuring the operation panel of the LCD P0005 ee The setting of this function code determines the protection class of the drive parameters The settings are as follows 0 All the data can be changed 1 Only the main set frequency digital setting P02 05 and this function code can be changed 2 Only this function code can be changed To change other function code settings please set the value of this function code to be 0 first When the parameter is changed to protect the parameter you can set the desired protection class for it
201. ell So for these parameters the command codes 0x41 and 0x06 have the same operation effect as well as 0x43 and 0x10 that is write operation Once power on again after power off the parameters will not be saved Please refer to the control parameter table for details 4 Some internal parameters of SVM drive are reserved which cannot be modified through the communication setting These parameters are as show in the following table Function code Function description P00 00 Menu mode selection P00 06 Parameter copy P03 24 Motor parameter auto tuning 5 The operation of the host device on the user password 1 Managing the read write and function codes of function code parameters of the user password protection except for read the address of the data displayed and display the data switching 2 If the user password is set P00 01 the host device can access to the function code parameters only after decryption write the correct user password to P00 01 but the access to the control parameters and status parameters is not restricted by the user password 3 The host device cannot set change or cancel the user password and only the operation panel is able to conduct these operations The writing operation of P00 01 will be valid only in two situations decrypt with the password and write 0 without the password In other situations the invalid operation information will be returned 4 The ope
202. ency and can be input by X7 or X8 please refer to the definition in the function codes of Group PO9 for details 6 Process closed loop output The process closed loop output is used as the auxiliary reference 7 Expansion bus card reference Set the reference via the expansion bus card CI Note 1 When the auxiliary frequency adopts the reference mode 4 and 5 the positive and negative polarity of the output auxiliary frequency is determined by the selection of the function code of Group P10 which determines whether the reference adopts the analog or pulse value or let it determined by the function code of Group P02 03 2 The main and auxiliary frequency reference channels are mutually exclusive except for the Al channel 3 When the main frequency source selection P02 04 is set as 5 6 or 7 the auxiliary frequency superimposition is not applicable When any of the three is selected the auxiliary frequency source selection P02 07 will be reset and can not be set as non zero data P02 08 Digital setting of auxiliary reference 0 00 3000 00 Hz 0 00 P02 08 is enabled only when P02 07 1 3 and it is the initial value of the auxiliary set frequency under these three modes P02 09 Auxiliary reference coefficient 0 00 9 99 1 00 It is enabled only when P02 07 4 7 For the analog and pulse reference values the auxiliary frequency shall be calculated according to the curve defined in Group P10 first and then calculating the gain
203. ency reference bipolar When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P02 04 function code setting When used as the voltage input and analog input polarity will affect the drive running direction When the analog input is positive the drive will be in forward operation otherwise it will be in reverse running The maximum value of the analog input 10V 20mA corresponds to the maximum output frequency of the drive 2 Auxiliary set frequency reference When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P02 07 function code setting When used as the voltage input and analog input polarity will affect the auxiliary frequency polarity When the analog input is positive the auxiliary frequency will be positive otherwise it will be negative The maximum value of the analog input 10V 20mA corresponds to the maximum output frequency of the drive 3 Torque offset When this function is selected Al torque offset retention function shall be selected for the digital input terminal When used as the voltage input the 10 10V corresponds to the 300 300 of the motor rated torque and the current input 4 20mA corresponds to 0 300 of the motor rated torque Applications in which the analog input is used as the torque offset The Al1 analog input 4 20mA correspondingly indicates the analog reference torque offset 0 300 of the motor rated torque The setting is as follows 1 P10 01 003 Al1 function selection T
204. ends on the thousands place of the function code To unlock the keyboard set the thousands place as 5 press the M key and press the V key three times at the same time then the keyboard will be unlocked set the thousands place as 0 there is no keyboard locking function Emergency stop Using the M key as the emergency stop key When it is used in this way once it is pressed the drive will stop addorcing to the setting time of P08 23 in any running mode Coast to stop The M key is used to coast to stop When it is used in this way once it is pressed the drive will coast to stop in any running mode 4 1 1 3 Status display of operation panel The display status of the SVM operation panel includes stop status parameter display run status parameter display function code parameter editing status display and fault alarm status display 48 1 Stop parameter display status When the drive is in stop the operation panel displays the stop status parameter as shown in Fig 4 2a The lower unit LEDs show the parameter units while the upper QUICK and BASIC combination indicates the current menu mode When the verification menu is selected only the function codes whose parameter value is different from the leave factory value will be displayed You can press the V or key to browse all the function codes whose parameter set value is different from the leave factory value and check which parameters have been
205. ens The auxiliary power supply is P Seek for service support damaged Current detection Er CUr tine The Hall device is damaged Seek for service support circuit abnormal The amplifying circuit is Seek for service support abnormal The Al analog input voltage is too Reduce the Al analog input voltage to less high than 12V Reset by pressing STOP RESET key or Severely interfered install a power filter to the input side of the System Er CPU power supply interference DSP read write error of the main Reset by pressing the STOP RESET key control panel seek for service support The parameters for feedback loss Modify the P14 26 setting are set improperly Closed loop Er FbL Feedback wire break Rewiring feedback loss The reference of closed loop See the P14 01 setting and increase the feedback value is too low feedback reference During the frequency main reference or the torque command External i n i selection analog current Check the wiring or adjust the input type of Er EGL reference reference the analog reference the reference signal command lost i tad a signal is disconnected or too low less than 2mA The operation panel parameters Refresh the operation panel data and are incomplete or the operation version use P00 06 1 for uploading the Operation panel panel version is inconsistent with parameters first and then use P00 06 2 or 3 Er CoP parameter main control panel version for downloading copyin
206. equency 1 and switching frequency 2 it means the linear switching of those two sets of PI parameters Increasing the proportional gain P can accelerate the dynamic response of the system but if the P value is too large it is easy to cause the oscillation of the system Decreasing the integral time can accelerate the dynamic response of the system but if the value is too small it is easy to cause the overshoot and oscillation of the system Usually it is better to adjust the proportional gain P first to increase the P value as larger as possible while ensuring no oscillation to the system and then adjust the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response characteristics and small overshoot Let the output of the speed regulator ASR pass the delay filter once to get the torque current reference P05 02 and P05 06 are the time constants of the low speed and high speed loop output filters respectively Generally no modification is needed As default parameters of P05 08 P05 09 are the speed loop low speed PI parameters of motor 2 When the running frequency of motor 2 is less than the ASR switching frequency 3 P05 10 P05 08 P05 09 are enabled The speed loop high speed PI parameters of motor 2 are the same as that of motor 1 P05 04 P05 05 When only motor 1 is in control PO5 08 P05 09 can be used as the speed loop PI parameters of motor 1 when its running frequency is higher than the ASR switching frequency 3 P05 10 1
207. eration area Acceleration area 4 gt a gt a Cutter Cuter Fig 6 84 Peeling wheel acceleration deceleration switching point angle H03 09 Peeling knife azimuth 0 0 360 0 0 0 When peeling point detection device has a peeling signal the angle the blade of the peeling knife from the actual peeling point calculated in accordance with the direction of peeling rotation ranging from 0 to 360 degrees H03 10 Peeling length trimming 0 00 0 99mm 0 00mm 239 If peeling length need to be accurate to 0 1mm you can set this function code while the system actual peeling length deviates from one side of set peeling length is larger you can set H03 10 to reduce systematic errors improve peeling accuracy H03 11 This function code is reserved H03 12 Feeding linear speed 0 0 300 0m min 0 0m min H03 13 Peeling linear speed 0 0 300 0m min 0 0m min For real time monitoring feeding linear speed and peeling linear speed the parameter is read only H03 14 Peeling maximum linear speed 0 0 300 0m min 0 0m min In the process of peeling maximum equivalent linear speed of peeling knife blade the parameter is read only H03 15 0260000 0 Real time display the number of peeling that is the number of cut materials the parameter is read only This function code is reserved H03 17 300 00 300 00mm 0 00 Real time display length difference between the actual peeling length and the set peeling length the parameter is read only 240
208. eration deceleration time 3 3 Acceleration deceleration time 4 Stage 1 Slated P13 18 running 9 i 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 y running time time St 2 S 2 P13 19 aoe 299 The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 2 P13 20 running Stage2 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 d running time time St 3 S 3 P13 21 od ae The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting St 3 eos Stage 3 P13 22 running aaa 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 running time time Stage 4 Stage 4 x P13 23 The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 4 age Stage 4 P13 24 running se 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 f running time time Stage 5 Stage 5 A P13 25 A The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 5 P13 26 running Stage5 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 f running time time St 6 S 6 P13 27 age S99 The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 6 P13 28 running Stage6 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 running time time St 7 S 7 P13 29 299 aoe The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 7 P13 30 running Stage7 9 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 running time time P13 31 Stage 3 3 393 2 The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting Stage 8 P13 32 running Stage8 9 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 gt running time time St 9 S 9 P13 33 ea aoe The same as stage setting 1 1 000 setting setting P13 34 Stage 9 Stage 9 0 0 6500 0 0 1 20 0 103
209. eration first otherwise equipment damage or human injury may be caused 4 2 2 Operating status of the servo drive The operating states of the SVM include the stop status running status and motor parameter auto tuning status 1 Stop status If there is no running command input when the drive is started and initialized or the stop command is executed during the operation the drive will enter the stop status immediately 2 Running status The drive will enter the running status after receiving the running command 3 Motor parameter auto tuning status If there is any running command after the function code P03 24 is set as 1 or 2 the drive will enter the motor parameter identifying status It will enter the stop status after the parameter identification is completed 4 2 3 Servo drive control mode and running mode Control mode The SVM drive has 4 control modes which are set by the function code P02 00 1 Vector control without PG refers to the vector control without the speed sensor The PG is not installed but it has high control performance low frequency high torque and high constant speed precision It can realize precise motor torque control and speed control It is generally used in the applications with high robustness requirement which the V F control mode cannot satisfy 2 Vector control with PG PG needs to be installed To ensure the control performance the PG needs to be installed on the controlled motor shaft It
210. eration panel you can check if the digital tube LED and key functions are normal through the self detection function of the SVM operation panel Operate according to the following steps 1 Press and hold the ENTER DATA key in the stop status and then press the STOP RESET key to enter the self detection status During the self detection the 5 LED digital tubes on the operation panel will turn on one by one and then all the LEDs will turn on with the LED displaying 00000 2 Press the key ENTER DATA key M key V key gt key RUN key and STOP RESET key in turn In normal situation when the key is pressed the LED display will change from 00000 to 11111 and change correspondingly following the key pressing until it displays 77777 when the STOP RESET key is pressed 3 Press the MENU ESC key and the LED will return to the stop parameter display status The self detection is completed The above operation steps are shown in Fig 4 5 ens Hs A Fig 4 5 Self detection example of LED operation panel 53 4 1 3 4 Restore to leave factory values For example set P00 05 2 the parameters will restore to the leave factory values The leave factory value setting will make the drive parameters restore to the leave factory values 1 In the stop parameter display status press MENU ESC key to enter the first level menu P00 00 2 Press key to change P00 00 to P00 05 3 Press the ENTER DATA key to ente
211. ers Content read 2 Number of registers Parameter value 266 If the operation fails it will return to the abnormal response frame The abnormal response frame includes the error code and exception code In which the error code command code 0x80 and the exception code indicates the error cause Abnormal response frame format Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Error code 1 Command code 0x80 Exception code 1 The exception codes and their meanings are as follows Exception code Meaning 0x01 Invalid command code 0x02 Invalid register address 0x03 Data error the data is not within the upper lower range Slave operation failure including the error caused by that the data is within the upper lower range wads but it is invalid The command is valid and in process It is mainly used to save the data into the nonvolatile memory Kai cell The salve is busy please try again later It is mainly used to save the data into the nonvolatile Sa memory cell Operation not supported mainly refer to the control parameter and status parameter for example oe do not support reading the property leave factory value and upper lower limit The number of registers in the request frame is wrong for example when the operation is 32 byte mi the number of bytes is odd 0x18 Information frame error including information lengt
212. es per revolution of X7 X8 1 9999 1024 This function code will be enabled when X7 X8 are used for the quadrature encoder speed input It can only be used for the closed loop vector control of the asynchronous motor Once it is selected for the speed input the other functions of X7 X8 will be disabled automatically It is set according to the pulses per revolution PPR of the pulse encoder selected P0425 12 Quadrature Quadrature encoding direction of X7 X8 Quadrature encoding direction of X7 X8 of X7 X8 a wo OE a wo OE This function code will be enabled when X7 X8 are used for the quadrature encoder speed input 0 X7 before X8 1 X8 before X7 152 When the motor is running forward X7 is before X8 When the motor is running reversely X8 is before X7 When the wiring sequence between the drive terminal and the PG has the same direction with the wiring sequence between the drive and motor the set value shall adopt 0 FWD otherwise it shall adopt 1 REV The correspondence relation between the wiring directions can be conveniently adjusted by changing this parameter and you do not need to rewire the relevant unit P04 13 Filtering coefficient of X7 X8 00 99H 30 This function code will be enabled when X7 X8 are used for the quadrature encoder speed input Tens Unit Unit X7 X8 High speed filtering times Tens X7 X8 low speed filtering times Fig 6 18 Terminal
213. esponse power it up response The wires of the operation Check the wires and perform the hot panel have poor contact plug again The keys of the operation Replace the operation panel or seek for panel are damaged service support Can not be modified The function code can not be ye eck n Modify it in the stop status in running status modified in running status The function code P00 03 is E E T i i et the 03 as A portion of function setas 1 or2 code can not be modified The function code is actual Actual parameters can not be changed detection value by users TE There is no function The locking function of the response when i See the solutions to the operation panel code can i operation panel takes effect or i MENU ESC key is has no response not be others pressed modified Can not enter the editing state after pressing the MENU ESC key the function code status display is 0000 User password is set Input the user password correctly Seek for service support 257 Symptoms Conditions Possible causes Solutions The drive stops unexpecte dly during operation In the case that there is no stop command the drive stops automatically and the run LED is off Fault alarm occurs Find out the fault causes and reset the fault Asingle cycle of the simple PLC is completed Check the PLC parameter setting There is power supply interruption
214. est frame Value Bytes Description 16 bit mode 32 bit mode 0 0x05 0x05 Slave address 1 0x03 0x03 Command code Start address in the 32 bit mode the highest byte of the 2 3 0x0101 0x8101 start address is 1 Number of registers in the 32 bit mode the number of 4 5 0x0004 0x0008 registers is twice of that of parameters 6 7 CRC verification If the operation is successful the response frame is as follows Value Bytes Description 16 bit mode 32 bit mode 0 0x05 0x05 Slave address 1 0x03 0x03 Command code 2 0x08 0x10 Number of bytes read 3 4 Value P01 01 Value P01 01 Content read 5 6 Value P01 02 16 bit mode 8 bytes in total 7 8 Value P01 03 Value P01 02 32 bit mode 16 bytes in total 9 10 Value P01 04 11 12 Value P01 03 13 14 15 16 Value P01 04 17 18 19 20 If the operation is failed it will return to the abnormal response frame and its format is as shown above There are two types of drive parameters one type of parameters adopts the decimal system and the other type is the variables adopting the hexadecimal system The former is used to indicate the actual variables such as the current voltage frequency power torque percentage etc which shall consider the positive and negative Its data type is int or long The latter is used for the mode selection or the status indication such as displaying the parameters selecti
215. et frequency in the V F curve is Vs the relation between the input analog signal and the offset voltage is as follows The corresponding offset voltage of the 10V OV 4mA analog input Vai is Vb Vt The corresponding offset voltage of the 10V 20mA analog input Va is Vp Vr The drive output voltage Vo VitVp CJ Note The output voltage offset function is enabled only under the V F mode D Output voltage When this function is enabled under V F mode the drive output voltage VO and the output frequency are mutually independent The drive output voltage is not restricted by the V F feature curve of Group P0O7 but is determined by the analog input signal as shown in Fig 6 50 Output voltage Vo Vmax 22 te Almin Alma Analog voltage Fig 6 50 Output voltage curve The horizontal coordinate in the figure is the adjusted analog input signal the vertical coordinate is the drive output voltage value When the input analog voltage is less than 0 the output voltage is 0 E Reserved P10 02 AIl filtering time 0 000 10 000s 0 010s P10 03 Al filtering time 0 000 10 000s 0 010s P10 04 AI3 filtering time 0 000 10 000s 0 010s P10 02 P10 04 defines the channel filtering time constant for the filtering of the input signal The longer the filtering time is the stronger the immunity becomes but the slower the response will become The shorter the filtering time is the faster the response becomes but the
216. eters of P03 14 P03 21 to be the default parameters of the motor The rated voltage of motor 1 P03 13 needs to be set according to the nameplate by the user When the thousands place of P02 00 is 1 i e motor 2 is selected as the synchronous motor the meanings of the above motor parameters are as below the definition of the stator resistance of motor 2 P03 18 is the same as that of the asynchronous motor the leakage inductance or the direct axis inductance of motor 2 P03 19 indicates the direct axis inductance of the synchronous motor the rotator resistance or back EMF constant of motor 2 P03 20 indicates the back EMF constant of the synchronous motor at this time it displays an integer indicating the back EMF voltage for 1000 turns For example P03 08 1000 indicates that the back EMF at 1000 turns of rated rotating speed of the motor is 1000V the mutual inductance or the q axis inductance of motor 2 P03 21 indicates the q axis inductance value the meanings of other parameters are the same as that of the asynchronous motor P03 23 Overload protection coefficient of motor 2 20 0 110 0 100 0 To provide effective overload protection for motors of different models it is necessary to adjust the allowable maximum output current of the drive as shown in Fig 6 13 200 4 gt Overload protection coefficient of motor 160 1 min Time Fig 6 13 Overload protection coefficient setting of
217. eviation exceeds switch to the position loop Hundreds place 0 Receiving new positioning signal in the process of positioning no response Positioning 1 Receiving new positioning signal in the process of positioning positioning the timing selection new position directly Thousands 0 Shutdown place 1 Reverse homing keep zero speed Positioning overrun action 2 Reverse homing shutdown selection H01 03 Homing docking selection 0 FFFFH 0000H Unit place Homing docking 0 Stop at the left side of the origin 1 Stop at the right side of the origin Tens place Encoder installation position 0 Mounted on the motor shaft 1 Mounted on the spindle When the encoder is not mounted on the motor shaft the function code need to be set to 1 and need to set the spindle transmission ratio H01 05 correctly H01 04 Internal positioning starting set 0 1 1 0 Manual by DI terminal selection 1 Auto start When internal single point single positioning if HO1 04 select 0 manual DI terminal selection after enable the drive the motor will not start positioning need enable through terminals terminal function 95 If HO1 04 select 1 auto start after enable the drive automatic start positioning When internal single point multiple positioning if HO1 04 select 0 manual DI terminal selection regardless of how much H01 27 set after the completion of a positioning continue positioning needs t
218. f 16 bits into the parameter with an actual length of 32 bits the actual written value is the expanded value The principles for the length expansion are as follows expanding according to the highest bit of the 16 bit parameter value to be written if the highest bit is 1 the 16 high bits will be filled with OxFFFF otherwise they will be filled with 0x0000 If the expanded value is within the value range of the parameter the value is valid and it is allowed to change the parameter then the value can be written successfully There is no need to expand the parameter of type Il For example assuming that the values of function codes P01 01 and P01 02 are 32 bit date and 16 bit data respectively and they are both parameters of type I when the writing operation on them is successful the data written are as shown in the following table 282 Register Value to be written Actual written value Description address 0x1194 0x00001194 The 16 high bits is filled with 0x0000 P01 01 OxFEOC OxFFFFFEOC The 16 high bits is filled with OxFFFF 0x1194 0x1194 P01 02 OxFEOC OxFEOC 2 Command codes 0x10 and 0x43 These two types of command codes can be used to change multiple function code parameters or control parameters and they support both 16 bit and 32 bit access modes The 16 bit access mode is as described above For the 32 bit access mode the unit of the data to be written is 32 bits As shown in the followin
219. f CRC initialized unsigned char uchCRCLo OxFF low byte of CRC initialized unsigned ulndex index into CRC lookup table while length pass through message buffer ulndex uchCRCLo msg calculate the CRC uchCRCLo uchCRCHi Cerevalue ulndex gt gt 8 uchCRCHi crcvalue ulndex amp Oxff return CuchCRCHi uchCRCLo lt lt 8 Table of CRC values const unsigned int crcvalue 0x0000 0xC1C0 0x81C1 0x4001 0x01C3 0xC003 0x8002 0x41C2 0x01C6 0xC006 0x8007 0x41C7 0x0005 0xC1C5 0x81C4 0x4004 0x01CC 0xC00C 0x800D 0x41CD 0x000F 0xC1CF 0x81CE 0x400E 0x000A 0xC1CA 0x81CB 0x400B 0x01C9 0xC009 0x8008 0x41C8 0x01D8 0xC018 0x8019 0x41D9 0x001B 0xC1DB 0x81DA 0x401A 0x001E 0xC1DE 0x81DF 0x401F 0x01DD 0xC01D 0x801C 0x41DC 0x0014 0xC1D4 0x81D5 0x4015 0x01D7 0xC017 0x8016 0x41D6 0x01D2 0xC012 0x8013 0x41D3 0x0011 0xC1D1 0x81D0 0x4010 0x01F0 0xC030 0x8031 0x41F1 0x0033 0xC1F3 0x81F2 0x4032 286 0x0036 0xC1F6 0x81F7 0x4037 0x01F5 0xC035 0x8034 0x41F4 0x003C 0xC1FC 0x81FD 0x403D 0x01FF 0xCO3F 0x803E 0x41FE 0x01FA 0xC03A 0x803B 0x41FB 0x0039 0xC1F9 0x81F8 0x4038 0x0028 0xC1E8 0x81E9 0x4029 0x01EB 0xC02B 0x802A 0x41EA 0x01EE 0xC02E 0x802F 0x41EF 0x002D 0xC1ED 0x81EC 0x402C 0x01E4 0xC024 0x8025 0x41E5 0x0027 0xC1E7 0x81E6 0x4026 0x0022 0xC1E2 0x81E3 0x4023 0x01E1 0xC021 0x8020 0x41E0 0x01A0 0xC060 0x8061 0x41A1 0x0063 0xC1A3 0x81A2 0x4062 0x0066 0xC1A6 0x81A7 0x4067 0x01A5 0xC065 0x8064 0x41A
220. ference frequency control is only enabled for P02 07 1 3 137 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Main digital freq saving control 0 Save when power down 1 Do not save when power down Main digital freq control when stop 0 Maintained when stop 1 Reset to P02 05 when stop Auxiliary digital freq saving control 0 Save when power down 1 Do not save when power down Auxiliary digital freq control when stop 0 Maintained when stop 1 Reset when stop Fig 6 8 Digital frequency control LED setting Unit place Main digital frequency storage control 0 The set frequency will be saved upon power down When the drive is powered down or under voltage P02 05 will be refreshed automatically with the current actual frequency 1 The set frequency will not be saved upon power down When the drive is powered down or under voltage P02 05 will remain the same frequency Tens place Main digital frequency stop control 0 The set frequency will be maintained upon stop When the drive is stop the set value of the main digital frequency is the final modified value 1 The set frequency will restore to P02 05 upon stop When the drive is stop the set value of the main digital frequency will restore to P02 05 automatically Hundreds place Auxiliary digital frequency storage control 0 The auxiliary frequency will be saved upon power down The auxiliary frequency will be
221. for products of 18 5kW 110 kW 3 Enclosure R9 R10 132kW 280kW Fig 1 4 Outline mounting dimensions for products of 132kW 280 kW Table1 3 Outline mounting dimensions and gross weight Di ti bees a Gross Ene osure Servo drive model A mm B mm H mm W mm D mm mounting weight model Satie 0 5 k a kg SVM 4T0 75 115 218 229 126 174 5 5 4 SVM 4T1 5 R2 SVM 4T2 2 4 115 218 229 126 174 5 5 SVM 4T3 7 4 SVM 4T5 5 R3 137 236 249 155 198 5 5 4 SVM 4T7 5 11 SVM 4T11 R4 186 314 5 330 209 206 6 5 9 SVM 4T15 SVM 4T18 5 R5 SVM 4T22 220 437 5 451 5 284 5 213 6 5 19 SVM 4T30 SVM 4T37 R6 270 549 570 335 267 7 41 SVM 4T45 SVM 4T55 R7 270 579 600 335 292 7 49 SVM 4T75 SVM 4T90 R8 350 705 726 5 452 328 5 12 87 SVM 4T110 SVM 4T132 R9 350 827 5 849 5 500 350 12 154 SVM 4T160 R9P SVM 4T200 370 827 5 849 5 530 350 12 154 SVM 4T220 R10 500 932 956 700 361 5 14 216 SVM 4T280 1 7 Outline and mounting dimensions of operation panel 72 15 FDO RWO ARMO OUE SE 1 amp Fig 1 5 Outline and mounting dimensions of operation panel 1 8 Outline and mounting dimensions of operation panel box The outline dimensions of the box used for mounting operation panel is as shown in Fig 1 6 12 Front Side Back 3D Back
222. frame is as follows Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x08 Sub command code 2 0x0000 0x0030 Data 2 0x0000 0xFFFF If the operation is failed it will return to the abnormal response frame and its format is as shown above The sub command code values supported by the line diagnosis and their meanings are as shown in the following table Sub command Data request Data response Function code Reinitialize the communication make the no response 0x0000 0x0000 mode become disabled 0x0001 Reinitialize the communication make the no response OxFFOO OxFFOO mode become disabled Setting the frame trail of ASCII mode and the new The high byte is new The high byte is new frame trail will replace the original line feeds and it will 0x0003 frame trail and the low __ frame trail and the low not be saved if power off the value of new frame trail byte is 00 byte is OO can neither exceed 0x7F nor equal to 0x3A Setting the no response mode In this mode the slave only respond to the request of reinitializing the 0x0004 0x0000 No response communication the request of sub command code 0x0001 and it will not process or response any other 268 Sub command Data request Data response Function code requests This function
223. frequency observe whether the motor is running smoothly whether there is vibration especially in the vicinity of zero frequency If there are vibration close to zero frequency set the encoder low speed filter parameters P04 10and speed loop PI parameter P05 group Master slave following control commissioning 59 The master is set to speed control mode PAO PAO PBO PBO of the master encoder output X2 respectively connect to RA RA RB RB of the slave encoder interface X2 2 The slave is set to position control mode HO0 02 2000 3 Set H00 04 H00 05 electronic gear numerator denominator when the motor follow pulse train the relationships between the encoder feedback and pulse train is electronic gear ratio 4 For example the master motor is a 4 pole motor the encoder is 1024 lines the slave motor is a 6 pole motor the encoder is 2500 lines To achieve the speed synchronous for the master and slave you need to set P04 07 1024 electronic gear ratio 2500 1024 you can set H00 04 2500 H00 05 1024 5 Adjust the speed loop PI parameters and position loop P parameters H00 08 position loop Kp1 H00 09 position loop Kp2 HO0 10 position loop gain switching mode ensuring that the pulse train tracking process is fast and without overshoot You can set H00 02 pulse command filter time as needed X7 X8 terminal pulse train position control commissioning 1 Set the pulse command input form H00 01 0001 se
224. function is 57 when the terminal function is enabled the drive enter into the swing control function when Spindle swing angle Spindle swing speed Spindle swing acceleration and deceleration time position of 1 8 0 360 0 10 0 0 100 00Hz 5 00 0 60 00 S 2 00 the signal is canceled the spindle is decelerated to zero speed keep the free state H01 42 Position positioning complete range 0 10000 10 In the process of positioning if the position deviation within a set range H01 42 positioning is completed If you define an arbitrary way switch output terminal function as positioning completion 236 output taking Y1 as example set the function code P09 18 25 then simultaneously output a positioning completion indication signal H01 43 Position close signal width 0 32767 100 When the servo is running if the position deviation within a set range H01 43 considered position close If you define an arbitrary way switch output terminal function as position close output taking Y1 as example set the function code P09 18 26 then simultaneously output a position close indication signal H0144 0327670000 HOLA 1 10 Position error alarm selection 0 Valid 1 Invalid When the servo is running if the position deviation is greater than the set range H01 44 and the position error alarm selection is valid HO1 45 0 if you define an arbitrary way switch output terminal function as the positi
225. g error The operation panel EEPROM is Seek for service support damaged The nameplate parameters of the Set the parameters properly according to Er TUn Poor auto tuning motor are incorrect the motor nameplate 252 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code When reverse running is prohibited reverse rotating Cancel the reverse running prohibition auto tuning is performed Check motor wiring Auto tuning overtime Check the P02 16 upper limit frequency and see whether the P02 17 set value is lower than rated frequency With PG vector control or with Er PG1 PG fault PG V F control the encoder Check the encoder wiring and rewiring signal disconnects Running Drive input power down in Er Pof Check R S T three phase input undervoltage running state Py Positioning search origin does not Check whether there is origin signal input Er OrG Origin lost an i search the origin on the corresponding terminal Wrong speed feedback encoder The same speed feedback encoder shall selection setting not be used for two motors simultaneously Wrong analog Al function The same function shall not be selected for selection setting different analogs simultaneously EPST Parameter j setting error During vector control the torque limit P05 13 P05 14 and frequency reference Process closed loop invocation 5 P02 04 or PLC section frequency setting er
226. g table changing 4 continuous function codes with P02 00 as the start address the slave address is 5 Request frame Value Bytes Description 16 bit mode 32 bit mode 0 0x05 0x05 Slave address 1 0x10 0x43 0x10 0x43 Command code Start address in the 32 bit mode the highest byte 2 3 0x0200 0x8200 of the start address is 1 Number of registers in the 32 bit mode the 4 5 0x0004 0x0008 number of registers is twice of that of parameters 6 0x08 0x10 Number of bytes of register content 7 8 Value P02 00 Value P02 00 Content to be written 9 10 Value P02 01 16 bit operation 8 bytes in total 11 12 Value P02 02 Value P02 01 32 bit operation 16 bytes in total 13 14 Value P02 03 15 16 Value P02 02 17 18 19 20 Value P02 03 21 22 If the operation is successful the response frame is as follows 283 Value Bytes Description 16 bit mode 32 bit mode 0 0x05 0x05 Slave address 1 0x10 0x43 0x10 0x43 Command code Start address in the 32 bit mode the highest byte of the 2 3 0x0200 0x8200 start address is 1 Number of registers in the 32 bit mode the number of 4 5 0x0004 0x0008 registers is twice of that of parameters 6 7 CRC verification If the operation is failed it will return to the abnormal response frame and its format is as shown above Note 1 The writing operation of the 16 bit mode is only appli
227. g time Stage 4 setting Stage 4 running time Stage 5 setting Stage 5 running time Stage 6 setting Stage 6 running time Stage 7 setting Stage 7 running time Stage 8 setting Stage 8 running time Stage 9 setting Stage 9 running time Stage 10 setting Stage 10 running time Stage 11 setting Stage 11 running time Stage 12 setting Stage 12 running time Stage 13 setting N ax a P13 42 P13 43 P13 44 P13 45 P13 46 Stage 13 running time 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 Stage 14 setting Stage 14 running time Stage 15 setting Stage 15 running time P13 17 P13 19 P13 21 P13 23 P13 25 P13 27 P13 29 P13 31 P13 33 P13 35 P13 37 P13 39 P13 41 P13 43 and P13 45 are used to configure the running frequency direction acceleration deceleration time for each stage of the PLC and they are selected by bits As shown in Fig 6 71 Hundreds Tens Unit Frequency setting Select the multi stage frequency Keyboard Av reference Terminal UP DOWN reference Communication reference Al reference PULSE reference PID Reserved NOAPRPWYON TOD Running direction setting 0 FWD 1 REV 2 Determined by running command Acceleration deceleration time setting 0 Acceleration deceleration time1 4 Acceleration deceleration time2 2 Acceleration deceleration time3 3 Acceleration deceleration time4 Fig 6
228. ge single 16 byte function code parameters and status parameters of the drive and the parameter values will be saved after power off The command code 0x41 is used to change the single 16 byte function code parameters or control parameters of the drive and store the value into the nonvolatile memory cell Its command format is the same as that of 0x06 The only difference is as follows the parameter value changed under the 0x06 command will not be saved upon power off but the parameter value changed under the 0x41 command will be saved upon power off 6 Manage the drive function codes The management of the drive function codes includes reading the upper lower limit of the parameter reading the parameter features reading the maximum group internal index of the function code menu reading the next previous function group number reading current display status parameter index displaying the next 269 status parameter and reading the factory leave value of the function code parameter The parameter features include the read write features units and scaling relations of the parameter The application layer protocol data units are as follows Request format Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x42 Sub command code 2 0x0000 0x0008 Data 2 Depends on the drive type If the operation is successful the response frame is as follows Application
229. h error and verification error 0x20 Parameters cannot be changed 0x21 Parameters cannot be changed during the drive running 0x22 Password required for parameters 2 Change the single 16 byte function code parameter and status parameter of the drive and the parameter values will not be saved after power off When this command is used the parameter value changed will not be saved upon power on after power off The application layer protocol data units are as follows Request format Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x06 Register address 2 0x0000 0xF FFF Register content 2 0x0000 0xF FFF 267 If the operation is successful the response frame is as follows Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x06 Register address 2 0x0000 0xF FFF Register content 2 0x0000 0xF FFF If the operation is failed it will return to the abnormal response frame and its format is as shown above 3 Line diagnosis The application layer protocol data units are as follows Request format Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x08 Sub command code 2 0x0000 0x0030 Data 2 0x0000 0xFFFF If the operation is successful the response
230. h the rated torque current of the drive P06 12 Inertia compensation enabling 0 1 0 You can select to compensate the inertia torque and friction torque during acceleration deceleration to get better dynamic response of the system You need to set inertia value P06 15 and the friction torque value P06 16 P06 13 and P06 14 accurately They can be set by the user or through the inertia identification P06 13 Inertia identification 0 1 0 P06 14 Identifying torque value 0 100 0 10 0 P06 15 Mechanical inertia 0 30 000 kgm2 0 162 Set P06 13 as 1 to start the inertia identification automatically The identification of the torque is set by P06 14 The identified values of inertia and friction torque will be saved into function code P06 15 and P06 16 respectively P06 17 Torque compensation coefficient 0 5 3 0 1 0 Adjusting P06 17 can optimize the drive output torque P06 18 Torque offset 300 0 300 0 0 0 To enable the torque offset you need to set the function of terminal Xi as 49 torque offset enabled and the torque offset is enabled only when the terminal is enabled The torque offset is enabled both under the speed or torque control mode P06 19 Torque offset startup delay 0 00 1 00s 0 00s When the torque offset is enabled if the value of P06 19 is not 0 it will not be added to the torque reference immediately but after some delay time P06 19 The torque offset startup delay P06 19 is enabled only when t
231. he contactor will normally engage When the characters displayed in the digital tube change into the set frequency it indicates that the drive initialization is finished If the LED above the M key on the operation panel is ON it indicates that it is in the operation panel control status The initial power up process is as shown in Fig 4 9 57 D Carry out wiring as required Confirm the correctness of wiring Confirm the correctness of input voltage yY Power on Display 8 8 8 8 8 Is the contactor closing sound heard Displays set frequency y Power on failed Power on successful Disconnect the MCB at the power supply input y Analyse the cause Fig 4 9 Initial power up operation process for drive 4 3 3 No load commissioning PG closed loop vector commissioning for asynchronous motor 1 Check the drive wiring power on if correct 2 Set PG closed loop vector for control mode P02 00 0001 3 Set PG parameters correctly PG feedback sources P04 00 using expansion PG cards set parameters P04 00 12 4 Set P03 motor parameters correctly and do motor tuning P03 24 5 Set VF for control mode P02 00 0002 58 6 Set P02 05 to 10Hz run the motor observe P01 13 if close to 10Hz indicate that the encoder parameters are set correctly if the value is negative indicating that th
232. he impact is too large when motor start and stop especially when the motor stop may occur cross then rotate At this time you can increase acceleration deceleration time constant H00 03 of the position command to improve 4 3 4 Position control mode introduction Position control block diagram shown in Figure 4 10 60 Kp loop PI Feedforward Position 4 commen Electronic PO p Position loop _ TO p Speed loop bo p Current PI gear Frequency PG meanon Reference ieedbae Motor current Motor position Motor speed Encode Fig 4 10 Position control block diagram 61 Chapter 5 Parameter List Explanation to the terms in the function code parameter table Table field Explanation Function code number Representing the number of the function code e g P00 00 Function code name Name of the function code explaining it Leave factory value The value of the function code after restoring the leave factory settings Set range The minimum and maximum values of the function code allowed to set Unit V voltage A current C temperature Q resistance mH inductance rpm rotate speed ni percentage bps baud rate Hz kHz frequency ms s min h kh time kW power No unit 7 a o Means the function code can be changed during running x Means the function code can be roperty changed in the stop state Means the f
233. he setting of the frequency reduction rate P12 08 is too large and the load instantaneous feedback energy is also too large the over voltage protection may be 209 incurred If the P12 08 setting is too small and the load feedback energy is too small the compensation for the low voltage function may not be enabled When adjusting please reasonably select it according to the load inertia and heavy or light load P12 09 Pre magnetizing time 0 0 10 0s 0 0 The pre magnetizing is used for creating the magnetic field before the startup of the asynchronous motor P12 10 10 150 10 P12 11 0 10000 1000 R1212 0 10000 1000 P12 13 0 2 1 P12 14 0 1 2 Minimum flux reference value Flux weakening adjustment coefficient 1 Flux weakening adjustment coefficient 2 Flux weakening control mode Cooling fan control 0 Operate automatically Internal temperature detection program will be automatically started during the drive operation to determine the operation of the fan according to the module temperature If the fan is running before the drive stop the fan will run for another 3 minutes after the drive shuts down and then the internal temperature detection program will be started 1 The fan keeps running when the power is on The fan keeps running after the drive is powered up 2 Fun operates based on command When the drive will operate normally upon receiving the running command the fan will also operate When the drive st
234. he torque offset adopts the Al reference P06 20 Action selection for over torque detected 0 4 0 P06 21 Over torque detection value 0 300 0 0 P0622 0010 05 005 Over torque judging If the torque is continually larger than the torque detection value P06 21 within the detection time P06 22 it is considered as the signal of over torque detected Action selection for over torque detected 0 Over torque detection is disabled Do not detect over torque 1 Continue to run after the over torque is detected only when the speed is consistent Detect the over torque under torque only in the process of running with the constant speed and the drive continues to run after the over torque is detected 2 Continue to run after the over torque is detected during running The drive continues to run after the over torque is detected during the whole running process 3 Turn off the output after the over torque is detected only when the speed is consistent Detect the over torque only in the process of running with the constant speed and the drive will stop the output and the motor will coast to stop after the over torque is detected 4 Turn off the output after the over torque is detected during running The drive will stop the output and the motor will coast to stop after the over torque is detected in the whole running process P06 23 Action selection for under torque detected 0 4 0 P06 24 Under torque detection value 0 0 300 0 0
235. ice Safety Precautions BN DANGER Operation without following instructions can cause death or severe personal injury Operation without following instructions can cause medium or slight personal injury or WARNING damage to the product and other equipment i DANGER e Please install the product on the incombustible materials e g metal otherwise fire may be caused Do not place any combustible material near the product otherwise fire may be caused Do not install the product in the environment with explosive gas otherwise explosion may be caused e Only qualified personnel can wire the drive otherwise electric shock may be caused e Never wire the drive unless the input AC supply is completely disconnected otherwise electric shock may be caused e The grounding terminal of the drive must be reliably grounded otherwise electric shock may be caused e The cover must be properly closed before power up otherwise electric shock and explosion may be caused e When powering up the drive that has been stored for over 2 years the input voltage must be gradually increased with the voltage regulator otherwise electric shock and explosion may be caused e Do not touch the terminals when the product is powered up otherwise electric shock may be caused e Do not operate the drive with wet hands otherwise electric shock may be caused e Maintaince operation can not be conducted until 10 minutes has passed after disconnecti
236. iginal value will be returned Assuming the parameter types of P01 01 P01 07 are as follows The value of P01 01 is 4500 16 bit parameter of type I 0x1194 The value of P01 02 is 65036 32 bit parameter of type OXOOOOFEOC The value of P01 03 is 500 16 bit parameter of type I OxFEOC The value of P01 04 is 5000 32 bit parameter of type 1 0x00001388 The value of P01 05 is 100000 32 bit parameter of type I Ox000186A0 The value of P01 06 is 100000 32 bit parameter of type I Ox FFFE7960 The value of P01 07 is Ox FFFF 16 bit parameter of type II The values returned in the reading operation are as shown in the following table Register Access mode Value returned Description address 16 bit 0x1194 The actual value is returned P01 01 The 16 high bits are filled with 0 and the actual value 32 bit 0x00001194 is returned The 16 low bits are captured and the value retuned is 16 bit OxFEOC P01 02 500 which is different from the actual value 32 bit 0x0000FE0C The actual value is returned 16 bit OxFEOC The actual value is returned P01 03 The 16 high bits are filled with 1 and the actual value 32 bit OxFFFFFEOC is returned 281 Register Access mode Value returned Description address The 16 low bits are captured and the actual value is 16 bit 0x1388 P01 04 retuned 32 bit 0x00001388 The actual value is returned The 16 low bits are captured and the valu
237. ill be automatically displayed upon stop The alarm status can be treated as a special fault status Same as the fault status you cannot adjust the frequency parameters through the Vor A key in the alarm state You must switch to the run parameter display status by pressing the gt key before you can use the Vor key to adjust the set frequency parameters 49 O O O 8 FWD REV ALARM QUICK BASIC Q 9 sA C O O QO OO a Hog oo OS oe ae iy ae ea MENU ENTER Esc DATA Ea ale XM We gt Pp b Run parameter display status O O O O 8 FWD REV ALARM QUICK BASIC FWD REV ALARM QUICK BASIC Ooo O G EN d ei E Alololele O HHEH E O Or O O Oa O O Hz A V m s r min Hz A V m s r min MENU ENTER MENU ENTER ESC N DATA ESC DATA J e avs D gt Ee Gat r c Alarm display status d Fault display status Fig 4 2 The stop run alarm and fault display of the drive 4 Fault display status When the drive detects a fault signal it will immediately enter the fault alarm display status as shown in Fig 4 2 d and the fault code will be displayed in flashing mode The stop parameters and fault code will be cyclic
238. in the stop mode set by 126 P08 06 In the panel command channel when this key is pressed the drive will E Coast to stop in non panel stop in the stop mode set by P08 06 In the terminal or serial port control mode command channel when this key is pressed the drive will coast to stop and display Er EFT fault 2 Note When the STOP RESET key is used as the fault reset key RESET it is enabled in all the running command channels Double click the STOP key to coast to stop Double click the STOP key during running the drive will coast to stop and display Er EFT fault Hundreds place Function selection of the M key When it is set as 0 the M key is disabled When it is set as 1 the M key is used as JOG key In the operation panel command channel press this key and hold the drive will run in real time JOG mode Release this key it will stop running in JOG mode When it is set as 2 the M key is used as the direction switching key FWD REV In the operation panel command channel it can be used to switch the output frequency direction on line When it is set as 3 the M key is used as the command channel switching key which is enabled only in the stop status The command channel switching order is as follows Operation panel command channel LED of M key on terminal command channel LED of M key off serial port command channel LED of M key on operation panel command channe
239. ingle pulse signal width 500ms 12 PLC cycle completion indication When the simple PLC completes an operation cycle the relevant indication signal will be output single pulse signal width 500ms 13 Reserved 14 Encoder direction output It is used to indicate the direction signal of the current encoder output 15 Drive ready for running If the signal output is enabled it means that the drive does not have any fault the bus voltage is normal the drive running disabled terminal is disabled and it can receive the start command 16 Drive fault When the drive has any fault the relevant indication signal will be output 17 Host device switch signal 188 The output signals of Y1 Y2 or R1 R2 are directly controlled via the serial port The output is also affected by P09 22 18 Reserved 19 Limiting torque When the torque command is limited by the electric or braking torque limit value the relevant indication signal will be output 20 Flux detection signal When the flux detection value exceeds P09 33 the relevant indication signal will be output 21 Reserved 22 Analog torque offset enabled When the input signal function is set as 50 Al torque offset retention and enabled the relevant indication signal will be output 23 Over torque output Corresponding indication signal will be output according to the setting of PO6 20 P06 22 24 Under torque output Corresponding indication signal will
240. is improper Set V F curve and torque increase correctly EEPROM f The read write error of the control Reset by pressing the STOP RESET key AL EEP read write parameters occurs seek for service support fault AL SC1 Abnormal The baud rate is set improperly Set the baud rate properly 255 Alarm Alarm type Possible alarm causes Solutions code serial port OOR Reset by pressing the STOP RESET key ROOF Serial port communication error j communication seek for service support The fault alarm parameters are set i Modify the P15 03 and P97 00 settings improperly i Check if the host device is working and if the The host device does not work ORR wiring is correct The grid voltage is too low Check the grid voltage Replace the contactor of the main circuit The contactor is damaged seek for service support AL rLy1 Abnormal The power up buffer resistance is Replace the buffer resistance seek for contactor damaged service support The control circuit is damaged Seek for service support Input phase loss Check the input R S T wiring The parameters for feedback loss i Modify the P14 26 setting are set improperly Closed loop AL FbL Feedback wire break Rewiring feedback loss The reference of closed loop See the P14 01 setting and increase the feedback value is too low feedback reference During the frequency main reference or
241. is mainly used to isolate the slave with fault Setting the slave not to respond to invalid or wrong 0x0000 0x0000 commands 0x0030 Setting the slave to respond to invalid and wrong 0x0001 0x0001 commands 4 Change multiple function code parameters and control parameters of the drive and the parameter values will not be saved after power off When this command is used the parameter value changed will not be saved upon power on after power off The application layer protocol data units are as follows Request format Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x10 Start register address 2 0x0000 OxFFFF Number of registers in operation 2 0x0001 0x000A Number of bytes of register content 1 2 Number of registers in operation Register content 2 Number of registers in operation If the operation is successful the response frame is as follows Application layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x10 Start register address 2 0x0000 0xF FFF Number of registers in operation 2 0x0001 0x000A This command is used to change the content of the continuous data cells from the start register address If the operation is failed it will return to the abnormal response frame and its format is as shown above 5 Chan
242. is no running command upon power up 2 Stop has the priority if there is any stop command 3 When the function of re start upon power down is enabled if the drive is powered up again after it is not completely powered down i e the drive LED displays LU process it will restart in the speed tracking mode if the drive is powered up again after it is completely powered down i e the LED on the operation panel is completely off it will restart under the mode set by P08 00 171 FRI P08 19 FWD REV dead time 0 00 360 00s 0 00s Output frequency Time ta Fig 6 30 FWD REV dead time For some production equipment reverse running may cause equipment damage This function can be used to prevent the reverse running The waiting transition time at the output of zero frequency when the drive switches from forward running to reverse running or from reverse running to forward running as t4 shown in Fig 6 30 P08 20 FWD REV switching mode 0 1 0 0 Switch once over the zero frequency 1 Switch once over the startup frequency P08 21 Use ratio of dynamic braking 0 0 100 0 00 0 P08 22 Braking startup voltage 700 780V 750V The use ratio of dynamic braking P08 21 and the braking startup voltage P08 22 are only applied to the drive with built in braking unit Action voltage of braking unit can be selected by adjusting P08 22 The system can be stopped rapidly by the dynamic braking with the appropriate action vo
243. is used in the applications with faster torque response and higher torque and speed control precision Additionally with PG as the feedback it can realize the position control i e servo control function 3 V F control without PG It is used in the ordinary applications in which there is no high performance requirement or the applications in which a single drive controls several motors 4 V F control with PG PG needs to be installed which can increase the V F speed control precision Running mode There are three running modes for the SVM drive vector control 1 Speed control To precisely control the motor speed for which the related function codes of Group P05 shall be set 2 Torque control To precisely control the motor torque for which the related function codes of Group P06 shall be set 56 3 Position control To precisely control the motor position for which the related function codes of Group HOO HO01 shall be set The SVM drive supports the online switch of the above running modes 4 3 Commissioning 4 3 1 Inspection before power up Conduct wiring connection according to the technical requirements specified in chapter 3 Wring of Servo Drive 4 3 2 Initial power up operation When the drive passes the wiring and power supply inspection turn on the circuit breaker of the AC power supply at the drive input side to apply power to the drive The operation panel of the drive will first display 8 8 8 8 8 and then t
244. ission ratio between the motor shaft and the spindle is not 1 1 if the encoder is mounted on the spindle set tens place of H01 03 to 1 the encoder line number is set to function code P04 05 Spindle origin use spindle encoder Z pulse while correctly set spindle encoder lines P04 07 spindle transmission ratio H01 05 and homing mode H01 01 ORGP as origin If the encoder is mounted on the motor shaft spindle origin is also required to install photoelectric switch photoelectric switch signal will connect to one of the X6 X7 X8 terminal and set the appropriate terminal to 84 position reference point input terminals Meanwhile properly set the spindle encoder lines P04 07 spindle transmission ratio HO1 05 and homing mode H01 01 Origin search speed H01 06 as accurate stop search origin speed at first start Spindle positioning speed H01 35 set the speed for spindle positioning start section to find the origin the setting value affects spindle positioning speed and accuracy Spindle accurate stop direction is set by function code H01 01 247 8 1 Displaying exception and solutions Chapter 8 Troubleshooting All possible fault types for SVM are summarized as shown in table 8 1 The number of the fault code is 41 Before consulting the service department the user can perform self check according to the hints of the table and record the fault symptoms in detail To seek for service support please contact the sales person
245. ital frequency control when stop 0 Maintained when stop 1 Reset when stop Note The unit and tens places are only applicable for P02 04 0 1 2 hundreds and thousands place are only applicable for P02 07 1 2 3 0 No auxiliary reference 1 Digital reference 1 Keyboard A V reference Auxiliary Aidian 2 Digital reference 2 terminal references H ae UP DN reference P02 07 frequency 7 Y 3 Serial port communication 1 0 source source reference selection selection 4 Al analog reference 5 Terminal PULSE reference 6 Process closed loop PID 7 PLC or bus reference reserved Digital Rei Ke Pict P02 08 ty auxiliary 0 00 3000 0Hz 0 01Hz 0 00 auxiliary reference reference Auxiliary Auxiliary 0 00 9 99 P02 09 reference reference Only enabled for P02 07 4 7 0 01 1 00 coefficient coefficient A 0 Calculatio Main auxilia 4 P02 10 nof ry reference i 1 0 reference 2 calculation frequency 3 MAX main reference auxiliary 69 source reference 4 MIN main reference auxiliary reference 5 Sqrt main reference sqrt auxiliary reference 6 Sqrt main reference auxiliary reference 7 Switching between main and auxiliary reference frequency source 8 Switching between main reference frequency source and main auxiliary reference frequency source 9 Switching between auxiliary reference frequency source and main auxiliary reference frequency source
246. itch gain 1 and gain 1 and 1 Torque command HO00 10 gain 2 gain 2 2 Speed command 1 0 switching switching 3 Position deviation mode mode 4 External terminal switch Position Position gain gain switching switching HO0 11 0 0 100 0 0 1 10 0 torque torque command command level level Position Position H00 12 gan ga 0 0 100 0 0 1 10 0 switching switching speed speed 115 command command level level Position Position gain gain switching switching 1 H00 13 ie es 0 10000 comman 100 position position d unit deviation deviation level level Gain Gain switching switching H00 14 smoothing smoothing 0 15 1 1 filtering filtering coefficient coefficient Position Position HO00 15 feedforwar feedforward 0 00 120 00 1 00 100 00 d gain gain Position Position Ho0 16 controller controller 9499 9 0f maximum frequency 0 1 20 0 output output limiter limiter 0 Switch to servo speed control Servo Servo z Gf he according to the downtime HO00 17 shutdown shutdown i 1 1 1 Switch to the speed control mode mode deceleration stop 0 0 3000 0ms S S H00 18 Orvo evo When the PL CCWL NL CWL 0 1 100 0 downtime downtime occurs according to the time to slow down Group H01 Spindle positioning parameter H01 00 Spindle Spindle Unit place Positioning mode 1 0000H positioning positioning selection selection selection 0 Carry 1 Indexing Tens place Digi
247. itial frequency Upon closed loop vector control when the motor speed is less than the rotating speed corresponding to the zero servo initial frequency P05 19 if the zero servo is enabled to be always enabled or the conditions are enabled and the terminal is enabled it enters into the zero servo locking status At this time the position of the motor in stop status will be maintained The zero servo initial frequency is the condition for the drive to enter zero servo status If P05 19 is too large it may cause over current fault If adjustment is needed you may increase decrease the leave factory value Zero servo gain P05 18 is the 158 parameter to adjust the zero servo retentivity When this value is increased the zero servo force can be increased However if it is too large it may cause vibration of the drive m Note For the zero servo function enabled by function code P05 17 you may exit the zero servo by setting the frequency higher than the zero servo initial frequency When the zero servo function of P05 17 is set to be 2 for the zero servo function enabled by No 54 function of terminal Xi zero servo enabling terminal when the terminal is disabled it exits from the zero servo mode It doesn t matter whether the set frequency is higher than the zero servo initial frequency P05 19 P05 20 Action selection upon detection of DEV 0 2 2 0 Decelerate to stop 1 Coast to stop display Er dEv 2 Continue to run P05 2
248. ked at zero frequency When the auto reset is completed it will automatically run in the speed tracking mode 3 Be sure to use the auto fault reset function carefully otherwise human injury or property loss may be caused P97 15 The 1st fault type 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 P97 16 The 2nd fault type P97 17 The 3rd fault type 225 P97 18 DC bus voltage at the 3rd fault 0 999 0 P97 19 Actual current at the 3rd fault 0 0 999 9 0 0A P97 20 Operation frequency at the 3rd fault 0 00 3000 00Hz 0 00Hz P97 21 Drive operation status at the 3rd fault 0 FFFFH 0000 SVM memorizes the latest 3 types of fault P97 15 P97 16 and P97 17 and records the bus voltage P97 18 output current P97 19 running frequency P97 20 and running status P97 21 of the 3rd fault for your reference For the corresponding relationships of the running status please see P01 17 The latest fault record is the record for the 3rd fault 6 18 Servo drive parameters Group P98 P98 00 Series No 0 FFFF 700 P98 01 DSP software version No 0 00 99 99 2 00 P98 02 User customized version No 0 9999 3 P98 03 FPGA software version No 0 00 99 99 1 00 P98 04 Rated capacity 0 999 9kVA P98 05 Rated voltage 0 999V P98 06 Rated current 0 999 9A The above are read only parameters Record the basic information of the drive The values for P98 03 P98 05 are set by the manufacturer P98 07 Drive series selection 0 6 This function cod
249. l LED of M key on When it is set as 4 the M key is used as the command channel switching key which is enabled in both stop and running statuses The switching order is as above an Note You need to press the ENTER DATA key within 3 seconds after switching to the desired running command channel circularly with the M key Multi functional key so that it becomes enabled When it is set as 5 the M key is used as the Multi functional panel locking key Now press the M key and press the key three times at the same time to lock the panel The locking mode of the panel depends on the thousands place of the function code To unlock the panel set the thousands place as 5 press the M key and press the V key three times at the same time then the panel will be unlocked When this place is set as 0 this is no panel locking function When it is set as 6 the M key is used as the emergency stop key Under any command channel once this key is pressed the drive will perform the emergency stop command like the terminal emergency stop function during running When it is set as 7 the M key is used to coast to stop the drive Under any command channel once this key is pressed the drive will coast to stop Thousands place Locking function of the operation panel It is used to set the locking range of keys on the operation panel 127 Table 6 2 Locking range of keys Hundreds place Function Description Lock all the keys o
250. l torque command will be switched to the speed regulator ASR to output to ensure the motor speed is under control Function codes P06 07 and P06 09 are used to set the maximum speed limit channel of the forward running FWD and reverse running REV for the motor respectively FWD REV speed limit channel 0 Adopting the setting value of the function codes P06 08 and P06 10 as the FWD REV speed limit values under the torque control mode 1 Adopting the value of the analog input terminal Al as the speed limit value under the torque control mode The corresponding speed of Al can be set with the Al curve in Group P10 The user needs to define the function of the Al terminal as the speed limit value Taking Al1 as an example set the unit place of function code P10 01 as 4 or 5 Please refer to the description in Group P10 for the detailed setting methods The FWD or REV speed limit value is enabled when P06 07 or P06 09 0 When the setting value is 100 it corresponds with the maximum output frequency of the drive P02 15 P06 11 Mechanical loss compensation value 20 0 20 0 0 0 It is used to set the mechanical loss compensation value With this value the torque can be compensated under the speed torque control mode The mechanical loss shall be adjusted when large torque loss is caused by the mechanical loss of the motor Generally it is not necessary to set this value When the setting value is 100 it corresponds wit
251. lace the fan The inverter module is abnormal Seek for service support The ambient temperature is too Lower the ambient temperature Rectifier heatsink high Er oH2 over temperature The duct is blocked Clean the duct The fan is damaged Replace the fan The motor parameters are Perform the parameter auto tuning of the incorrect motor The load is too large Adopt the drive with higher power EroL1 Drive overload The DC braking amount is too Reduce the DC braking current and large lengthen the braking time When instantaneous stop happens restart the rotating motor Set the start mode P08 00 as the speed tracking restart function 250 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code The acceleration time is too short Lengthen the acceleration time The grid voltage is too low Check the grid voltage V F curve is improper Adjust V F curve and torque increase The motor overload protection Set the overload protection factor of motor factor setting is incorrect correctly The motor is blocked or the sudden change of load is too Check the load large Er oL2 Motor overload j The universal motor runs at low os i i If long term low speed running is required speed for a long time with heavy special motor should be used load The grid voltage is too low Check the grid voltage V F curve is improper Set V F curve and torque increase
252. lations before and after the adjustment are as shown as below AO output value output gain x value before adjustment zero offset correction x 10V The curves for the relation between analog output and gains between analog output and zero offset correction are as shown in Fig 6 54 and Fig 6 55 A Value after adjustment v 10 et P10 24 200 a 1 l a yee P10 24 100 7 I 1 l A 1 xX 1 l f l 1 a 0 5 10 7 Value before adjustment V Fig 6 54 Relation curve between analog output and gains 201 A Value after adjustment v 10 1 1 2T P10 25 0 A a i P10 25 50 l l l i i A I 4 l l l f gt I I I I y 1 5 10 Value before adjustment V Fig 6 55 Relation curve between analog output and zero offset Note The output gain and zero offset correction function codes will real time affect the analog output during the change P10 26 Analog output terminal AO2 function 0 26 00 P10 27 AO2 gain 0 0 200 0 100 0 P10 28 AO2 zero offset correction 100 0 100 0 0 0 The function settings and meanings of the AO2 terminal analog output are completely the same as AO1 6 12 Auxiliary function parameters Group P11 P11 00 Acceleration deceleration mode selection 0 1 0 0 Linear acceleration deceleration The output frequency is decreased or increased according to constant slope as shown in Fig 6
253. layer protocol data unit Data length number of bytes Value or range Command code 1 0x42 Sub command code 2 0x0000 0x0008 Data 2or4 0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF If the operation request is failed the response will be error code and exception code If the operation is failed the abnormal response will occur Please refer to the above text for the abnormal response codes The values and meanings of sub command codes supported by the function code management are as shown in the following table Sub command f Data request Data response Function code The parameter group number and neen k naa Read the upper limit value of the group internal index occupies the The upper limit value of the 0x0000 parameter the status parameter does high byte and the low byte parameter 4 byte t hi respectively not support this The parameter group number and ae Read the lower limit value of the group internal index occupies the The lower limit value of the 0x0001 x parameter the status parameter does high byte and the low byte parameter 4 byte respectively not support this The parameter group number and Parameter features refer Read the features of the function code 0x0002 group internal index occupies the to the list of parameter arameter the control parameter and high byte and the low byte features for their detailed P P i respectively meanings status parameter do not suppor
254. log voltage For the analog voltage resistance 15kQ resolution 1 4000 differential single end input Al3 is the input Al3 or signal input terminal and Al3 Al3 analog voltage shall be connected to GND single end reference grounding GND inpu Analog output When providing the analog AO1 1 voltage current output it can represent 27 values The analog output of the voltage current is selected via Voltage output range 0 2 10V Analog output Analog output the jumper and the output Current output range 0 4 20mA AO2 2 range of the analog voltage current is selected in the function code P10 22 reference grounding GND Positive end of 485 differential RS485 signal reference grounding RS485 GND Standard RS485 communication interface Communication communication Please use twisted pair wire or shielded Negative end of 485 interface wire RS485 differential signal reference grounding GND Encoder phase Differential input signal of A A A signal encoder phase A encoder Maximum input frequendy lt 100kHz BIB Encoder phase Differential input signal of B signal encoder phase B 28 Type Terminal Name Function Specification To provide power supply for Encoder power Output voltage 5V 5C external encoder reference supply Maximum output current 250mA grounding COM Multi function
255. lose loop feedback BIT1 Close loop reference flashing BIT2 Terminal status BIT3 DC bus voltage V Fig 6 74 Setting of LED display parameter selection 2 when running 218 For the displayed terminal status the terminal status adopts the defined value of the LED digital diode through the multi functional input terminal X1 X8 status bitO bit7 corresponding to X1 X8 and output terminal Y1 Y2 R1 and R2 bit12 bit15 corresponding to Y1 Y2 R1 and R2 to indicate the status of each function terminal For instance when X1 X2 terminals are closed while other terminals are disconnected it indicates that the terminal state value is 03H Note When the rotating speed or the line speed is displayed it can be directly changed by pressing or V key no need to switch into the frequency state When 0 is selected for all the P16 00 and P16 01 BIT bits the output frequency will be displayed by default In the running parameter display state the parameters for display can be switched in turn by pressing the shift key P16 02 LED display parameter selection when stop 0 FFFH 009 Hundreds Tens Unit BITO Preset freq Hz BIT1 Running speed r min BIT2 Preset speed r min BITS DC bus voltage V BITO Running line speed m s BIT1 Preset line speed m s BIT2 Close loop feedback BIT3 Close loop refenrence flashing BITO A11 V
256. lows Cerc_result crc_result amp Oxff lt lt 8 crc_result gt gt 8 Data Addre Command Register Number of Register content Register Check frame ss code address registers Number of bytes content code 0x0034 Request 0x05 0x10 0x6400 0x0002 0x04 0x30C5 0x1388 Response 0x05 0x10 0x6400 0x0002 None None 0x5F7C No 5 drive coast to stop Data frame Address Command code Register address Register content Check code Request 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x0036 0x1768 Response 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x0036 0x1768 No 5 drive jog forward Data frame Address Command code Register address Register content Check code Request 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x00B0 0x96CA Response 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x00B0 0x96CA No 5 drive jog stop Data frame Address Command code Register address Register content Check code Request 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x0130 Ox96FA Response 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x0130 Ox96FA No 5 drive fault reset Data frame Address Command code Register address Register content Check code Request 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x0220 0x97C6 Response 0x05 0x06 0x6400 0x0220 0x97C6 Read the running frequency of No 5 drive and the response running frequency is 50 00Hz 16 bits mode Data Register Number of registers or Register Address Command code Check code frame address number of bytes read content Request 0x05 0x03 0x6501 0x0001 None 0xCA82 Response 0x05 0x
257. lses relative to the origin is 0 H01 07 is 36 000 represents that offset pulse relative to the origin is 18000 H01 07 is 0 represents that offset pulses relative to the origin is 18 000 Spindle indexing control origin offset is offset angle that spindle zero point relative to the spindle reference unit degrees when the spindle back to zero terminal terminal function 85 is valid that is back to the position HOLS E Reserved H01 09 Single point positioning times 0 65535 0 When using single point multiple positioning control positioning function code determines the number of times When H01 09 set to zero which means that the times of positioning is unrestricted H01 10 High level of internal position1 reference 0 65535 0 H01 11 0 65535 0 Low level of internal position reference When the spindle positioning mode H01 00 unit place select 0 and tens place of H10 00 select single point positioning function code H01 10 HO1 11 setting position is valid this position has two function code seting after HO1 11 is determined position updates if change only high level of position reference H01 10 need to enter HO1 11 and press the enter key before the update Similarly when the Q fo a 3 c 2 O a fe 5 Q fe 3 Q amp gt lt 2 o a lt 2 3 a a Q o oO a oO 3S H01 12 H01 13 H01 14 H01 15 H01 16 H01 17 H01 18 High level of internal positio
258. ltage P08 23 Deceleration time for emergency stop 0 00 100 00s 0 00s When the input signal of the emergency stop terminal NO 60 terminal function is enabled the drive begins to decelerate to stop The deceleration time is determined by P08 23 When it is set as Os the drive will stop within the shortest deceleration time 6 10 Digital input output parameters Group P09 P09 00 Input terminal X1 0 95 1 0 95 2 0 95 0 0 95 0 0 95 0 0 95 0 0 95 0 0 95 0 P09 01 Input terminal X2 P09 02 Input terminal X3 P09 03 Input terminal X4 P09 04 Input terminal X5 P09 05 Input terminal X6 P09 06 Input terminal X7 P09 07 Input terminal X8 172 Table 6 6 Table of digital input terminal functions Item Function Item Function 0 No function 1 Forward running FWD 2 Reverse running REV 3 External jog forward running control input 4 External jog reverse running control input 5 Three wire operation control 6 Multi stage reference terminal 1 7 Multi stage reference terminal 2 8 Multi stage reference terminal 3 9 Multi stage reference terminal 4 10 Acceleration deceleration time terminal 1 11 Acceleration deceleration time terminal 2 42 Main reference frequency pulse input valid only for X7 13 Auxiliary reference frequency pulse input or X8 valid only for X7 or X8 14 Frequency increase comm
259. lti stage frequency reference P13 00 reference reference 1 Multi stage closed loop 1 0 property property reference setting Mult stag When it is Multi stage frequency P13 01 e Multi stage p 0 1 10 0 reference reference 1 0 0 100 0 corresponds to 20 Uh 1 minimum frequency maximum frequency Multi stag Multi st When it is Multi stage closed loop P13 02 F uisiage reference 0 1 20 0 reference reference 2 2 100 0 100 0 corresponds to 100 Multi stag e Multi stage P13 03 reference reference 3 3 Multi stag P13 04 e Multi stage reference reference 4 4 Multi stag P13 05 e Multi stage reference reference 5 5 Multi stag e Multi stage P13 06 reference reference 6 6 Multi stag P13 07 e Multi stage reference reference 7 7 Multi stag P13 08 e Multi stage reference reference 8 8 Multi stag e Multi stage P13 09 reference reference 9 9 Multi st abe Multi stage P13 10 e reference reference 10 10 Multi stag P13 11 e Multi stage reference reference 11 11 Multi stag 6 Multi stage P13 12 reference reference 42 12 Multi st wee Multi stage P13 13 reference reference 13 13 Multi st a MESES Multi stage P13 14 reference reference 14 14 P13 15 Multi stag Multi stage e reference 10V 10V 0 1 40 0 0 1 60 0 0 1 80 0 0 1 90 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 10 0
260. lue Description place Forward command Reverse command Positive A 0 A i logic B B B phase pulse A Negativ A e logic B B SIGN Positive logic 1 PLUS Unit PLUS place Pulse g type SIGN SIGN pulse Negativ e logic PLUS CW Positive logic 2 CW j CCW CCW pulse CW Negativ e logic CCW Tens place Reserved Reserved 227 Parameter Setting value Description place Hundreds 0 Positive logic place 1 Negative logic Logical form 0 Terminals X7 X8 input Thousands 1 Local differential AB input Reserved place Pulse 3 input source 2 Expansion card RARB input 3 Internal position setting 4 Bus or PLC card reference Note 1 Pulse input source select 3 can achieve set position positioning internally can achieve single point multi point positioning according to H01 functions 2 Pulse input form select PLUS SIGN pulse when the pulse input source select 0 terminal X7 X8 X7 is defined as SIGN direction X8 is defined as the PLUS pulse When pulse input source select 1 terminal AB B is defined as the SIGN direction A is defined as the PLUS pulse when the pulse input source select 2 expansion card differential RARB RB is defined as the SIGN direction RA is defined as the PLUS pulse HO00 02 Position command filter time 0 0 3000 0ms 0 Position command need to pass a delay filter filtering Set filter time constant of the filter by the function
261. lytic capacitor The drive should be powered on once within 2 years at least for 5 hours The input voltage should be raised slowly to the rated value with the regulator upon power up 262 Appendix 1 Modbus Communication Protocol 1 Networking mode The drive has two networking modes single host multiple slaves mode and single host single slave mode 2 Interface mode RS485 interface asynchronous and half duplex Default 1 8 N 2 9600bps RTU Refer to Group P15 function code for the parameter setting 3 Communication mode 1 The communication protocol of the drive is Modbus protocol which does not only support common register reading and writing but also expands some commands to manage the drive function codes 2 The drive is slave adopting host salve mode P2P communication The drive will not response to the command sent by the host via broadcast address 3 In multiple units communication or long distance communication parallel connecting the resistance of 100 to 120 ohms with the positive end and negative end of the communication signal line of the host station can enhance its immunity to interference 4 SVM provides RS485 interface only If the communication interface of the external equipment is RS232 the RS232 RS485 conversion equipment is needed 4 Protocol format Modbus protocol supports both RTU mode and ASCII mode and the corresponding frame format is as shown in the Fig 1 1
262. maller P a A Smaller integral time Command speed b Fig 6 21 Diagram of relationship between the step response and PI parameters Increasing the proportional gain P can accelerate the dynamic response of the system but if the P value is too large it is easy to cause the oscillation of the system Decreasing the integral time can accelerate the dynamic response of the system but if the value is too small it is easy to cause the overshoot and oscillation of the system Generally it is better to adjust the proportional gain P first to increase the P value as larger as possible while ensuring no oscillation to the system and then adjust the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response features and small overshoot The Fig 6 22 shows the speed step response curve while the values of P and are selected properly the speed response curve can be observed with the analog output terminals AO1 and AO2 please refer to the parameters of Group P10 A Command speed Fig 6 22 Step response with good dynamic performance CJ Note If the PI parameter is not selected properly the over voltage fault may occur after the system is started to reach the high speed quickly if no external braking resistor or brake unit is connected This is caused by the energy feedback produced in the system regenerative braking while decelerating after the overshoot It can be avoided by adjusting the PI pa
263. mit 0 Disable 1 Enable Current Current loop 0 Manual selection P12 04 loop gain gain 1 Calculate automatically after 1 0 selection selection tuning Current loop Current loop P12 05 proportion proportional 1 5000 1 1000 al gain gain ACR P Current Dep Current loo P12 06 integral P 0 5 100 0ms 0 1 8 0 integral time time ACR I Anti trip Anti trip 0 Disable P12 07 function function 1 0 enabling enabling 1 Enable Frequency Frequency Piz 0g eduction reduction 0 00 99 99Hz s 0 01 10 00 rate upon rate voltage 99 compensa tion Pre 1 re magn Pre magneti P12 09 etizing or 0 0 10 0s 0 1 0 0 zing time time Minimum Minimum fl fl P12 10 we baa 10 150 1 10 reference reference value value Flux weak ening Flux weake djust i p42 114 2ausimen Sk 0 10000 1 1000 t adjustment coefficient coefficient 1 1 Flux weak ening Flux weake adjustmen ning P12 12 3 0 10000 1 1000 t adjustment coefficient coefficient 2 2 Flux mu wea Flux weake R ening 0 Disable P12 13 canal ning control 1 1 mode 1 Enable mode 0 Operate automatically 1 Fun operates continually during Sai power up oolin P12 14 3 Fan control 2 Fun operates based on 1 2 fan control command Note It will keep running for 3 minutes after power off Bie a Reserved Reserved P12 19 Group P13 Multi stage reference and simple PLC parameters Multi stag e Multi stage 0 Mu
264. mode selection Positioning mode selection Unit place Positioning position mode 0 Relative position 1 Absolute position relative zero Tens place Positioning lock mode 0 locked in the positioning points 1 locked in the positioning range Hundreds place Positioning timing selection 0 Receiving new positioning signal in the process of positioning no response 0000H 117 1 Receiving new positioning signal in the process of positioning positioning the new position directly Thousands place Positioning overrun action selection 0 Shutdown 1 Reverse homing keep zero speed 2 Reverse homing shutdown H01 03 Homing Homing Unit place Homing docking 1 0000H docking docking 0 Stop at the left side of the selection selection origin 1 Stop at the right side of the origin Tens place Encoder installation position 0 Mounted on the motor shaft 1 Mounted on the spindle Hundreds place Reserved Thousands place Reserved H01 04 Internal Internal 0 Manual by DI terminal selection 1 0 positioning positioning 1 Auto start starting starting set set H01 05 Spindle Spindle 0 000 30 000 0 001 1 000 transmissi transmissio on ratio n ratio H01 06 Origin Origin 0 00 30 00 1 00 1 00 search search speed speed H01 07 Origin Origin 0 36000 1 18000 position position offset offset H01 08 Reserved Reserved O 1 1 0 H01 09 Single Single point 1 65535 1 5 point po
265. modulation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Automatic adjustment selectian for carrier wave frequency 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PWM modulation mode 0 Two phase three phase switching 1 Three phase modulation Low frequency carrier limit 0 Disable 1 Enable Fig 6 63 PWM mode optimization selection Unit place Enable the over modulation This function determines whether to enable the over modulation function controlled by V F The over modulation function is always enabled in the vector control mode 0 Disabled Disable the over modulation function controlled by V F 1 Enabled Enable the over modulation function controlled by V F 208 Tens place Automatic adjustment selection for carrier wave frequency 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When the carrier wave frequency adjust automatically to select the actions the drive can adjust the carrier wave frequency automatically according to its internal temperature At this moment the actual maximum working carrier wave frequency of the drive is limited by the carrier wave frequency P12 02 set by the function code Hundreds place Modulation mode 0 Two phase three phase switching 1 Three phase modulation Thousands place Low frequency carrier limit 0 Disable 1 Enable P12 04 Current loop gain selection 0 Manual selection 0 1 0 When P12 05 current loop proportional gain is selected and P12 06 current loop integral time take
266. motor The adjustment value can be set according to your need In the same conditions if you want to realize quick protection upon the motor overload set a small value for P03 23 otherwise a bigger value shall be set I Note If the rated current of the load motor is not consistent with that of the drive the motor overload protection can be realized by setting the function code parameter of P03 23 E m0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled motor in static status 146 Before the auto tuning be sure to enter the correct nameplate parameters of the controlled motor If the controlled motor is motor 1 input PO3 00 P03 04 if the controlled motor is motor 2 input P03 12 P03 16 During the static setting of the asynchronous motor the motor is in static state The stator resistance R1 leakage inductive reactance relative to rated frequency X and rotator resistance R2 of the asynchronous motor will be automatically measured The measured parameter values will be automatically written into P03 06 P03 07 and P03 08 for motor 2 they will be written into P03 18 P03 19 and P03 20 During the static auto tuning of the synchronous motor if With PG vector control is selected as the control mode The measured parameter values will be automatically written into P03 06 P03 07 and P03 09 for motor 2 they will be written into P03 18 P03 19 and P03 21 If With PG vector control is selected be sure to disconnect the motor shaf
267. motor 0 200 C 0 The estimated temperature of motor indicates the motor temperature estimated Temperature display range 0 150 C precision 5 P01 30 PULSE frequency of terminal X8 0 0 200 00kHz 0 0 Indicating the input pulse frequency of terminal X8 P01 31 ASR Controller output 300 0 300 0 0 0 ASR controller output Corresponding value of the torque reference command P01 33 UVW input status of Expansion PG1 0 7 0 The expansion PG1 selects the UVW increment encoder It is in UVW input status This function code is used to display the UVW signal feedback status of the synchronous motor When the motor is rotating forward looking from the motor shaft it is rotating counterclockwise A is before B the change order of UVW is as follows 5 1 3 2 6 4 W means high level U means low level For example 4 means W 1 V 0 and U 0 When the motor is rotating reversely the change order of UVW is as follows 3 1 5 4 6 2 This function code can be used to judge whether the encoder wiring is proper If it displays 0 or 7 it indicates that the encoder wiring is wrong P01 34 Corresponding position of local PG Z pulse 0 65535 0 Corresponding position of local PG Z pulse The value 65535 corresponds to 360 P01 35 Speed of expansion PG1 0 00 600 00Hz 0 00Hz The encoder input speed of the expansion PG1 P01 36 Speed of expansion PG2 0 00 600 00Hz 0 00Hz The encoder input or output speed of the expansion PG2
268. n 1 B before A PG Filtering F 2 is AAE j X Unit place High speed filtering of coefficient PG signal local PG 0 9 P04 03 of local filtering ror 30 differential coefficient 1 Tens place Low speed filtering of local PG 0 9 encoder Expansion 0 Digital incremental interface PG card P04 04 interface PCimerface 4 sincos card 0 card type card type 2 Resolver card R 3 Reserved Number of pulses per Number of P04 05 j revolution pulses per 1 10000 2048 of revolution of expansion PG1 PG1 Rotation direction PG1 0 A before B P04 06 of Rotation 0 ects 1 B before A expansion direction PG1 Number of pulses per Number of revolution pulses per P04 07 1 10000 2048 of revolution of expansion PG2 PG2 Rotation direction 562 rotation 0 A before B P04 08 of ani 0 direction 1 B before A expansion PG2 Unit place Expansion PG1 Z pulse enabled Expansion gt PG Signal Tens place Expansion PG1 UVW P04 09 PG signal one age p 010 enabled signal enabled enabled Hundreds place Expansion PG2 Z pulse enabled 74 Unit place High speed filtering of expansion PG1 0 9 Expansion Tens place Low speed filtering of PG signal PG signal expansion PG1 0 9 P04 10 filterin filtering 7 1 0030 V r ng coefficient 2 Hundreds place High speed coefficient filtering of expansion PG2 0 9 Thousands place Low speed filtering of expansion PG2 0 9 Number of
269. n i ibi P08 18 ea 1 Reverse operation is prohibited 1 0 selection run at zero frequency upon selection reverse running command FWD REV FWD REV P08 19 5 0 00 360 00s 0 01s 0 00s dead time dead time 0 Switch once over the zero FWD REV FWD REV as ER frequency P08 20 switching switching 1 0 1 Switch once over the startup mode mode frequency Use ratio of Use ratio of P08 21 g 0 0 100 0 0 Disabled 0 1 00 0 dynamic braking braking Braking Braking P08 22 startup startup 700 780 1 750 voltage voltage Decelerati Deceleratio on time for n time for 0 00 100 00s 0 Automatic P08 23 0 01s 0 00s emergenc emergency high speed deceleration y stop stop 84 Group P09 Digital input output parameters P09 00 P09 07 Function selection of input terminals X1 X8 0 No function 1 Forward running FWD 2 Reverse running REV 3 External jog forward running control input 4 External jog reverse running control input 5 Three wire operation control 6 Multi stage reference terminal 1 7 Multi stage reference terminal 2 8 Multi stage reference terminal 3 9 Multi stage reference terminal 4 10 Acceleration deceleration time terminal 1 11 Acceleration deceleration time terminal 2 12 Main reference frequency pulse input valid only for X7 amp X8 13 Auxiliary reference frequency pulse input valid only for X7 orx8 X1 X8 14 Frequency increase command
270. n is damaged Replace the motor fan The motor operates at low TEE Add a large fan for the motor to dissipate frequency and large load for a A heat long time Abnormal control circuit Seek for service support ErAIF Abnormal Al The input analog is out of the analog input range and the absolute value is Check the analog input greater than 11V Abnormal temperature sampling Inverter module Naan Seek for service support circuit temperature Er THI li The inverter module temperature sampling ot Check the inverter module temperature disconnection samping eae sampling wire connection connected Rectifier module Abnormal temperature sampling aaa Seek for service support temperature circuit Er THr sampling The temperature sampling wire is Check the temperature sampling wire disconnection poorly connected connection Control board 10Vgrounding Confirm whether the 10V wiring is correct Er 10v 10V power The interface board circuit is Replace the interface board seek for short circuit damaged service support Abnormal internal The control board circuit is Er rEF Seek for service support over current reference damaged 254 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code Wrong PID limit The PID lower limit set value me Er PIL ey Adjust the PID upper lower limit set value value setting exceeds PID upper limit set value All the possible alarm types for SVM are summari
271. n terminal is disabled 38 Command source selection 1 39 Command source selection 2 The running command channel selection in Table 6 11 can be realized by selecting the ON OFF combination of the command source selection terminals 1 and 2 178 Table 6 11 Running command channel selection Selecting terminal Selecting 2 as command terminal 1 as Running command channel source command source Running command channel OFF OFF maintained Operation panel runnin OFF ON command channel Terminal running command ON OFF channel Serial port running command ON ON channel 40 Switching command to terminal When this function terminal is enabled the running command channel will be switched to the terminal running command channel When this function terminal is disabled the running command channel will return to the original state 41 FWD disabled 42 REV disabled FWD disabled If this terminal is enabled during the forward running the drive will coast to stop If this terminal is enabled before the forward running the drive will enter the zero frequency running state The reverse running will not be affected REV disabled Similarly 43 Drive running disabled The drive will coast to stop once this function code is enabled the drive will start normally once this function code is disabled 44 External stop command In the running state once this terminal function is enabled the drive will stop ac
272. n the motor overload set a small value for P03 11 otherwise a bigger value shall be set B BA Note If the rated current of the load motor is not consistent with the rated current of the drive the motor overload protection can be realized by setting the function code parameter of P03 11 P03 12 Rated power of motor 2 0 4 999 9kw depending on model 0 P98 04 depending on model Rated current of motor 2 0 1 999 9A depending on model Rated frequency of motor 2 1 00 3000 00 depending on model 0 60000rpm 1440rpm P03 13 Rated voltage of motor 2 P03 14 P03 15 P03 16 Rated rotating speed of motor 2 144 P03 17 Power factor of motor 2 0 001 1 000 depending on model They are used to set the parameters of the controlled motor 2 To enter the parameter group of motor 2 set the parameter value of P02 01 as 1 first To ensure the control performance be sure to properly set the values of P03 12 P03 16 according to the nameplate parameters of the motor P03 17 is the power factor of the motor mainly the asynchronous motor Generally the power factor of the synchronous motor is 1 which will be refreshed automatically after the normal setting of rotation You can choose not to change P03 17 manually or choose to change it manually in the following two situations 1 when all the settings are completed 2 when there is no setting B Note The power class of the motor shall be configured according to that
273. n the operation panel When the locking function is 0 Lock all the key enabled all the keys on the operation panel are disabled Lock all the keys except Lock all the keys except the STOP RESET key When the locking function the STOP RESET key is enabled only the STOP RESET key can be used j Lock all the keys except Lock all the keys except the gt gt key When the locking function is enabled the SHIFT key only the gt gt key can be used Lock all the keys except Lock all the keys except the Run and STOP keys When the locking 3 the RUN STOP RESET function is enabled only the Run and STOP keys can be used key P0005 TIO 0 Parameter changing status If the parameter value of this function code is set as 0 all the parameters can be changed 1 Clear fault memory information If the parameter value of this function code is set as 1 the content of the fault record P97 15 P97 21 will be cleared 2 Restore to leave factory value If the parameter value of this function code is set as 2 the function codes of the Group P97 15 will be restored to the leave factory values based on the drive type except for the user password P00 01 the drive status display parameters Group P01 and the motor parameters Group P03 and P12 04 3 Restore the quick start function group only If the parameter 3 is saved in this function code only the parameters related to the quick running of the drive will be resto
274. n the set value is 0 the drive will not detect the serial port communication signal P15 04 Response delay of the drive 0 1000ms Sms The serial port of the drive receives and executes commands from the host device until going back to the delay time which the response frame gave to the host device For the RTU mode the actual response delay shall be no less than the transmission time of 3 5 characters P15 05 Reserved function 1 for user 0 65535 0 Reserved P15 06 Reserved function 2 for user 0 65535 0 Reserved 6 16 Keyboard display setting parameters Group P16 Hundreds Tens Unit BITO Output freq Hz BIT1 Preset freq Hz flashing BIT2 Output current A BITO Running speed r min BIT1 Preset speed r min flashing BIT2 Running line speed m s BITS Preset line speed m s flashing BITO Output power BIT1 Output torque Fig 6 73 Setting of LED display parameter selection 1 when running P16 00 and P16 01 define the parameters that LED can display when the drive is in running state When 0 is selected for the BIT bit it indicates that the parameter is not displayed When 1 is selected for the BIT bit it indicates that the parameter is displayed P16 01 LED display parameter selection 2 when running 0 FFH 00 Tens Unit BITO Output voltage V BIT1 A11 V BIT2 Al2 V BITS AIB V BITO C
275. n2 reference 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 Low level of internal position2 reference High level of internal position3 reference Low level of internal position3 reference High level of internal position4 reference Low level of internal position4 reference High level of internal position5 reference H01 19 H01 20 H01 21 H01 22 H01 23 H01 24 H01 25 Low level of internal position5 reference High level of internal position6 reference Low level of internal position6 reference High level of internal position7 reference Low level of internal position7 reference High level of internal position8 reference Low level of internal position8 reference 233 When the spindle positioning mode H01 00 unit place select 0 and tens place of H01 00 select multi point positioning if HO1 04 select 0 positioning according to multi point positioning position selection terminals description Table 6 21 Internal multi point positioning terminal function is 76 77 78 Table 6 21 Multi point positioning position selection terminals description Internal multi point positioning position Positioning speed terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 source selection Internal position reference 1 H01 10 Multi stage reference 1 OFF OFF OFF HO01 11 P13 01 Internal position referen
276. nang voltage on mode motor 2 Rated a Rated Depending P03 14 current of 0 1 999 9A 0 1A current on mode motor 2 Rated Rated D di P03 15 frequency ae 1 00 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz ati frequency on mode of motor 2 Rated rotatin Raed P03 16 9 rotating 0 60000rpm 1rpm 1440rpm speed of speed motor 2 0 001 1 000 poet Power i Dependin P03 17 factor of It shall be used when calculating 0 001 p g factor the motor parameters with the on model motor 2 nameplates Stator Stator Dedendin P03 18 resistance resistance 0 000 65 000 0 001 PIEN on model of motor 2 R1 Leak S 9a5agS Leakage inductanc F j inductance e or direct s or direct Depending P03 19 axis i 0 0 2000 0 0 1 axis on model inductanc F inductance e of motor of motor 2 2 Rotator Rotator resistance resistance D di P03 20 sa p 0 000 65 000 0 001 PI back EMF back EMF on model constant constant of of motor 2 motor 2 Mutual Mutual inductance inductance Dependin P03 21 eorq axis orqaxis 0 0 2000 0 0 1 pegeing on model inductanc inductance e of motor of motor 2 72 2 nore No load Dependin P03 22 current lo 0 1 999 9A 0 1A p current lo g on model of motor 2 20 0 110 0 Set action level motor rated current drive rated current x 100 Overload Overload Low speed compensation actual A y action level set action level x pos za Protecton j protecion output frequency 30HZ x 45 0
277. nce No Same as above 0x6403 Digital process closed loop reference Yes Enabled when the process closed loop is enabled Pulse process closed loop reference 0x6404 reserved 272 Register Save upon Parameter name Remarks address power off 0x6405 Analog output AO1 setting No Enabled when P10 23 14 0x6406 Analog output AO2 setting No Enabled when P10 26 14 0x6407 Digital output DO setting No Enabled when P09 29 17 Frequency proportion setting 0x6408 reserved BITO BIT7 X1 X8 the corresponding bit selection and channel of P09 16 is enabled 0x6409 Virtual terminal control setting No BIT10 BIT13 When Y1 Y2 R1 R2 P09 18 P09 21 17 the corresponding terminal is enabled 0x640A Setting acceleration time 1 Yes 0x640B Setting deceleration time 1 Yes Enabled when the auxiliary reference channel is serial port communication and the auxiliary 0x640C Auxiliary frequency reference No reference is in valid bit controlling BIT2 of character 2 In the torque control mode it is enabled when the 0x640D Torque reference No torque reference channel is serial port and is in the torque control mode In the torque control mode it is enabled when the 0x640E Torque current reference No torque reference channel is serial port and is in the torque current control mode Four expansion analog outputs ExAO1 ExAO4 Expansion analog output ExAO Ox640F No when P27 20 P27 24 P27 28 P2
278. ng 1 Activate protection and coast to stop Thousands place of LED Overload detection level selection 0 Relative to rated current of the motor Er oL1 1 Relative to rated current of the drive Er oL2 Overload ee Overload P97 04 P detection 20 0 200 0 0 1 130 0 detection level level Overload recalar Overload P97 05 P gt detection 0 0 60 0s 0 1s 5 0s detection g i time time Motor Motor over temp over temper P97 06 erature ature 0 00 10 00V 0 01 10 00 protection protection point point Over volta Over voltag 0 Disabled when the braking P97 07 ge stall e stall resistor is installed 1 1 selection selection 1 Enabled Over volta Over voltag P97 08 ge point at e point at 120 0 150 0 Udce 0 1 140 0 stall stall Auto Auto current 0 Disabled at constant speed P97 09 current limiting 1 Enabled at constant speed 1 1 limiting Acuan Note Always enabled for 110 action acceleration deceleration selection Auto t Cc t p97 10 Cren orent _ 20 0 200 0 le 0 1 150 0 limiting limiting level level Frequency reduction Frequency 10 00 P97 11 rate upon reduction 0 00 99 99HZ s 0 01Hz s f Hz s current rate limiting G di pe te Grounding er short circuit 0 Disable circuit P97 12 detection 1 Enable enabled for model of 1 1 detection Un upon p 7 5kW and below power up power up 0 No function 1 100 Auto reset times P97 13 AUG reset Auto reset Note Auto
279. ng enable terminal function is 72 In order to suppress interference and fluctuations of analog the maximum frequency of reaming should not set too high the CNC need to do shift processing when reaming H02 12 Analog filter 0 10 000s 0 0010 Analog channel filtering time constant when high speed sampling the input signal is filtered the longer the filtering time the stronger the immunity become but the slower the response become the shorter the filtering time the faster the response become but the weaker the immunity become H02 13 Analog sampling mode 0 1 0 0 Normal sampling 1 High speed sampling Tapping command is enabled analog sampling mode of main frequency reference is set by H02 13 When high speed sampling drive response analog fast deceleration time automatically becomes zero regardless of the setting HO2 01 H02 02 6 22 Peeling function parameters Group H03 0 1 0 0 Disable 1 Enable Feeding wheel speed selection 0 2 0 0 PG expansion card Feeding wheel linear speed input use X2 terminal input of extended PG cards 1 X8 terminal If the feeding wheel linear speed signal is single pulse mode using X8 terminal as linear speed input 2 Digital set Digital set feeding wheel linear speed is mainly used for not feeding for system debugging H03 02 Feeding wheel speed digital set 0 0 300 00m min 60 00m min When the linear speed input H03 01 2 digital set feeding wheel linear speed is mainly used for not
280. ng range can be set as 0 0 100 0 corresponding to zero frequency to the maximum frequency When used as multi speed operation independently its operating direction is controlled by the running terminal When the running terminal is forward output FWD operate the forward frequency When the running terminal is reverse output REV operate the reverse frequency The running direction shall be set correspondingly according to PLC while operating as PLC When it is the multi stage closed loop reference 100 0 100 0 corresponds to 10V 10V P13 16 0 1122H 0000 Simple PLC running mode selection Simple PLC function is a multi speed generator the drive can automatically change its running frequency and direction according to its running time to meet the requirements of the process This function was previously completed by PLC programmable logic controller but now it can be realized by the drive itself as shown in Fig 6 64 Indicating signal for completing one stage of PLC operation Indicating signal for completing a clcye of PLC operation Fig 6 64 Simple PLC running chart Fig 6 64 a a15 di d15 indicate the acceleration and deceleration time of their current stages f1 f15 T1 T15 indicate the set frequency and stage running time of their current stages which will be defined in the following function codes respectively PLC stage and cycle completion indication can indicate signals via the two way open collector o
281. ng the power supply Meanwhile be sure to confirm that the chage LED is completely off and the DC bus voltage is below 36V otherwise electric shock may be caused e Only qualified personnel can replace the components Do not leave any wire or metal parts inside the drive otherwise fire may be caused e After changing the control board the parameters must be properly set before operating the drive otherwise property damage may be caused e The bare parts of the terminal lugs in the main circuit must be wrapped with insulation tape otherwise electric shock may be caused WARNING e When carrying the drive protect the operation panel and the cover against any stress otherwise the drive may drop and cause human injury or property damage Please install the drive on the place that can withstand the weight of the drive otherwise the drive may drop and cause human injury or property damage Do not install the the drive in the environment with water splash e g near the water pipe otherwise you may suffer the property loss e Take care not to drop any foreign objects such as the screws gaskets and metal bars into the drive otherwise fire and property damage may be caused Do not install and operate the drive if it is damaged or its components are not complete otherwise fire and human injury may be caused Do not install the product in the place exposed to direct sunlight otherwise property
282. nge is 10V 0V 10V The specifications for the analog input signal 10V 0V 10V after adjustment are as follows For the segment 0V 10V FWD the corresponding frequency can be defined in the function code of Group P10 For the segment 0V 10V REV the corresponding frequency can be defined in the function code of Group P10 4 Terminal pulse PULSE reference The frequency setting is confirmed by the terminal pulse frequency and can be input by X7 and X8 only please refer to definition in the function code of Group PO9 for details 136 5 Simple PLC running The frequency setting is confirmed by the simple PLC program When the drive is powered on it will use the value of the function code of P13 01 as the current set frequency directly 6 Process closed loop PID The frequency setting is determined by the calculation result of the process closed loop PID 7 Multi speed running In this mode when the drive is powered on it will use the value of the function code P02 05 as the current set frequency directly The running frequency is determined by the terminal function the multi speed is the value of P02 05 as default Select the multi speed running function according to the terminal function and run with corresponding speed when the terminal input is enabled Please refer to the explanation to the function code for details 8 Expansion bus card reference Set the reference via the expansion bus card 9 Expansion PG2 puls
283. nged after the hardware jumper finished selection to ensure the correct input signal 2 For AO1 and AO2 the output voltage signal or the current signal can be selected via the jumper and the output range is selected and determined by the function code P10 22 26 3 If external braking components need to be configured the braking unit and braking resistor shall be used Please pay attention to the positive and negative polarity when connecting the braking unit 4 o in the figure is main circuit terminal and in the figure is control circuit terminal 5 For the usage of the control circuit terminal please refer to section 3 2 6 Fig 3 3 is the wiring diagram for basic operation of model 75kW and below and Fig 3 4 is the wiring diagram for basic operation of model 90kW and above 3 2 Wiring and configuration of control circuit 3 2 1 The arrangement sequence diagram of the control circuit terminals r Pe BRA BRC Y2 COM 50 B B COM PLC P24 X5 10 GND 10 Al3 A02 Fig 3 5 The arrangement sequence diagram of the control circuit terminals 3 2 2 Wiring of control circuit terminals CJ Note It is suggested to use the wire with cross section area over 1mm as the connecting wire of the control circuit terminals For the terminal function description please refer to Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Table for the functions of interface board terminal Type Terminal Name Function Specification Us
284. nimum reference point If the inflection point is set on other positions it has other flexible correspondence please refer to the example below for details Reference freq Reference freq fia mn fina 2 es Se 4 N Fa pe or TE er oN YF pi fmint lt Fminl oS Prin Pmax P Prin Pmax Amin Amax A Amin Amax A 1 Positive 2 Negative P pulse terminal input A Reference of analog signal of Al1 AI3 Pmin Amin Min reference Pmax Amax Max reference fmin Freq corresponding to Min reference fmax Freq corresponding to Max reference Fig 6 46 Analog output frequency feature curve When the analog input A is 100 it corresponds to 10V or 20mA when the pulse frequency P is 100 it corresponds to the maximum input pulse frequency defined by P09 11 or P09 12 P10 00 Analog input type selection 00 11 00 Tens Unit Al1 Input type select 0 10V 10V 1 0 20mA Al2 Input type select 0 10V 10V 1 0 20mA Fig 6 47 Analog input type selection 194 This function code is used for selecting the analog input type and range of Al1 and Al2 P10 01 Analog AI function selection 000 EEEH 000H Hundreds Tens Unit Alt function selection Al2 function selection Al3 function selection Fig 6 48 Analog input function selection Al function selections are as follows 0 No function 1 Main set frequ
285. nning forward A is before B When the motor is running reversely B is before A When the wiring sequence between the drive interface board and the PG1 has the same direction with the wiring sequence between the drive and motor the set value shall adopt 0 FWD otherwise it shall adopt 1 REV The correspondence relation between the wiring directions can be conveniently adjusted by changing this parameter and you do not need to rewire the relevant unit Note If this function code is set wrongly the drive will report the PG fault Er PG1 P04 07 Number of pulses per revolution of expansion PG2 1 10000 2048 Expansion encoder parameters The expansion PG2 is set according to the number of pulses per revolution PPR of the pulse encoder expansion PG2 selected The pulse encoder is mainly used for the frequency division output or the position feedback input P04 08 Rotation direction of expansion PG2 0 1 0 Expansion encoder parameters 0 A before B 1 B before A When the motor is running forward A is before B When the motor is running reversely B is before A When the wiring sequence between the drive interface board and the PG2 has the same direction with the wiring sequence between the drive and motor the set value shall adopt 0 FWD otherwise it shall adopt 1 REV The correspondence relation between the wiring directions can be conveniently adjusted by changing this parameter and you do not nee
286. not more than 100ms otherwise it may enter the wrong indexing command such as when performing indexing angle 5 must make indexing terminal 1 indexing 3 terminal valid simultaneously the error between two delay time should not exceed 100ms otherwise it may perform indexing angle tor indexing angle 4 See H01 for details Before performing indexing command you must first make indexing terminals 1 2 3 invalid and then output the corresponding indexing command Such as performing i indexing angle5 you must first set the indexing terminal to 0 indexing terminals are invalid and then make indexing 1 3 terminals valid 89 Servo control switching terminal If the current control mode is speed torque control H00 00 1 enables switching terminals switching to the servo control mode If the current control mode is servo control H00 00 2 enables switching terminals switching to the speed torque control mode See detailed description of function code HOO 181 90 Tapping enable Tapping function enable terminal 91 Negative limit switch valid only for X6 X7 X8 92 Positive limit switch valid only for X6 X7 X8 When positioning control if reaching the left right travel limit switch then select the appropriate action depending on the thousands place of function code H01 02 This function is only for X6 X7 X8 If when startup it has been on the left travel limit switch the motor can only be reversed if when startu
287. nspection Cycle Inspection g contents means 1 Temperature i TER 1 Temperature 1 10 C 40 C derating is required ue meter and A and humidity at 40 C 50 C Operating hygrometer environme Anytime 7 2 Dust water 2 Visual 2 No signs of drop of water and n and drop leak detection drop leak 3 Odor 3 Smell 3 No strange smell 1 The vibration is normal and 1 Vibration and 4 Touch stable The temperature of the Touc Drive heat generation Anytime enclosure and the operating of the fan is normal 2 Noise 2 Hear 2 No abnormal sound 1 Heat 3 1 Generating heat without any Motor Anytime 1 Touch by hand f generation exception 260 2 Noise 2 Hear 2 Low and regular noise 1 Within the rated range and 1 Output current 1 Current meter a three phase equilibrium Running 2 Within the rated range and 2 Output voltage Anytime 2 Voltmeter aon status three phase equilibrium 3 Internal 3 The difference with the ambient 3 Thermometer temperature temperature is less than 35 C 9 2 Periodical maintenance The users may carry out periodical maintenance of the drive once every 3 or 6 months according to the operating environment aa Note 1 Only the specially trained professionals are allowed to dismantle maintain and replace parts of the device 2 Do not leave any screws or washers in the machine otherwise device damage may be caused
288. o enabled via terminal terminal function 95 If HO1 04 select 1 auto start after the completion of positioning after the hold time set by H01 27 automatically start the next positioning When internal multi point positioning if HO1 04 select O manual DI terminal selection regardless of the number of automatic operation mode timer X settings after the completion of a positioning starting the next positioning position need enable terminal terminal 95 function If HO1 04 select 1 auto start after the completion of positioning after the hold time set automatically start the next positioning Note that this function does not work in the spindle indexing 232 H01 05 Spindle transmission ratio 0 000 30 000 1 000 Transmission ratio refers to the reduction ratio of the spindle and the spindle motor equivalent to the spindle motor speed spindle speed H01 06 Origin search speed 0 00 30 00Hz 1 00 Origin search speed setting digital positioning if it is absolute positioning it will automatically perform origin search origin search mode can set search origin only once or search the origin each run by hundreds place of H01 01 If the relative positioning there is no need to search the origin H01 07 Origin position offset 0 36000 18000 Internal digital absolute positioning origin offset is offset pulses relative to the origin unit pulses When internal digital positioning H01 07 is 18 000 represents that offset pu
289. oid poor heat dissipation Installation spacing and distance requirements for plastic chassis product as shown in Figure 2 2 installation spacing and distance requirements for sheet metal chassis product as shown in Figure 2 3 a LARL LLL fi LLLLSL ELS P ce A Air outlet l0cm 1 B y 1 JA A j J I J J adle l Je i ii i A i A inet us ILLL LUEI PF LAULS UULA EE Fig 2 2 Installation spacing for models of 45kW and below 16 LILLY Air outlet gt 35cm E a 2 aN 1 s ILLI wi ALLIE Fig 2 3 Installation spacing for models of 55kW and above When more than two drives are mounted in the up down installation mode the partition plate should be installed between them so as to avoid the influence of the heat dissipation from the bottom drive on the top one as shown in Fig 2 4 Installation Plate Hot air amp Cold air CALLI LOLLE LUS LUL ELUI APE PLP A PPE AAPA SA PEP ZAL Fig 2 4 Installation of multiple drives 17 Chapter 3 Wiring of Servo Drive This chapter introduces the wiring and cable connection of drive as well as the issues needing attention 5 DANGER Do not open the cover until the power supply of the drive is completely disconnected for at least 10 minutes Make sure that the internal wiring be conducted only when the charge LED inside the drive is off and the voltage between the main circuit terminals DC and DC is below 36
290. ol parameters of the drive and the parameter value will not be saved 0x10 after power off Change the single 16 byte function code parameter or control parameter of the drive and the parameter 0x41 value will be saved after power off 0x42 Manage the drive function codes Change multiple function code or control parameters of the drive and the parameter values will be saved 0x43 after power off All the function code parameters control parameters and status parameters of the drive are mapped as the read write registers of Modbus The read write features and range of the function code parameter follow the drive user manual The group number of the drive function code is mapped as the high byte of the register address and the group internal index i e the serial number of the parameter in the group is mapped as the low byte of the register address The control parameter and status parameter of the drive are virtual function code groups of the drive The correspondence between the group numbers of the function codes and the high bytes of the register address mapped are as shown in the following table 265 High byte of the address High byte of the address Drive parameter group Drive parameter group mapped mapped Group P00 0x00 Group P12 0x0C Group P01 0x01 Group P13 0x0D Group P02 0x02 Group P15 Ox0F Group P03 0x03 Group P16 0x10 Group P04 0x04 Group P97 0x61 Group P05 0x05 Group P98 0x62
291. olta a Pens P97 18 th d voltage at 0 999V 1V ov ni the 3rd fault fault Actual Actual current at P97 19 current at 0 0 999 9A 0 1A 0 0A the 3rd the 3rd fault fault Runni e cen P97 20 quency frequency at 0 00Hz 3000 00Hz 0 01Hz 0 00Hz at the 3rd the 3rd fault fault Drive running priye i 0 FFFFH P97 21 status at PREN 1 0000 status atthe The same as P01 17 the 3rd 3rd fault fault Group P98 Drive parameters P98 00 Serial No Serial No 0 FFFF 1 700 DSP DSP P98 01 software software 0 00 99 99 0 01 2 00 version version No 113 No User cust omized User custo P98 02 s mized 0 9999 1 3 version version No No FPGA FPGA software P98 03 software 0 00 99 99 0 01 1 00 version version No No re Rated Rated Output power 0 999 9KVA A Manufactu capacity capacity set by the model automatically rer setting 0 999V P98 05 Rated Rated 4v Manufactu voltage voltage set by the model automatically rer setting Rated Rated 0 999 9A Manufactu P98 06 3 0 1A 5 current current set by the model automatically rer setting 0 220V 1 380V 2 400V Drive Drive series Manufactu P98 07 series 3 415V 1 a selection rer setting selection 4 440V 5 460V 6 480V Group H0O Servo control parameters 0 Non servo control Servo Servo 1 Speed torque servo control 00 00 contre control 1 0 switching switching 2 Servo speed torque selection
292. on as well Hundreds place Selection for switching from speed control to torque control 0 Switching directly When the torque control command is enabled switch to the torque control mode directly 1 Switching once over the torque switching point of P06 05 When the torque control command is enabled switch to the torque control mode once the current torque value exceeds the switching point set via P06 05 This function is used to set the torque reference physical channel under the torque control mode 0 The torque command is set by the digit of function code P06 03 The digital setting range of the torque command is 300 300 1 The torque command is set by the analog terminal Al 160 The maximum value of the Al input voltage current 10V 20mA corresponds with 300 of the rated torque Please refer to the description in Group P10 for the correspondence between the Al input and the torque The positive and negative input of Al corresponds with the positive and negative value of the torque command respectively When using this function the user needs to define the function of the Al terminal as the torque command reference Taking Al1 as an example set the unit place of the function code P10 01 as 8 Please refer to the descriptions in Group P10 for the detailed settings 2 The torque command is set by the terminal PULSE The maximum value of the terminal PULSE input frequency corresponds with 300 of the rated torque Please refer
293. on indicating the running status etc which needn t consider the positive and negative Its data type is unsigned int or unsigned long The type and the value range of parameters are as shown in the following table 280 Number of Type Value range Remarks bits int 16 32768 32767 Parameter of type long 32 2147483648 2147483647 unsigned int 16 0 65535 Parameter of type II unsigned long 32 0 4294967296 If the 16 bit access mode is adopted to read the parameter with an actu al length of 32 bits the 16 low bits of this parameter of 32 bits will be captured and returned This value may be not equal to the original value it will be detailed in the following text If the 32 bit access mode is adopted to read the parameter with an actual length of 16 bits the 32 bit data returned is the data expanded that is the length of the 16 bit parameter is expanded The principles for the length expansion are as follow if the highest bit of the 16 bit parameter value is 0 its 16 high bits will be filled with 0 if the highest bit is 1 it needs to judge the type of the parameter for the parameter of type I its 16 high bits will be filled with 1 but for the parameter of type Il its 16 high bits will be filled with 0 If the data length is the same that is reading the 16 bit parameter in the 16 bit mode or reading the 32 bit parameter in the 32 bit mode there is no need to expand or cut the length the or
294. on error alarm output taking Y1 as example set the function code P09 18 28 then simultaneous ly output a position error alarm indication signal H01 46 Origin signal loss action 0 1 0 0 Been looking for 1 Report failure Er ORG after looking for twice 6 21 Spindle tapping parameters Group H02 Tapping command enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Terminal setting function 90 can make tapping command enable as long as one of the two enable can make tapping command enable Tapping command is enabled the time required for the drive accelerates from zero frequency to the maximum frequency P02 15 Tapping command is enabled the time required for the drive decelerates from the maximum output frequency P02 15 to zero frequency H02 03 Tapping speed loop P1 H02 04 H02 05 H02 06 H02 07 H02 08 H02 09 0 1 200 0 20 0 0 000 10 000s 0 200 0 8 0 0 1 200 0 20 0 0 000 10 000s 0 200 0 8 0 0 100 0 10 0 Tapping speed loop I ASR1 output filter Tapping speed loop P2 Tapping speed loop I2 ASR2 output filter PI switching frequency 237 Tapping command is enabled the speed loop parameters are set by HO2 03 H02 09 H02 10 Tapping maximum frequency 0 100 0 100 0 Tapping command is enabled output frequency for the maximum analog voltage 10V corresponding to H02 11 Reaming maximum frequency 0 100 0 100 0 Reaming command is enabled output frequency for the maximum analog voltage 10V corresponding to Reami
295. on of the terminal board P10 23 Analog output terminal AO1 function 0 26 00 P10 24 AO gain 0 0 200 0 100 0 P10 25 AOtIzero offset correction 100 0 100 0 0 0 The linear correspondence relationship between the AO1 and AO2 output and the indication range is as shown in Table 6 14 Table 6 14 Analog output terminal indication Item Function Indication range 0 Output frequency 0 Maximum output frequency 1 Set frequency 0 Maximum output frequency Set frequency after acceleration 2 0 Maximum output frequency deceleration Rotating speed of motor V F 3 0 Maximum rotating speed control disabled 4 Output current 0 200 of the rated current of the drive 5 Output current 0 200 of the rated current of the motor 6 Output torque 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 7 Output torque current 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 8 Output voltage 0 120 of the rated voltage of the drive 9 Bus voltage 0 800V 10 Al1 O Maximum analog input 11 Al2 0 Maximum analog input 12 Al3 O Maximum analog input 13 Output power 0 200 of the rated power of the motor 14 Percentage of host device 0 4095 15 Torque limit value 1 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 16 Torque limit value 2 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 17 Torque offset 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 200 Item Function Indication range 18 Torque command 0
296. on the PID closed loop adjustment P16 06 P16 07 Inverter module temperature Rectifier module temperature 0 0 150 0 C 0 0 0 0 150 0 C 0 0 P16 06 indicates the temperature of the inverter module The over temperature protection values of the inverter modules of different types may be different P16 07 indicates the temperature of the rectifier The temperature of the rectifier bridge below 30kW will not be detected Temperature display range 0 150 C precision 5 P16 08 Motor temperature measured 0 200 C 0 This function code indicates the motor temperature measured in actual situation P16 09 P16 10 P16 11 Accumulated power on hours Accumulated running time Accumulated running hours of fan 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 0 P16 09 P16 11 are used for indicating the accumulated power up hours running hours and running hours of the fan of the drive from leaving the factory to now 6 17 Protection and fault parameters Group P97 P97 00 P97 01 Fault protection and alarm property setting 1 0 1113H 0000 Thousands Hundreds Tens Uint Action upon communication fault 0 Activate protection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running 2 Alarm and stop in the stop mode only in serial port control mode 3 Alarm and stop in the stop mode in all control modes Action upon contactor abnormality 0 Activate p
297. ops running so does the fan RI2IIS5 Reserved 100 400 0 P12 16 Reserved 0 65535 0 PIA Reserved 0 65535 0 P12 18 Reserved 0 65535 0 P12 19 Reserved 0 65535 0 6 14 Multi stage reference and simple PLC parameters Group P13 P13 00 Multi stage reference property setting 0 Multi stage frequency reference 0 1 0 As a frequency mode it is applied to multi speed operation mode and simple PLC operation mode 1 Multi stage closed loop reference As a voltage reference it is applied to the process PID operation mode P13 01 P13 02 P13 03 P13 04 P13 05 Multi stage reference 1 100 0 100 0 10 0 __ 100 0 100 0 00 0 Multi stage reference 2 Multi stage reference 3 Multi stage reference 4 Multi stage reference 5 210 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 P13 06 P13 07 P13 08 P13 09 P13 10 P13 11 IPI I P13 13 Multi stage reference 6 Multi stage reference 7 Multi stage reference 8 Multi stage reference 9 Multi stage reference 10 Multi stage reference 11 Multi stage reference 12 Multi stage reference 13 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 100 10 0 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 0 90 0 0 0 P13 14 P13 15 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 Multi stage reference 14 Multi stage reference 15 When it is the multi stage frequency its setti
298. ore the automatic running under different running command channels upon the power up after power down Fig 6 29 Output volt RMS value 4 Output Freq Initial Freq of braking Operating command Waiting time Braking Energy Braking time Schematic diagram for decelerate to stop DC braking P08 16 Selecting restart function upon power fault 0 1 0 P08 17 Waiting time for restart upon power fault 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s This function code is used to set whether the drive will start to run automatically and the waiting time When P08 16 is set as 0 the drive will not run automatically upon the power up after power down When P08 16 is set as 1 if the startup conditions are met the drive will run automatically after the waiting time defined by P08 17 upon the power up after power down Please refer to Table 6 5 Table 6 5 Startup conditions for re start upon power down Stal ace ce ee ee eee erat eee o P08 16 aes None None None None aes None a Stop 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Run 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Stop 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 f Run 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 Indicates the actions of the drive upon power up under different combination conditions 0 Enter the standby state 1 Start to run automatically Note 1 When the start stop is controlled through the operation panel serial port and Three wire terminal 1 amp 2 the command type is pulse type and there
299. orque Torque 2 Terminal PULSE reference P06 02 reference reference 3 Communication reference 1 0 selection selection 4 Closed loop output 5 PLC card or bus reference reserved Digital Digital P06 03 reference reference of 300 0 300 0 0 1 0 0 of torque torque Torque Torque reference reference P06 04 accelerati acceleration 0 65535ms 1 0 on deceler deceleratio ation time n time Speed t peoc tor Speed torqu P06 05 Ae e switching 0 6 300 0 initial torque 0 1 100 0 switching R g point point Speed Speed torque torque P06 06 miro ee 0 1000ms 1 0 switching switching delay delay ae FWD speed 0 FWD speed limit value P06 07 speed limit reed 1 0 limit channel 1 Al reference channel FWD d P06 08 FWD ne Speed O 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 speed limit limit value 78 value REV ae REV d 0 REV speed limit value P06 09 speed limit V SPee 1 0 limit channel 1 Al reference channel REV P06 10 speedtimit REY SPeed 9 904 100 0 0 1 100 0 limit value value Mechanic Mechanical al loss loss ROSA compensa compensati 20 0 20 0 0 1 0 0 tion value on Inertia A Inertia oni compensa 0 Disable P06 12 e compensati 1 0 tion 1 Enable y on enabling enabling Inertia Inertia P06 13 identificati ks 0 gt 1 Start to identify 1 0 identification on Identifyi P06 14 aes Identifying 0 100 0 of the rated torque of 5A 10 0 torqu
300. orque offset 2 The jumper selection for the control board Al1 input type is 4 20mA 3 The unit place of P10 05 selects 0 linear 1 4 P10 06 100 P10 07 300 195 5 Select the digital input Xi terminal function 50 and cause the Xi terminal to have the OFF ON jumping only when this function has the OFF ON jumping the analog input torque offset can be enabled otherwise the analog input reference torque offset will be maintained at the previous analog reference value CJ Note The Al analog input torque offset is only a part of the torque offset The final torque offset also includes the P06 18 setting 4 Speed limit value 1 When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P06 07 function code setting When used as the voltage input the 0 10V corresponds to 0 100 of the maximum drive output frequency and the current input 20mA corresponds to 100 of the maximum drive output frequency 5 Speed limit value 2 When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P06 09 function code setting The analog input meaning is the same as speed limit value 1 6 Torque limit value 1 When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P05 13 function code setting The analog input meaning is the same as torque offset 7 Torque limit value 2 When this function is selected it shall be used together with the P05 14 function code setting The analog input meaning is the sam
301. ot need to rewire the relevant unit Note If this function code is set wrongly the drive will report the PG fault Er PG1 P04 03 Filtering coefficient of local differential encoder 0 99H 30 Local encoder parameters Tens Unit Unit high speed filtering times Tens low speed filtering times Fig 6 15 Filtering coefficient of local differential encoder It is used to set the filtering times of the feedback speed Unit place high speed filtering times Tens place low speed filtering times At the low speed if there is any current vibration noise you can increase the low speed filtering times Otherwise the low speed filtering times shall be decreased to improve the system response features P04 04 Expansion PG interface card type 0 3 0 Expansion encoder parameters 150 There are three types of expansion encoder interface card including 0 Digital incremental interface card 1 SinCos card 2 resolver card 3 Reserved It is not necessary to set this function code Once the encoder expansion card DSP application is inserted it can automatically identify the card type and display Expansion encoder parameters Set according to the number of pulses per revolution PPR of the pulse encoder PG1 selected for the insert expansion card P04 06 Rotation direction of expansion PG1 0 1 0 Expansion encoder parameters 0 A before B 1 B before A When the motor is ru
302. otor 2 V F frequency 2 P07 13 Motor 2 V F voltage 2 P07 15 P07 11 0 0 P07 14 Motor 2 V F frequency 1 0 00 P07 12 0 00Hz P07 15 Motor 2 V F voltage 1 0 0 P07 13 0 0 P07 09 P07 15 are used to determine different V F curves of motor 2 under different V F control modes P07 16 Motor 2 torque increase 0 0 30 0 0 0 P07 17 Motor 2 torque increase cut off point 0 0 50 0 10 0 The same as P07 07 and P07 08 P07 18 Motor stable factor 0 255 10 The motor is under V F control mode When the motor can not run normally due to the oscillation increase this gain properly The larger the gain is the more obvious the suppression on the oscillation will be To avoid great effect on the V F running the gain value should be as small as possible while effective motor oscillation suppression shall be ensured 0 Disabled 1 Always enabled 2 Disabled only in deceleration situation AVR means automatic voltage regulation Under the V F control mode when fast stop is need and there is no braking resistor selecting Disabled only in deceleration situation can remarkably reduce the possibility of over voltage fault If there is braking resistor or the fast deceleration is not needed please select Always enabled P07 20 Drooping control value 0 30 00 Hz 0 00Hz This function is applicable to the application of multiple drives driving the same load It can realize the uniform distribution of power When the load of some
303. oup P03 Corresponding parameters will be displayed based on the motor selected SVM has three types of running command channels as below 0 Operation panel running command channel To start and stop through the RUN STOP and M keys on the operation panel 1 Terminal running command channel To start and stop through the external control terminals FWD REV JOG FWD JOG REV etc 2 Serial port running command channel To start and stop through the serial port 3 Reserved C1 Note Even in the running process modifying this function code parameter or using the external terminal or pressing the M key can change the running command channel Please use it carefully P02 03 Running direction setting 0 1 0 This function is applicable to the operation panel running command channel and serial port running command channel It is disabled for the terminal running command channel 0 FWD 1 REV 0 Digital reference 1 adjusting with the A amp V keys on the operation panel When the drive is powered on it will use the value of the function code P02 05 as the current set frequency When the drive is in the running or stop status the current set frequency of the drive can be changed through the A amp V keys on the operation panel 1 Digital reference 2 adjusting with terminal UP DOWN 135 In this mode when the drive is powered on it will use the value of the function code P02 05 as the current set frequency directly
304. p high spee Speed loop d high speed igh spee P05 04 i 0 1 200 0 0 1 10 0 proportion proportional al gain gain ASR2 P Speed loop high spee Speed loop P05 05 di high speed 0 000 10 000S 0 001s 0 600s integral i time integral time ASR2 1 ASR2 ASR2 P05 06 output 0 8 corresponds to 0 2 8 10ms 1 0 output filter filter ASR asr pos o7 SMECMINS switching 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 frequency 2 frequency 2 Proportion al gain of Proportional special gain of speed special P05 08 0 1 200 0 0 1 20 0 section for speed speed section for loop speed loop ASR3 P Integral time of special Integral time speed of special P05 09 Section for speed 0 000 10 000s 0 001s 0 200s speed section for loop speed loop ASR3 1 76 ASR ene ASR pos 10 Switching switching 0 0 100 0 0 1 80 0 frequency frequency 3 3 Differential Differential 0 Disable P05 11 gain gain 1 0 A y 1 Enable enabling enabling ASR ASR P05 12 differential differential 0 00 10 00 0 01 0 00 gain gain Electric l 0 Electric torque limit value Electric torque an 1 Al reference P05 13 Ae torque limit 1 0 limit 2 Terminal PULSE reference channel channel 3 Closed loop output Braking 0 Braking torque limit value torque Braking 1 Al reference P05 14 ET torque limit 1 0 limit 2 Terminal PULSE reference h i channel ehanns 3 Closed loop output Electric Electric P05
305. p it has been on the right travel limit switch the motor can only forward 95 Internal positioning start enable When H01 04 select 0 internal positioning start when the terminal is valid then start positioning P09 08 FWD REV running mode setting 0 3 0 This parameter defines four different modes for controlling the drive running through the external terminal 0 Two wire running mode 1 K1 K2 Running command K1 SVM gt FWD 0 0 Ste lop K2 1 0 FWD 7 REV 0 1 REV COM 1 1 Stop Fig 6 31 Two wire running mode 1 1 Two wire running mode 2 K1 K2 Running command K1 SVM g FWD 0 0 Stop K2 _ 0 1 Stop o o 5 REV 1 0 FWD com 1 1 REV Fig 6 32 Two wire running mode 2 2 Three wire running mode 1 182 SB2 T SVM n FWD SB1 Ig gt Xi SB3 r REV COM Fig 6 33 Three wire running mode 1 Where SB1 Stop key SB2 FWD key SB3 REV key Xi is the multifunctional input terminal of X1 X8 Its corresponding terminal function shall be defined as function No 5 three wire running control 3 Three wire running mode 2 SB2 SVM K Running or O FWD direction SB1 iR Xi selection K1 0 FWD T REY 1 REV 7 COM Fig 6 34 Three wire running mode 2 Where SB1 Stop key SB2 Run key Xi is the multifunctional input te
306. quency of the drive including the frequency direction P01 06 Output voltage 0 480 0 Monitoring the output voltage of the drive Monitoring the output current of the drive 129 Monitoring the percentage of the drive torque current relative to the motor rated current Monitoring the percentage of the flux current relative to the motor rated current Monitoring the percentage of the output torque of the drive relative to the motor rated torque Monitoring the percentage of the output power of the drive relative to the motor rated power P01 12 Estimated frequency of motor 600 00 600 00 0 00 Estimating the rotor frequency of the motor under the open loop vector condition P01 13 Measured frequency of motor 600 00 600 00 0 00 The rotor frequency of the motor measured based on the encoder under the closed loop vector condition P01 14 High level of output kWh 0 65535 10000kwh 0 P01 15 Low level of output kWh 0 9999kwh 0 Monitoring the output power of the drive P01 16 DC bus voltage 0 800V 0 Monitoring the DC bus voltage of drive Port FEO Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit TO RUN STOP T1 REV FWD T2 Running at zero speed T3 Accelerating vvu TO Decelerating T1 Running at constant speed T2 Pre exciting T3 Tuning vvu TO Over current limiting T1 DC over voltage limiting T2 Torque limiting T3 Speed limiting vvu
307. r is low Adopt the drive with high power class 248 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code Abnormal input voltage Check the input power supply i Lengthen the acceleration time Acceleration Acceleration time is too short f appropriately Er oU1 over voltage of i When instantaneous sto MEGNE R Set the start mode P08 00 as the speed happens restart the rotating tracking restart function motor The deceleration time is too short Deceleration compared with regeneration Lengthen the deceleration time Er oU2 over voltage of energy the drive There is potential energy load or Select appropriate dynamic braking the load inertial torque is large components When the vector control f See the ASR parameter setting of Group functions the ASR parameter Po5 setting is improper The acceleration deceleration Lengthen the acceleration deceleration time Constant speed Er oU3 over voltage of time is too short appropriately the drive Abnormal input voltage Check the input power supply The input voltage fluctuates Install the input reactor abnormally Large load inertia Adopt dynamic braking components 4 Check encoder line number settingt Motor encoder setting error maT a encoder direction and wiring Overload at Er STE i The initial angle learning for Relearning initial angle for synchronous ow spee p synchronous motor is incorrect motor Motor
308. r parameters Group P03 P03 00 Rated power of motor 1 0 4 999 9kw 0 P03 01 Rated voltage of motor 1 0 P98 04 0 P03 02 Rated current of motor 1 0 1 999 9A depending on model P03 03 Rated frequency of motor 1 1 00 3000 0 depending on model P03 04 Rated rotating speed of motor 1 0 60000rpm 1440rpm 142 P03 05 Power factor of motor 1 0 001 1 000 depending on model They are used to set the parameters of the controlled motor 1 To enter the parameter group of motor 1 set the parameter value of P02 01 as 0 first To ensure the control performance be sure to set the correct values for PO3 00 P03 04 according to the nameplate parameters of the motor P03 05 is the power factor of the motor mainly the asynchronous motor Generally the power factor of the synchronous motor is 1 which will be refreshed automatically after the normal setting of rotation You can choose not to change P03 05 manually or choose to change it manually in the following two situations 1 when all the settings are completed 2 when there is no setting B Note The power class of the motor shall be configured according to that of the drive Generally it can only be two classes lower or one class higher that that of the drive Otherwise the control performance cannot be P03 06 00 000 65 000 depending on model Leakage inductance or direct axis inductance of motor 1 0000 0 2000 0 depending on model Rotator resistance or back EMF
309. r the menu 4 Press the key to change 0 to 2 5 Press the ENTER DATA key to confirm the change and return the first level menu The change is successfully completed The above operation steps are shown in Fig 4 6 MENU ENTER ENTER MENU Fig 4 6 Operation example of restoring leave factory values 4 1 3 5 Setting the set frequency For example set P02 05 25 00Hz Example To change the setting of function code P02 05 from 50 00Hz to 25 00Hz In the stop parameter display status press MENU ESC key to enter the first level menu P00 00 Press the gt key to select the second highest bit Press key to change P00 00 to P02 00 Press the gt key to select the unit place Press key to change P02 00 to P02 05 Press the ENTER DATA key to enter the second level menu Press the V key to change 50 00 to 25 00 a de Press the ENTER DATA key to confirm the change and return the first level menu The change is successfully completed The above operation steps are shown in Fig 4 7 54 ENTER Fig 4 7 Operation example for setting the set frequency 4 1 3 6 Switching status display parameters The drive parameters displayed on the operation panel when the drive is stopped can be set through function code P16 02 such as the frequency bus voltage etc For details please refer to the description of function codes of Group P16 These status parameters can be viewed by pre
310. rameter 3 The adjustment of the PI parameter in case of the high low speed running of the speed regulator ASR 156 If both high speed and low speed running with load are required by the system you can set the ASR switching frequency P05 03 and P05 07 Generally while the system is running with the low frequency you can increase the proportional gain P and reduce the integral time accordingly to improve the dynamic response performances The parameters of the speed regulator usually can be adjusted according to the following steps 1 Select the proper switching frequency P05 03 and P05 07 2 Adjust the proportional gain P05 04 and the integral time P05 05 for the high speed running and ensure no oscillation and sound dynamic response performance for the system 3 Adjust the proportional gain P05 00 and the integral time P05 01 for the low speed running and ensure no oscillation and sound dynamic response performance for the low frequency running 4 Speed regulator ASR filtering Let the output of the speed regulator ASR pass the delay filter once to get the torque current reference P05 02 and P05 06 are the time constant of ASR1 and ASR2 output filters respectively P05 11 0 1 0 0 00 10 00 0 00 Differential gain enabling P05 12 ASR differential gain The differential gain of the speed loop P05 12 is used to increase the damping of the system which can reduce the overshoot and backswing of the system There
311. rameters are downloaded the parameters in the operation panel still exist so they can be copied by multiple drives repeatedly 6 2 Status display parameters Group P01 The function code parameters of Group P01 are used to monitor some status parameters of the drive and the motor They also can be used to display the frequency reference channel and set the parameters like frequency PID reference PID feedback and PID error P01 00 Main reference frequency channel 0 10 0 Monitoring the channel of the main set frequency under common running mode It displays 0 under non common running mode P01 01 Main reference set frequency 3000 00 3000 00 0 00 Monitoring the main set frequency under common running mode It displays 0 under non common running mode P01 02 Auxiliary reference set frequency 3000 00 3000 00 0 00 Monitoring the auxiliary set frequency under common running mode It displays 0 under non normal running mode or incase of no auxiliary reference P01 03 Set frequency 3000 00 3000 00 0 00 Monitoring the final frequency combined by the main and auxiliary frequency The positive value stands for forward running and the negative value stands for reverse running P01 04 Frequency command after Acc Dec 3000 00 3000 00 0 00 Monitoring the output frequency of the drive after the acceleration deceleration including the frequency direction P01 05 Output frequency 3000 00 3000 00 0 00 Monitoring the output fre
312. ration of the host device and that of the operation panel on the user password are independent even if the operation panel has decrypted already the host device still need to decrypt to access to the function code parameters and vice versa 285 5 When the host device gets the authority to access to parameters it will read the user password and return to 0000 rather than the actual user password 6 The host device gets the authority to access to the function code after decryption If there is no communication within 5 minutes the access authority is invalid To access to this function code please re enter the user password 7 When the host device has gotten the access authority no user password or decrypted already if the user password is set or changed through the operation panel the host device still has current access authority with no need to re encrypt If the access authority becomes invalid it needs to re encrypt write new password to get the access authority 9 CRC verification For the purpose of improving speed CRC 16 is often realized through the table The following is the C language source code for realizing CRC 16 Please note the final results have exchanged high and low bytes that is the result is the CRC checksum to be sent unsigned short CRC16 unsigned char msg unsigned char The function returns the CRC as a length unsigned short type unsigned char uchCRCHi OxFF high byte o
313. re detection C Output voltage offset under 92 VIF D Output voltage under V F E Reserved command rate numerator Tens place of LED Al2 function selection is the same as above Hundreds place of LED Al3 function selection is the same as above Alt hee P10 02 ee Alt filtering 0 000 10 000s 0 001s 0 010s filtering Al2 Cts P10 03 ayes Al2 filtering 0 000 10 000s 0 001s 0 010s filtering Al3 ee P10 04 as Al3 filtering 0 000 10 000s 0 001s 0 010s filtering Unit place of LED Al1 curve selection 0 Line 1 1 Line 2 2 Curve 1 Analog Analog P10 05 ane bine Tens place of LED Al2 curve 1 0210H 1 A selection the same as above selection selection Hundreds place of LED Al3 curve selection the same as above Thousands place of LED Pulse input curve selection the same as above Maximum g Maximum P10 06 reference P10 08 100 0 0 1 100 0 i reference 1 of line 1 Actual value Actual value Frequency reference correspon 9 d 0 0 100 0 of Fmax P10 07 dstothe 20 esPones 0 1 100 0 to maximum Torque 0 0 300 0 of Te maximum reference reference 1 Magnetic flux 0 0 100 0 pe of line 1 Minimum Minimum P10 08 reference 0 0 P10 06 0 1 0 0 4 reference 1 of line 1 Actual value Actual value correspon corresponds P10 09 ds to the ee The same as P10 07 0 1 0 0 Sas to minimum minimum reference 1 reference of line 1 P10 10 Maximum Maximum P10 12 10
314. rection BITO BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 Position 5 direction Position 6 direction Position 7 direction Position 8 direction Fig 6 82 Each segment direction setting of internal position H01 27 H01 28 H01 29 H01 30 H01 31 H01 32 H01 33 H01 34 Automatic operation mode timer 1 Automatic operation mode timer 2 Automatic operation mode timer 3 Automatic operation mode timer 4 Automatic operation mode timer 5 Automatic operation mode timer 6 Automatic operation mode timer 7 Automatic operation mode timer 8 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 0 600 00 2 00 If H01 04 select 1 holding time after reaching position 1 to 8 H01 35 H01 36 H01 37 Positioning speed acceleration and deceleration time of internal position reference when setting single point positioning or indexing H01 38 Positioning speed Positioning acceleration time Positioning deceleration time 0 100 0 20 0 0 300 0 2 00 0 300 00 2 00 Unit place The current reference position Positioning status parameters 0 88 H 00 1 8 represents the current position is the position of 1 8 Tens place The current position of the positioning completed 1 8 represents the current completed position is the H01 39 H01 40 H01 41 Spindle swing is generally used for automatic shift of the spindle system spindle swing enabled terminal
315. red P00 06 30 0 Disabled 1 Uploading parameter When it is set as 1 and confirmed the drive will upload all the function code setting values of Group POO P98 in the control panel to the EPPROM of the operation panel to store 2 Downloading parameters When it is set as 2 and confirmed the drive will download all the function code setting values of Group POO P98 from the operation panel to the internal control panel to store 3 Downloading parameters Except the motor parameters When it is set as 3 and confirmed the drive will download all the function code setting values of Group P0O P98 from the operation panel to the internal control panel to store Except the status display parameters of Group P01 motor parameters of Group P03 and parameters of P98 128 go Note 1 For the operation panel the parameters shall be uploaded first otherwise the memory of the operation panel is blank When the parameters are uploaded once the function code parameters will be saved into the operation panel for ever 2 Before downloading the parameters to the drive the drive will check the integrity and version of the function code parameters in the operation panel If the memory is blank or the parameter is incomplete or the parameter version is inconsistent with the current drive version the number of function codes is different it is not allowed to download the parameter and the copy error information will appear 3 When the pa
316. reference 12kHz relative to 20kHz P09 11 7 P10 17 40 00Hz P02 15 x100 set the corresponding set frequency percentage of the inflection point 2 of the curve 1 reference 12kHz pulse signal 8 P10 18 8 20x100 40 0 set the percentage of the inflection point 1 of the curve 1 reference 8kHZz relative to 20kHz P09 11 9 P10 19 10 00Hz P02 15 x100 set the corresponding set frequency percentage of the inflection point 1 of the curve 1 reference 8kHz pulse signal 10 P10 20 1 20x100 5 0 set the percentage of the minimum reference of curve 2 1kHz elative to 20kHz P14 13 11 P10 21 50 00Hz P02 15 x100 set the corresponding set frequency percentage of the minimum reference 1kHz pulse signal A Output frequency P10 21 100 P10 19 80 P10 17 20 P10 15 10 pulse signal fi 1 P10 20 5 P10 18 40 P10 16 60 P10 14 100 Fig 6 52 Example of parameter setting for pulse signal input P10 22 Analog output type 0 11H 00 199 Tens Unit AO1 output type selection 0 0 10V or 0 20mA 1 2 10V or 4 20mA AO2 output type selection 0 0 10V or 0 20mA 1 2 10V or 4 20mA Fig 6 53 Analog output type selection This function code is used for selecting the analog output range of AO1 and AO2 For the voltage or current output it shall be determined by the jumper on the terminal board For details please refer to the descripti
317. refers to the integral value of PID control when the input terminal is closed For details please refer to the PID control block diagram 34 Main reference frequency source selection 1 35 Main reference frequency source selection 2 36 Main reference frequency source selection 3 The switching of the frequency reference channels in Table 6 10 can be realized by selecting the ON OFF combination of terminal 1 2 and 3 through the frequency reference channels It is enabled when the relation between the terminal switching and the function code P02 04 is later comer Table 6 10 Expression of frequency reference channel selection Selecting terminal Selecting terminal Selecting terminal 3 as main 2 as main 1 as main Main frequency reference frequency frequency frequency channel selection reference channel reference channel reference channel OFF OFF OFF Adopt the settings of P02 04 OFF OFF ON Operation panel A V reference OFF ON OFF Terminal UP DOWN reference OFF ON ON Al analog reference ON OFF OFF Terminal PULSE reference ON OFF ON Simple PLC ON ON OFF Process closed loop PID ON ON ON Multi speed 37 Switching main reference frequency to Al The main set frequency channel will be switched to Al reference when this function terminal is enabled The choosing of Al shall be set in the Al function of Group P10 01 The frequency reference channel will be restored when this functio
318. reset is not available 1 0 times times for module protection external device fault and Al over current fault Aut t Reset P97 14 a eRe 2 0 20 0s per time 0 18 5 0s interval interval 0 No abnormal record 1 Over current during the drive acceleration Er oC1 2 Over current during the drive deceleration Er oC2 3 Over current when the drive is running with constant speed Er oC3 4 Over voltage during the drive acceleration Er oU1 5 Over voltage during the drive i deceleration Er oU2 P97 15 The first First new s 4 0 fault type fault 6 Over voltage when the drive is running with constant speed Er oU3 7 Low speed overload Er STE 8 Input side phase loss Er rF 9 Output side phase loss Er odF 10 Power module protection Er drv 11 Inverter bridge over temperature Er oH1 12 Rectifier bridge over temperature Er oH2 111 13 Drive overload Er oL1 14 Motor overload Er oL2 15 External fault Er EFT 16 EEPROM read write error Er EEP 17 Abnormal serial port communication Er SC1 18 Abnormal contactor Er rLy1 19 Abnormal current detection circuit Er CUr Hall or amplifying circuit 20 System interference Er CPU 21 PID feedback lost Er FbL 22 External reference command lost Er EGL 23 Keyboard parameter copy error Er CoP 24 Poor auto tuning Er TUn 25 Local PG fault Er PG1 26 Undervoltage during running
319. rminal of X1 X8 Its corresponding terminal function shall be defined as function No 5 three wire running control P09 09 Terminal UP DN 0 01 99 99Hz s 1 00 This function code is used to adjust the change rate of terminal UP DOWN when setting the frequency P09 10 Terminal filtering time 0 500ms 10ms 183 The interference immunity of terminals X1 X8 can be improved by properly increasing the value of P09 10 the longer the filtering time of the terminal is the longer the action delay time for the terminal will be Note When terminal X7 X8 is used as the common digital input terminal this filtering time P09 10 is enabled when terminal X7 X8 is used as the high speed pulse input terminal the filtering time is P09 14 P09 11 Maximum input pulse frequency of X7 0 1 100 0kHz 10 0 kHz When the digital input terminal X7 is used as the high speed pulse input terminal the maximum input pulse frequency can be determined by this function code P09 12 Maximum input pulse frequency of X8 0 1 100 0kHz 10 0 kHz When the digital input terminal X8 is used as the high speed pulse input terminal the maximum input pulse frequency can be determined by this function code P09 13 Pulse reference central point selection 00 22 00 This function code defines three different central point modes when terminals X7 or X8 is used as the pulse input Unit place X7 central point selection 0 No central point As shown in Fig 6
320. ror y reference can not be given by the process closed loop simultaneously Short circuit of P24 and terminal Confirm whether the wiring of P24 and Control board COM COM is correct Er 24v 24V power short circuit The interface board circuit is Replace the interface board seek for damaged service support The expansion card is poorly Expansion card Reinsert the expansion card Er oPT inserted fault The expansion card is damaged Seek for service support One of the phases The most ha Grounding short f Check the grounding short circuit of the Er GdF likely one is phase U is circuit fault i ees output three phase and troubleshoot it grounding short circuited Modify the setting of the group P05 function Er dEv Toglarge speed ASR parameters are improper 3 9 A deviation DEV code 253 Fault Fault type Possible fault cause Solutions code fault DEV deviation detection value ARA Modify the DEV detection value setting setting is too low Heavy load fluctuation Eliminate the load vibration AD Check whether the feedback value input PID feedback PID feedback value out of limited f i r Er Fbo eee voltage is normal if normal seek for service exceeding limit range support The ambient temperature is too i Lower the ambient temperature high The motor duct is blocked Clean the motor duct Er oHL Motor r o i over temperature The motor fa
321. rotection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running Action upon EEPROM abnormality 0 Activate protection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running Action upon 10V short circuit 0 Activate protection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running Fig 6 76 Fault protection and alarm property setting 1 Fault protection and alarm property setting 2 220 0 2223H 0000 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Action upon phase loss 0 Activate protection upon I O phase loss 1 No protection upon input phase loss 2 No protection upon output phase loss 3 No protection upon I O phase loss Action upon loss of external analog frequency torque input 0 No action 1 Activate protection and coast to stop 2 Alarm and keep running Action upon motor overheat 0 Activate protection and decelerate to stop 1 Activate protection and coast to stop 2 Alarm and keep running Action upon analog input fault 0 Activate protection and decelerate to stop 1 Activate protection and coast to stop 2 Alarm and keep running Fig 6 77 Fault protection and alarm property setting 2 P97 02 Fault protection and alarm property setting 3 0 2113H 0000 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Action upon temperature sampling disconnection 0 Activate temperature protection upon inverter and rectifier and stop in
322. rted to the corresponding torque offset value It is necessary to set the corresponding function of P10 01 analog input function as torque offset This torque offset will not change with the change of the Al input voltage 51 Pulse input terminal of the electric torque limit valid only for X7 or X8 This function is only valid for terminals X7 or X8 It determines the electric torque limit value through the external input pulse frequency When the external input pulse frequency reaches the maximum input frequency P09 11 or P09 12 the corresponding electric torque limit value is 300 52 Pulse input terminal of the braking torque limit valid only for X7 or X8 This function is only valid for terminals X7 or X8 It determines the braking torque limit value through the external input pulse frequency When the external input pulse frequency reaches the maximum input frequency P09 11 or P09 12 the corresponding braking torque limit value is 300 53 Torque reference pulse input terminal valid only for X7 or X8 This function is only valid for terminals X7 or X8 It determines the torque reference value through the external input pulse frequency The pulse inputs of functions 51 53 need to be adjusted through the curve of Group P10 54 Zero servo enable terminal When this terminal function is enabled the drive enters zero servo status For the zero servo functions refer to the description of the relevant zero servo functions of PO5 17 P
323. s effect the current loop gain can be adjusted by changing P12 05 and P12 06 1 Calculate automatically after tuning The current loop proportional gain and current loop integral time are automatically calculated in identifying the motor parameter The PI values are saved to P12 05 and P12 06 respectively after identifying the parameter P12 05 Current loop proportional gain ACR P P12 06 Current loop integral time ACR I 1 5000 1000 0 5 100 0ms 8 0 P12 05 and P12 06 are the PI regulator parameters of the current loop Increasing KP or decreasing of the current loop can accelerate the dynamic response of the system decreasing KP or increasing can improve the stability of the system CJ Note For most applications it is not necessary to adjust the PI parameter of the current loop It is recommended to change this parameter carefully P12 07 P12 08 Anti trip function enabling 0 1 0 0 00 99 99 Hz s 10 00 Frequency reduction rate upon voltage compensation Anti trip function is used for defining whether the drive automatically performs low voltage compensation in case of voltage decreasing or instantaneous under voltage The anti trip operation shall be kept for the drive via the load feedback energy by properly decreasing the output frequency When P12 07 is set as 0 disabled When P12 07 is set as 1 enabled and perform the compensation for the low voltage When performing the voltage compensation if t
324. s place of LED BITO Analog closed loop feedback BIT1 Analog closed loop reference flashing BIT2 Terminal status without unit BIT3 DC bus voltage 00 P16 02 LED display parameter selection when stop Stop display Binary setting 0 No display 1 Display Unit place of LED BITO Preset frequency Hz BIT1 Running speed r min BIT2 Preset speed r min BIT3 DC bus voltage V Tens place of LED BITO Running line speed m s BIT1 Preset line speed m s BIT2 Analog closed loop feedback BIT3 Analog closed reference Hundreds place of LED BITO Al1 V BIT1 Al2 V BIT2 Al3 V BIT3 Terminal status without unit Note The default display shall be set frequency when all the parameters are 0 009H P16 03 Line speed coefficient Line speed coefficient 0 1 999 9 VF PG Line speed mechanical rotating speed x P16 03 Preset line speed Preset rotating speed x P16 03 VF NPG Line speed operation frequency 0 1 1 0 106 x P16 03 Preset line speed Preset frequency x P16 03 Non VF Line speed measured estimated rotating speed x P16 03 Preset line speed Preset frequency x P16 03 0 1 999 9 VF PG Running rotating speed mechanical rotating speed x P16 04 Preset rotating speed Preset rotating speed x P16 04 VF NPG Running rotating speed running frequency
325. saved into P02 08 upon power down 1 The auxiliary frequency will not be saved upon power down Not be saved upon power down Thousands place Auxiliary digital frequency stop control 0 The auxiliary frequency will be maintained upon stop The auxiliary frequency is maintained upon stop 1 The set frequency is reset upon stop The auxiliary frequency is reset upon stop 0 No auxiliary reference The set frequency is composed of the main set frequency only and the auxiliary set frequency is 0 by default 1 Digital reference 1 adjusting with the amp V keys on the operation panel 138 The initial value of the auxiliary frequency is P02 08 which can be adjusted with the A amp V keys on the operation panel 2 Digital reference 2 adjusting with terminal UP DOWN The initial value of the auxiliary frequency is P02 08 which can be adjusted with the terminal UP DOWN For the setting of terminal UP DOWN please refer to the function codes of Group P09 3 Digital reference 3 serial port communication reference The auxiliary frequency is set based on the serial port reference and its initial value is the value of P02 08 The value of the auxiliary set frequency is changed through the serial port frequency setting command 4 Al analog reference The auxiliary frequency is set based on the Al terminal Al1 Al2 and AI3 reference 5 Terminal pulse PULSE reference The auxiliary frequency is determined by the terminal pulse frequ
326. se 0x05 0x03 None 0x02 0x012C 0x49C9 Read the output current of No 5 drive and the response output current is 30 0A 32 bits mode Data Register Number of registers or Register Address Command code Check code frame address number of bytes read content Request 0x05 0x03 0xE506 0x0002 None 0x1282 0x000001 Response 0x05 0x03 None 0x04 ne OxBFBE Read the deceleration time 1 i e P02 14 of No 5 drive and the response deceleration time is 6 0s 16 bits mode Data Register Number of registers or Register Address Command code Check code frame address number of bytes read content Request 0x05 0x03 0x020E 0x0001 None 0xE5F5 289 Response 0x05 0x03 None 0x02 0x003C 0x4995 Read the deceleration time 1 i e P02 14 of No 5 drive and the response deceleration time is 6 0s 32 bits mode Data Command Register Number of registers or Register Address Check code frame code address number of bytes read content Request 0x05 0x03 0x820E 0x0002 None 0x8C34 Response 0x05 0x03 None 0x04 0x0000003C OxBFE2 Change high level of internal position reference i e function code H01 10 of No 5 drive to be 60000 which cannot be saved upon power off 32 bits mode Data NE Command Register Number of Number of bytes Register Check ress frame code address registers of register content content code Request 0x05 0x10 Ox9FOA 0x0002 0x04 0x0000EA60 0xC45E Response 0x05 0x10 0x9F0A 0x0
327. sing the internal 24V power supply of the drive 2 When using the external power supply which shall meet the UL CLASS 2 standard and 4A fuse shall be installed between the power supply and the interface the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 14 be sure to remove the short circuit plate between PLC and P24 P24 24V 7 PLC ae ri xx LO i 4 ia De 4 K 3 3V Fuse p ae he y4 j r K COM Fig 3 14 The wiring mode when using the external power supply 2 Source drain mode 1 When the internal 24V power supply is used and the external controller is the NPN common emitter output the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 15 External Controller P2 24V i Pat 3 3V Pie 3 3V j lt i COM Fig 3 15 The source connecting mode when using the internal 24V power supply of the drive 35 2 When the internal 24V power supply is used and the external controller is the PNP common emitter output note be sure to remove the short circuit plate between the user terminal PLC and P24 first then connect it between PLC and COM terminals firmly the wiring mode is as shown in Fig 3 16 External Controller P24 7 t24V Kt COM 3 3V PLC k be af l x l T i 3 3V Vall Fig 3 1
328. sition 7 arrived 44 Positioning position 8 arrived 37 44 When multi point positioning corresponding position arrived signal will be output after corresponding position arrived Only the following function No will be shown in the quick menu 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 16 P09 22 Output terminal enabled status setting 0 F 0 Unit Bit 0 Y 1Positive negative logic define Bit 1 Y 2Positive negative logic define Bit 2 R1Positive negative logic define Bit 3 R2Positive negative logic define Fig 6 39 Output terminal enabled status setting This function code defines the positive negative logic of the output terminal Positive logic enabled when the output terminal is connected to the corresponding common end disabled when the terminal is disconnected Negative logic disabled when the output terminal is connected to the corresponding common end enabled when the terminal is disconnected P09 23 Relay R1 output delay 0 1 10 0s 0 1s This function code defines the time delay from the state change of relay R1 to its output change P09 24 Frequency arrival FAR detection width 0 00 3000 00Hz 2 50Hz This function code is used to detect the deviation between the output frequency and the set frequency If the output terminal function is set as 1 Frequency arrival signal when the deviation between the output frequency and the set frequency is within the range set by this function code
329. sitioning positioning times times H01 10 High level High level of 0 150 1 0 of internal internal position position 1 referenc 1 reference e H01 11 Low level Low level of 0 65535 1 0 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 1 referenc 1 reference e 118 H01 12 High level High level of 0 150 of internal internal position position 2 referenc 2 reference e H01 13 Low level Low level of 0 65535 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 2 referenc 2 reference e H01 14 High level High level of 0 150 of internal internal position position 3 referenc 3 reference e H01 15 Low level Low level of 0 65535 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 3 referenc 3 reference e H01 16 High level High level of 0 150 of internal internal position position 4 referenc 4 reference e H01 17 Low level Low level of 0 65535 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 4 referenc 4 reference e H01 18 High level High level of 0 150 of internal internal position position 5 referenc 5 reference e H01 19 Low level Low level of 0 65535 of internal internal Refresh after setting the low level position position 5 referenc 5 reference e H01 20 High level High level of 0 150 of internal internal position position 6 referenc 6 reference e H01 2
330. ssing the gt key on the operation panel when they have been set The example for the status parameter display in the drive stop status when P16 02 is FFF is as shown in Fig 4 8 Fig 4 8 Operation example for switching status parameter display 4 2 Servo drive runing mode The terms describing the drive control running and status will appear in the following chapters Please read carefully this chapter It will help you understand and properly use the functions described in the following chapters 4 2 1 Servo drive running command channel The drive running command channel refers to the physical channel for the drive to receive the running command start stop jog etc There are four types of running command channels 1 Operation panel To control through the RUN STOP and M when set as the JOG function keys on the operation panel 2 Control terminal To control through the control terminals X1 X2 default other digital input terminals can be set as FWD and REV input control terminals as well COM two wire system and Xi three wire system 3 Serial port To control the start and stop through the host device 55 The command channel can be selected through function code P02 02 the M key on the operation panel ENTER DATA key and the multi functional input terminals functions No 38 39 and 40 are selected through P09 00 P09 07 Note Before switching the channels be sure to conduct the switching trial op
331. t the DC bus voltage of the main j disconnects and the gt i contactor is closed completely LU runs 3 circuit will drop the drive will drive load is large i immediate display LU first and will not ly display Er JCF fault 259 Chapter9 Maintenance The influence of the ambient temperature humidity dust and vibration as well as the aging devices in the drive may cause the drive faults Thus it is necessary to carry out daily and periodical maintenance 9 1 Daily maintenance CJ Note Before inspection and maintenance please confirm the following items first Otherwise electric shock may occur 1 The power supply of the drive has been cut off 2 Ensure that the charging LED lamp is off 3 The voltage between terminals DC and terminals DC measured by DC high voltmeter should be below 36V The drive should be working in the environments stipulated in Section 2 1 In addition there may be some unexpected situations during the operation so users should carry out daily maintenance according to the instructions in the following table The effective ways to prolong the service life of the drive is to maintain a good operating environment record daily operating data and discover the cause of abnormity as early as possible Table 9 1 Instructions for daily inspection Inspection essentials Inspection Jud REE i i udgment standar iene I
332. t X7 X8 terminal function P09 06 79 P09 07 80 the position reference is given by the terminal X7 X8 input where X7 represents the direction X8 represents pulse train forward when X7 is connected reverse when X7 is not connected you can set the hundreds place of H00 01 to 1 to make the X7 logic negated 2 Set P04 11 X7 X8 number of pulses per revolution the following speed of the motor can be obtained based on the pulse frequency of X8 the speed value has nothing to do with the electronic gear function 3 Set H00 04 H00 05 electronic gear numerator denominator when the motor follow pulse train the relationships between the encoder feedback and pulse train is electronic gear ratio 4 For example the motor is a 4 pole motor the encoder is 1024 lines asked when the pulse train is 100k corresponding to the motor speed is 1500rpm you need to set P04 11 100k 60 1500 4000 electronic gear ratio 1024 1500 60 100K 256 1000 you can set H00 04 256 H00 05 1000 5 Adjust the speed loop PI parameters and position loop P parameters H00 08 position loop Kp1 H00 09 position loop Kp2 H00 10 position loop gain switching mode ensuring that the pulse train tracking process is fast and without overshoot You can set H00 02 pulse command filter time as needed You can set function code H01 48 to real time monitor pulse tracking error 6 If pulse input of the X8 is not the ramp pulse input changes maybe t
333. t from the loads It is prohibited to carry out setting when the motor is connected to loads and in such case the installation angle of the encoder will be automatically measured additionally and the measured value will be written into P03 26 2 Enabled motor in rotate status Before the auto tuning be sure to enter the correct nameplate parameters of the controlled motor If the controlled motor is motor 1 input P03 00 P03 04 if the controlled motor is motor 2 input P03 12 P03 16 During the rotation setting the asynchronous motor is in static state first The stator resistance R1 leakage inductive reactance relative to rated frequency X and rotator resistance R2 of the asynchronous motor will be automatically measured And then the asynchronous motor will turn into the rotation state and the mutual inductive reactance Xm and no load current lo of the motor will be automatically measured The measured parameter values will be automatically written into P03 06 P03 10 for motor 2 they will be written into PO3 18 P03 22 P03 05 for motor 2 P03 17 will be automatically refreshed when the rotation setting is finished During the rotation auto tuning of the synchronous motor if With PG vector control is selected as the control mode The measured parameter values will be automatically written into P03 06 P03 07 and P03 09 for motor 2 they will be written into P03 18 P03 19 and P03 21 If With PG vector control is
334. t lem 0 200 of the rated current of the motor 5 Output torque 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 6 Output torque current 0 300 of the torque current Rotating speed of motor V F 7 0 Maximum rotating speed control disabled 8 Output voltage 0 150 of the rated voltage of the drive 191 Item Function Indication range 9 Al1 voltage 10V 10V 4 20mA 10 Al2 voltage 10V 10V 4 20mA 11 Al3 voltage 10V 10V 12 Output power 0 200 of the rated power 13 Electric torque limit value 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 14 Braking torque limit value 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 15 Torque offset 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor 16 Torque reference 0 300 of the rated torque of the motor HOST device expansion 17 0 65535 function 1 Encoder frequency division 18 Reserved output Percentage of 19 0 65535 communication card The DO pulse frequency output 0 to maximum output pulse frequency The linear correspondence relationship between the DO output and the indication range is as shown in Table 6 13 P09 30 Maximum output pulse frequency 0 1 50 0kHz 10 0 kHz This function code defines the maximum output frequency when the terminal Y1 is used as the DO high speed pulse output terminal P09 31 Pulse output central point selection 0 2 0 This function code defines three different central point modes when the terminal Y1 is used as the DO high speed pulse ou
335. t this The parameter group number x A i Number of parameters in Read the number of parameters in this 0x0003 occupies the high byte and the low this group group byte is 00 The high byte is the group 0x0004 ienn Pa iow number of next parameter Read the group number of next byte E 00 gh byt group and the low byte is parameter group yi 00 The parameter group number The high byte Se the group j 0x0005 occupies the high byte and the low number of previous Read the group number of previous byte P 00 g parameter group and the parameter group y i low byte is 00 Read the current status parameter Current status parameter index please refer to the definition of 0x0006 0x6500 index the status parameter group for its meaning Next status parameter Read the next status parameter 0x0007 0x6500 index P please refer to the definition of the status parameter group for its meaning 0x0008 The parameter group number and Leave factory value of the Read the leave factory value of the 270 Sub command code Data request Data response Function group internal index occupies the high byte and the low byte respectively parameter function code parameter the control parameter and status parameter do not support this In the above table when reading the upper lower limit value the data returned is 32 bits long i e 4 bytes The status parameter does not
336. tal carry selection 0 single point carry 1 Multi point carry Hundreds place single point carry mode 0 Single point positioning once 1 Single point multiple positioning positioning times set by the function code Thousands place Single point multiple positioning mode 0 Reciprocating 1 Continuous H01 01 Homing Homing Unit place Origin detector types 1 0009H mode mode and looking for direction settings 116 0 Homing according to the current direction CCWL as a return to the origin 1 Homing according to the current direction CWL as a return to the origin 2 Forward homing ORGP as a return to the origin 3 Reverse homing ORGP as a return to the origin 4 The shortest distance homing ORGP as a return to the origin 5 Homing according to the current running direction ORGP as a return to the origin 6 Forward looking for Z pulse as a return to the origin 7 Reverse looking for Z pulse as a return to the origin 8 The shortest distance looking for Z pulse as the return to the origin 9 Homing according to the current direction Z pulse as a return to the origin Tens place Homing command mode 0 Level mode 1 Pulse mode Hundreds place Homing 0 Homing only the first run 1 Homing each run 2 Homing every time power on Reserved Thousands place The origin correction mode 0 Single correction 1 Real time correction H01 02 Positionin g
337. te Removal It is recommended to push both snap fits of the dustproof plate from the inside of the enclosure with tools so that the snap fits can be separated from the mid enclosure Now the dustproof plate is removed Note Removing the dustproof plate from the outside of the enclosure directly may damage it or the mid enclosure Installation Place the snap fit on one end of the dustproof plate into the mid enclosure move the dustproof plate to another end while pressing it till the snap fit on another end also enters into the mid enclosure Now the dustproof plate is installed Note Do not press the dustproof plate forcibly if it is deformed otherwise it may be damaged 2 2 Installation environment When selecting the installation environment the following issues should be taken into account The ambient temperature should be within 10 C 40 C If the temperature is between 40 C 50 C derating is required e The humidity should be within 5 95 RH non condensing The vibration at the installation place should be less than 5 9m s7 0 6g The device should be protected from the direct sunlight The device should be mounted in the location free of dust and metal powder Do not install the device in the place with corrosive gas and explosive gas If there is any special installation requirement please consult our company 2 3 Mounting direction and space In general the drive shall be installed vertically to av
338. tection signal 21 Reserved 22 Analog torque offset enabled 23 Over torque output 24 Under torque output 25 Positioning completed 26 Positioning close 27 Reserved 28 Position tolerance alarm 29 Reserved Spindle positioning back to zero 30 31 Spindle indexing completed completed 32 Reserved 33 Reserved 34 Drive FWD REV indication terminal 35 Motor 1 and 2 indication terminal 36 Reserved 37 Positioning position1 arrived 38 Positioning position 2 arrived 39 Positioning position 3 arrived 40 Positioning position 4 arrived 41 Positioning position 5 arrived 42 Positioning position 6 arrived 43 Positioning position 7 arrived 44 Positioning position 8 arrived 0 Drive in running state signal RUN When the drive is running the relevant indication signal is output 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR Refer to the function description of P09 24 2 Speed non zero signal When the drive is running and the speed is higher than the P08 07 stop speed the relevant indication signal is output The speed non zero detection mode is set by P08 09 stop speed detection mode Note The zero speed detection is enabled in all the control modes 3 Frequency level detection signal FDT1 Refer to the function description of PO9 25 P09 26 187 4 Frequency level detection signal FDT2 Refer to the function description of P09 27 P09 28 5 Overload detection signal OL When the drive outp
339. ternal position6 reference Positioning speed H01 35 ON ON OFF CH01 21 Low level of internal position7 reference Positioning speed H01 35 ON ON ON CH01 23 amp Note 1 When the spindle positioning mode Unit place of H01 00 select 0 carry control H01 10 H01 25 setting range is 0 to 65535 unit pulses for example motor encoder is 2500 lines when single point positioning if you need to control the motor positioned 1 4 turn then set H01 10 0 H01 11 2500 The relationship between the low level and high evel of the internal position reference is When setting high level 1 on behalf of a low level 65536 which if set H01 10 3 H01 11 892 then 3 65536 892 197500 197500 divide 10000 is 19 75 the motor will turn 19 75 rotation 2 When the spindle positioning mode Unit place of HO1 00 select 1 indexing control HO1 10 H01 22 low level of seven internal position reference on behalf of seven indexing angle while the parameter unit is 0 00 degrees When the function code setting is greater than 360 00 internal system will automatically subtract 360 00 degrees makes reference within 0 to 360 00 degrees H01 26 Each segment direction setting of internal position 0 600 00 0 0 The same as the running direction 1 Running in the opposite direction 235 Tens place Unit place BITO BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 Position 1 direction Position 2 direction Position 3 direction Position 4 di
340. the lower cover is installed 2 Removal and installation of operation panel Removal Insert your finger into the square hole above the operation panel press the clip in direction C and then separate the upper section of the operation panel with the upper cover in direction D then separate the connector with the operation panel Now the operation panel is removed Installation Ensure the display of the operation panel face upwards press the operation panel into its box while keeping them parallel Now the operation panel is installed 3 Removal and installation of upper cover Removal Loosen the fixing bolts of the upper cover with the screwdriver pull in direction E to separate the upper cover from the mid enclosure if necessary press the snap fits of the upper cover from its side with the straight screwdriver Now the upper cover is removed Note Do not directly remove the upper cover with the operation panel on it The operation panel should be removed before removing the upper cover to avoid damages to the connecting base between the operation panel and control board which may cause unreliable contact between the operation panel and the control board Installation Press the lower part of the upper cover in direction F so that its snap fits can enter into the mid enclosure and then tighten the fixing bolts of the upper cover with the screwdriver Now the upper cover is installed 15 4 Removal and installation of dustproof pla
341. the running direction when the 0 Run forward running command is valid 1 Enable acceleration deceleration BITO BIT3 BIT7 BIT8 of control BIT4 character 1 will be enabled only when 0 Disable acceleration deceleration this bit is enabled The control character 1 of the host device 1 The select bit for the validity of the is valid BIT5 control character 1 of the host The control character 1 of the host device k 0 device is disabled BIT6 0 Reserved 1 Jog f d BIT7 ada SaN When both jog forward and reversely 0 The jog forward is disabled are valid it does not run when both 4 Jog reversely are disabled the jog will stop BIT8 0 The jog reversely is disabled Sire 1 The fault reset is valid The select bit for the validity of the 0 The fault reset is disabled fault reset of the host device BIT15 BIT10 0 Reserved C1 Note 1 The control command control words 1 and 2 of the host device is valid only when the value of running command channel selection is communication command the overall word 1 is valid only when its BIT5 is valid BITO BIT3 BIT7 BIT8 are valid only when its BIT4 is valid 274 2 The host device processes the faults and alarms as follows when the drive meets faults for control words 1 and 2 only the fault reset command is valid any other commands from the host device are disabled That is the host device shall reset the fault first before sending any other commands When the alarm occurs
342. the torque command External i a i selection analog current Check the wiring or adjust the input type of AL EGL reference f reference the analog reference the reference signal command lost vote signal is disconnected or too low less than 2mA Short circuit of P24 and terminal Confirm whether the wiring of P24 and COM Control board COM is correct AL 24v 24V power short circuit The interface board circuit is Replace the interface board seek for service damaged support Closed loop The parameters for feedback loss AL Fbo Modify the P14 26 setting feedback loss _ are set improperly Wrong PID Ce of The PID lower limit set value sf AL PIL limit value At Adjust the PID upper lower limit set value ti exceeds PID upper limit set value setting 256 WARNING Please carefully choose the fault alarm function otherwise the accident range extension the human injury and the property damage may be caused 8 2 Operation exception and solutions Table 8 3 Operation exception and solutions Symptoms Conditions Possible causes Solutions In stop or running status press the ENTER DATA key and retain pressure on it then press the V key successively Th The locking function of the for three times after that you can unlock e operation panel takes effect it operation An individual key or panel has each key has no Completely power off the drive and then no r
343. tor when the dynamic braking is required The recommended resistor specification for 22kW drive is 3kW 200 2 Please refer to Attached Table 2 2 when configuring the braking unit of 90kW or above 3 2 indicates two braking resistors in parallel 4 Wring and use 1 Wiring of the built in brake units of the drive Please connect the brake resistor to the P B1 and B2 terminals of drive main circuit 2 External wiring diagram of external brake unit DBU 4030 4045 Brake Resistor H DC DC M DI N PPL PB N PPI PB oo DC3BOV MASTER 00 DC3B0V MASTER 0 0 DC3BOV MASTER 00 DC630V g OC DC6307 oo DC660V DCesov mance 9 nco Cances 00 7 OO DC30V SLA 00 DC7307 SLAVE Drive 00 D7BOV oo Day SAVE 00 DC760V w N OUE OUT N N OUTOU N N OUIHUI Bp o Attached Fig 2 2 Connection diagram of the drive and brake unit 3 Diagram for external wiring of DBU 4220 4300 292 Brake Resistor 380VAC Input DC ne Attached Fig 2 3 Connection diagram of the drive and braking component 4 Functions of brake unit e Brake unit action voltage adjustment e Heatsink overheat protection Fault display and fault relay output indication The external brake unit has tripping function after IGBT short circuit effectively preventing hidden fire dangers incurred by long time overload operation of the resistor The connecting wire between th
344. tor with the running frequency lower than 30Hz 2 Variable frequency motor without low speed compensation Because the heat dissipation of the special motor for drive is not affected by the rotating speed it does not need the protection value adjustment for low speed operation Tens place Overload pre alarm detection selection 0 The overload detection works during the operation of the drive 1 The overload detection works only when the drive runs at constant speed Hundreds place Overload pre alarm action selection 222 0 The drive generates an alarm and continues operating when the overload detection is enabled and the operation panel will display AL oL1 or AL oL2 according to the setting of the hundreds place 1 The drive will activate protection action and coast to stop when the overload detection is enabled and the operation panel will display Er oL1 or Er oL2 according to the setting of the hundreds place Thousands place Overload detection level selection 0 The detection level relative to the motor rated current Alarm code AL oL2 and fault code Er oL2 pena The detection level relative to the drive rated current Alarm code AL oL1 and fault code Er m akiai 97 04 04 Overload pre alarm detection level pre Overload pre alarm detection level detection level 20 0 200 20 0 200 0 130 0 0 This function code defines the current threshold for the overload pre alarm action The setting value is the E relative to th
345. tput terminal 0 No central point As shown in Fig 6 42 Percentage 100 Pulse Frequency Fig 6 42 No central point mode The values corresponding to the pulse output frequency are all positive 1 Central point mode 1 As shown in Fig 6 43 192 Percentage 100 100 Fig 6 43 Central point mode 1 The pulse output has a central point The frequency at the central point is half of the maximum pulse output frequency P09 30 When the output pulse frequency is lower than the central point frequency the corresponding values are positive 2 Central point mode 2 The pulse output has a central point The frequency at the central point is half of the maximum pulse output frequency P09 30 When the output pulse frequency is higher than the central point frequency the corresponding values are positive Percentage 100 gt Pulse frequency 100 Fig 6 44 Central point mode 2 P09 32 Pulse output filtering time 0 00 10 00s 0 05s This function code defines the filtering time of the output pulse The longer the filtering time is the slower the output pulse frequency change rate will be P09 33 Flux detection value 10 0 100 0 100 0 It is used together with the No 20 function of the digital output terminal P09 34 Zero speed threshold 0 0 100 0 1 0 This function code is relative to the maximum output frequency P02 15 It is used together with No 10 fun
346. trol mode 3 Alarm and stop in the stop mode in all control modes Fault Fault Tens place of LED Action upon protection protection contactor abnormality P97 00 and alarm and alarm 0 Activate protection and coast to 4 0000 property property stop setting 1 setting 1 1 Alarm and keep running Hundreds place of LED Action upon EEPROM abnormality 0 Activate protection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running Thousands place of LED Action upon 10V short circuit 0 Activate protection and coast to stop 1 Alarm and keep running Unit place of LED Action upon phase loss 0 Activate protection upon input Fault Fault and output phase loss protection protection 1 No protection upon input phase P97 01 and alarm and alarm loss 1 0000 property property 2 No protection upon output setting 2 setting 2 phase loss 3 No protection upon input and output phase loss Tens place of LED Action upon 108 loss of external analog frequency torque input 0 No action 1 Activate protection and coast to stop 2 Alarm and keep running Hundreds place of LED Action upon motor overheat 0 Activate protection and decelerate to stop 1 Activate protection and coast to stop 2 Alarm and keep running Thousands place of LED Action upon analog input Al1 Al2 Al3 fault 0 Activate protection and decelerate to stop 1 Activate protection and coast to stop 2 Alarm and keep running
347. ue limit reference 157 Output torque A REV Regenerating status FWD Motoring status Negative torque limit channel Constant Positve torque Constant torque limit channel torque perad x Constant Constant power H power Constant Constant cn power power Olorspee oa eae Constant 7 oe E Constant torque i i limit channel Positve torque torque _ fp limitchannel L FWD Regenerating status REV Motoring status Fig 6 23 Torque control diagram aa Note The torque limit value shall be a positive value If it is set to be a negative value the auto limit value will be 0 P05 15 Electric torque limit value 0 0 300 0 180 0 Braking torque limit value 0 0 300 0 180 0 P05 16 When P05 13 or P05 14 is selected to be 0 P05 15 and P05 16 are used to limit the maximum output torque of the drive The limit value is the percentage of the rated output torque of the motor When large negative torque is required please adopt additionally the dynamic braking method P05 17 Zero servo function selection 0 2 0 0 Zero servo is disabled 1 Zero servo is always enabled 2 Zero servo is enabled under conditions terminal enabled Zero servo is enabled under conditions means zero servo enabled can be realized through NO 54 function of terminal Xi P05 18 Zero servo gain 0 6 000 1 000 0 00 10 00Hz 0 30Hz P05 19 Zero servo in
348. ule configuration configuration for working conditions of 10 braking utilization rate and 760V braking action voltage Attached Table 2 1 External brake module configuration Motor rated power Brake unit model and parallel Brake resistor kW number configuration Braking torque 90 DBU 4045C 2 9600W 13 60 2 120 110 DBU 4030D 3 6000W 200 3 100 132 DBU 4045C 3 9600W 13 60 3 130 160 DBU 4220B 1 40kW 3 40 1 140 200 DBU 4220B 1 60KW 3 20 1 120 220 DBU 4220B 1 60KW 3 20 1 110 280 DBU 4300 1 60KW 20 1 110 Note The above configuration suggestions are suitable for most applications For specific applications or other braking working conditions please consult our company 3 Brake resistor configuration of the built in brake unit drive The application working condition is 10 braking utilization rate Attached Table 2 2 Brake resistor accessory Motor rated power kW Braking resistor model Braking torque 0 75 70W 750Q 120 1 5 260W 400Q 120 2 2 260W 2500 140 a7 390W 1500 180 5 5 520W 100Q 120 291 7 5 780W 75Q 200 11 1040W 500 200 15 1560W 400 200 18 5 4800W 32Q 200 22 4800W 27 2Q 200 30 6000W 200 150 37 9600W 16Q 120 45 9600W 13 6Q 200 55 6000W 200 2 160 75 9600W 13 60 2 120 CJ Note 1 The drive of 75kW or below have internal brake units The user only needs to configure external braking resis
349. ultiple PG expansion cards such as incremental ABZUVW encoders Resolver encoder and SinCos encoder For machine tool servo spindle can achieve spindle accurate stop spindle tool change rigid tapping function spindle swing reaming can achieve rotary shear function SV Master can meet the requirements of the users for low noise and low EMI by adopting the integrated EMC design and optimized PWM control technology The relevant precautions during the installation wiring parameter setting troubleshooting and daily maintenance will be detailed in this manual To ensure the correct installation and operation of the SV Master series servo drive as well as its high performance please read carefully this user manual before installing the equipment This manual shall be kept properly and delivered to the actual users of the drive As the professional of the servo control system is strong please read this manual carefully before using Precautions for unpacking inspection Please check carefully when unpacking the product Whether the product has the damage signs Whether the rated value in the nameplate is consistent with your order requirement We have implemented strict inspection on the manufacturing package and delivery of the product If there is any error please contact us or your distributor immediately We are engaged in the continuous improvement of drive The relevant manuals provided by us are subject to change without prior not
350. umber of resolver pole pairs P04 18 Resolver signal disturbance 0 1000 0 This value has been greater than 800 indicates that resolver encoder signal is disconnected 153 6 6 Speed control parameters Group P05 P05 00 x Speed loop low speed proportional gain ASR1 P 0 1 200 0 20 0 P05 01 Speed loop low speed integral time ASR1 I P05 02 P05 03 P05 04 P05 05 P05 06 P05 07 P05 08 P05 09 P05 10 0 000 10 000s 0 200s ASR1 output filter 0 8 0 ASR switching frequency 1 0 0 50 0 10 0 0 1 200 0 10 0 0 000 10 000s 0 600s 0 8 0 0 0 100 0 20 0 0 1 200 0 20 0 0 000 10 000s 0 200s 0 0 100 0 80 0 Speed loop high speed proportional gain ASR2 P Speed loop high speed integral time ASR2 I ASR2 output filter ASR switching frequency 2 Proportional gain of special speed section for speed loop ASR3 P Integral time of special speed section for speed loop ASR3 I ASR switching frequency 3 Adjust the proportional gain and integral time for the speed loop Function codes of P05 00 P05 09 are enabled under the vector control mode and PG V F control mode and they represent the PI parameters of motor 1 at high speed and low speed P05 00 and P05 01 are parameters when the running frequency is less than the ASR switching frequency 1 P05 03 P05 04 and P05 05 are parameters when the running frequency is higher than the ASR switching frequency 2 P05 07 When the running frequency is between the switching fr
351. unction code can be read only can not be changed Function code option List of function code parameter settings User setting Used to set parameters by users 5 1 Basic menu function code parameter table Menu Function Minimum Default Name LCD display Setting range mode S code unit value O Q B Group P00 System management 0 Quick menu mode Only the parameters related to the quick running of the drive will be displayed 1 Full menu mode meny Menu mode i P00 00 mode f All the function parameters are 1 0 Ni J selection displayed selection 2 Changing the memory menu mode Only the parameters that are different from the leave factory values are displayed User User 0 No password P00 01 1 0 x vylo password password Other Password protection L P00 02 Fep anguage 0 Chinese 1 0 Ivo display Selection 62 language selection 1 English P00 03 Parameter protection setting Parameter protection setting 0 All the data can be changed 1 Only the main set frequency digital setting P02 05 and this function code can be changed 2 Only this function code can be changed P00 04 Selection of key functions Selection of key functions Unit place Manufacturer commissioning Tens place Function selection of the STOP RESET key 0 The STOP key is valid only in the panel control mode 1 The STOP key is v
352. urrent 300 0 300 0 23 Torque offset bipolar 300 300 24 Motor rotating speed bipolar output frequency during V F slip compensation 25 Reserved output the motor temperature measured with constant current source 26 Percentage of communication card 0 4095 Only the following function No will be shown in shortcut menu 0 9 P10 24 AO1 gain AO1 gain 0 0 200 0 0 1 100 0 AO1 zero AO1 zero P10 25 offset offset 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 correction correction Analog tput S a AO2 P10 26 terminal PPO The same as P10 23 1 00 AO2 functions P10 27 AO2 gain AO2 gain 0 0 200 0 0 1 100 0 AO2 zero AO2 zero P10 28 offset offset 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 correction correction Group P11 Auxiliary function parameters Acceleratio Accelerati A 0 Linear n on 5 g acceleration deceleration P11 00 deceleration deceleratio 1 0 1 S curve mode n mode acceleration deceleration selection selection Unit of Unit of 0 0 1s acceleration acceleratio P11 01 i 1 s 1 1 deceleratio n decelera f n time tion time 2 min P11 02 Acceleratio Accelerati 0 0 3600 0 Unit 6 00 96 n time 2 on time 2 adopts that of P11 01 0 1 Unit Decelerati Decelerati anne P11 03 a a ne es 0 0 3600 0 that of 6 00 n time on time P11 01 0 1 Unit i adopts Acceleratio Accelerati P11 04 time 3 time 3 0 0 3600 0 that of 6 00
353. ut current exceeds the overload pre alarm detection level and the retention time exceeds the overload pre alarm detection time the relevant indication signal will be output It is usually used for the overload pre alarm Refer to the description of P97 04 P97 05 6 Lockout for under voltage LU When the DC bus voltage is lower than the under voltage level the relevant indication signal will be output and the LED displays LU 7 External fault stop EXT When the drive has external fault tripping alarm Er EFT the relevant indication signal will be output 8 Frequency upper limit FHL When the set frequency 2 frequency upper limit and the running frequency reaches the frequency upper limit the relevant indication signal will be output 9 Frequency lower limit FLL When the set frequency lt frequency lower limit and the running frequency reaches the frequency lower limit the relevant indication signal will be output 10 Drive running at zero speed When the drive is running at zero speed the relevant indication signal is output To make it clear in the V F mode the indication signal is output when the output frequency is 0 In the non V F mode the indication signal is output when the feedback frequency is lower than the corresponding frequency of P09 34 11 Simple PLC stage running completion indication When the current stage of simple PLC running is completed the relevant indication signal will be output s
354. utput terminal Y1 Y2 or the 500ms pulse of relay output Please refer to the function 11 PLC stage running achieved indication and 12 PLC cycle achieved indication in PO9 18 P09 21 The simple PLC running mode selections for P13 16 are as follows 211 Thousands Hundreds tens unit PLC running mode selection 0 Stop after single cycle 1 Hold the end value after single cycle 2 Continuous cycle The restart mode selection for interrupted PLC running 0 Restart from the first section 1 Continue to run from the stage frequency of the shutdown failure moment 2 Continue to run from the running frequency of the shutdown or failure moment Storage selection of PLC status parameter upon power down 0 No storage 1 Save the stage and frequency at the moment of power down Stage time unit selection O s 1 min Fig 6 65 Simple PLC running mode selection Unit place PLC running mode selection 0 Stop after single cycle As shown in Fig 6 66 the drive will be stop automatically after completing one cycle and it can start up only after giving another running command fy f3 d a a15 ag 4 f2 1 f4 fa f5 a j ieee mee es at d5 a i 1 ri PLC running y 1 i 1 H o Tmo Ti Tai Tai Ts Te Te Ta Tu Ts RUNcommand Fig 6 66 Stop mode of PLC after single cycle 1 Hold the end value after single cycle As shown in Fig
355. with the DC reactor 23 5 AC input reactor An AC input reactor should be used if the distortion of the power grid is severe or the input current harmonic level is high even after a DC reactor has been connected to the drive It can also be used to improve the AC input power factor of the drive 6 AC output reactor If the cable between drive and motor exceeds 80m multi stranded cables and an AC output reactor should be used to suppress the high frequency harmonics Thus the motor insulation is protected against heat due to harmonics leakage current is reduced and the drive will not trip frequently 7 Input EMI filter Optional EMI filter may be installed to suppress the high frequency noise interference from the drive power cable 8 Output EMI filter Optional EMI filter may be installed to suppress the high frequency noise interference and leakage current at the drive output side 9 Safe grounding wire The drive has leakage current inside To ensure the safety the drive and motor must be grounded and the grounding resistance shall be less than 10Q The grounding wire shall be as short as possible and its cross section area CSA should meet the requirements in Table 3 2 Note The values in the table apply only when the two conductors adopt the same metal If not the cross section area of the protective conductor shall be determined according to the equivalent conducting factor Table 3 2 Cross section area of grounding wire
356. xiliary reference frequency source and main auxiliary reference frequency source 140 When any function code of terminals PO9 00 P09 07 is selected as 20 the reference frequency source can be switched between the auxiliary reference frequency source and main auxiliary reference frequency source via the terminal change B J Note When 0 selected for P02 07 and the auxiliary setting is disabled the main auxiliary calculation rule P02 10 will be disabled and the set frequency will be determined by the main set frequency Proportion adjustment selection of set frequency Proportion adjustment coefficient of set frequency 0 2 0 0 0 200 0 100 0 P02 11 P02 12 This function determines the adjustment mode of the set frequency the combined frequency after the main set frequency is added with the auxiliary set frequency For the following frequency code please refer to Fig 6 5 0 Disabled Do not adjust the set frequency that is combined by the main and auxiliary set frequency that is f f4 1 Adjust according to the maximum output frequency P02 15 Set frequency f4 f P02 15 x P02 12 100 2 Adjust according to the current frequency Set frequency f4 f f x P02 12 100 f x P02 12 P02 13 Acceleration time 1 0 0 3600 0s 6 0s 0 0 3600 0s 6 0s P02 14 Deceleration time1 The acceleration time means the time needed for the drive to accelerate from OHz to the maximum output frequency P02
357. y and the running time It shall be continued with the restart mode of interrupted PLC running defined in the tens places after power on Thousands place Stage time unit selection 0 s The running time of each stage will be counted by seconds 1 min The running time of each stage will be counted by minutes This unit is only valid for PLC running stage time T T15 the acceleration deceleration time unit during PLC operation shall be determined by P11 01 2 Note 1 If the running time setting of a certain section of the PLC is zero this section is disabled 2 Functions such as pause disabled memory status reset can be performed for the PLC process via terminals please refer to the function definition of Group P09 terminals P13 17 P13 18 P13 19 P13 20 P13 21 P13 22 P13 23 P13 24 BASES P13 26 IPMS 27 P13 28 IPMS 2Y P13 30 RIBS BBR 2 P13 33 P13 34 P13 35 P13 36 P13 37 P13 38 P13 39 P13 40 P13 41 Stage 1 setting 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 321H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 0 0 6500 0 20 0 0 327H 000 Stage 1 running time Stage 2 setting Stage 2 running time Stage 3 setting Stage 3 runnin
358. y rating depending on its For 120 drive rated current for 60s model Note This function is used for modifying and affecting the parameters of the drive and motor The motor parameter shall be readjusted after modifying this parameter P12 01 Energy saving running 0 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled In the no load or light load process of the motor detect the load current and properly adjust output voltage to achieve energy saving effect 207 CJ Note This function is especially suitable for the fan and pump load P12 02 Carrier frequency 0 7 15 0kHz 8 0 Table 6 16 Set the carrier wave frequency when the drive is outputting the PWM wave Leave factory value of carrier wave Drive power frequency 2 2 22 kW 8kHz 30 45 kW 4kHz 55 90 kW 3kHz 110 400 kw 2kHz Note 1 The carrier wave frequency can affect noise during the motor running generally it can be set as 3 5kHz For the occasion when the quiet running is required the carrier wave frequency can be generally set as 6 8kHz 2 When the drive is running with the carrier wave frequency above the leave factory setting value the drive needs to derate 5 of the power to run for every increase of 1kHz 3 In the vector control mode the minimum for the setting range of the carrier wave frequency is 3kHz P12 03 PWM mode optimization 0000 1111H 1001 Thousands Hundreds Tens Unit Enable the over
359. z shown in Fig 6 56 SVM series drive has four acceleration deceleration time settings in total The acceleration deceleration time 1 4 of the drive in the operation can be selected by different combinations of control terminals Please refer to the definition on functions of the acceleration deceleration time terminal in PO9 00 P09 07 They can be also defined as the acceleration deceleration time for the running frequency switch between various stages when the drive is running in the simple PLC mode Please refer to the description in P13 parameter group CJ Note The time unit minute second of the acceleration deceleration time 1 4 can be selected via P11 01 and the 10 00 600 00Hz s 25 00 0 20 600 00Hz s2 12 50 0 20 600 00Hz s2 20 00 ine m S O isl S n a 2 Q O EN Q g j 2 lo S n 4 n OQ E Ss n fe 3 G PULAU 10 00 600 00Hz s 25 00 P11 12 Fast deceleration at start segment of S curve 0 20 600 00Hz s2 20 00 P11 13 Fast deceleration at end segment of S curve 0 20 600 00Hz s2 12 50 P11 08 P11 13 set S curve and the setting of S curve can be divided into acceleration fast acceleration jerk and deceleration and fast deceleration decreasing the deceleration as shown in Fig 6 58 A Frequency P11 10 Time Fig 6 58 Schematic diagram of curve parameter Note 1 The acceleration and deceleration of the S curve can be adjusted at your dispos
360. zed as shown in table 8 2 For details please refer to the group P97 function code setting If the fault disappears automatically during the running process the drive will also automatically reset to the status before the alarm except AL SC1 for details please refer to the group P97 function code description Table 8 2 Alarm code table Alarm J Alarm type Possible alarm causes Solutions code The motor parameters are Perform the parameter auto tuning of the incorrect motor The load is too large Adopt the drive with higher power The DC braking amount is too Reduce the DC braking current and lengthen large the braking time AL oL1 Drive overload When instantaneous stop Set the start mode F08 00 as the speed happens restart the rotating motor tracking restart function The acceleration time is too short Lengthen the acceleration time The grid voltage is too low Check the grid voltage V F curve is improper Adjust V F curve and torque increase The motor overload protection Set the overload protection factor of motor factor setting is incorrect correctly The motor is blocked or the sudden change of load is too Check the load large AL oL2 Motor overload The universal motor runs at low AM i j i If long term low speed running is required speed for a long time with heavy special motor should be used load The grid voltage is too low Check the grid voltage V F curve

SV-Master Series Servo Drive User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents